A Latin Grammar for Schools and Colleges
Қосымшада ыңғайлырақҚосымшаны жүктеуге арналған QRRuStore · Samsung Galaxy Store
Huawei AppGallery · Xiaomi GetApps

автордың кітабын онлайн тегін оқу  A Latin Grammar for Schools and Colleges

Typographical errors are shown with mouse-hover popups, and are listed again at the end of the e-text. Some apparent errors are “ghosts” of the first edition; see endnote. In the Index, missing or incorrect punctuation has been silently regularized.

The appendix includes some fairly specialized content, notably under Numerals and Prosody. If you are dissatisfied with your device’s display, you may prefer the PDF file covering these sections.

Preface
Table of Contents
Sections 1-179: Sounds
Sections 180-396: Formation
Sections 397-712: Inflection of Nouns
Sections 713-1022: Inflection of Verbs
Sections 1023-1713: Sentences
Sections 1714-2299: Complex Sentences
Sections 2300-2745: Appendix
Index of Subjects
Index of Latin Words
Advertising

A LATIN GRAMMAR
FOR
SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES,

BY
GEORGE M. LANE, Ph.D., LL.D.
PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF LATIN IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY

 
 

REVISED EDITION

 
 

 
 

NEW YORK   CINCINNATI   CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY

Copyright, 1898, 1903, by Gardiner M. Lane and Louisa Van Rensselaer.

All rights reserved.

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

George Martin Lane died on the thirtieth of June, 1897. His Latin Grammar, in the preparation of which he had been engaged, during the intervals of teaching in Harvard University, for nearly thirty years, was at that time approaching completion. The first two hundred and ninety-one pages had been stereotyped; the pages immediately following, on the Relative Sentence and the Conjunctive Particle Sentence through quod and quia (pages 292-302), together with the chapter on the Infinitive (pages 374-386), were ready for stereotyping; of the remainder of the book, pages 303-373 and 387-436 were in the form of a first draught; finally, he had received a few weeks before his death, but had never examined, the manuscript of the chapter on Versification (pages 442-485), written at his invitation by his former pupil, Dr. Herman W. Hayley, now of Wesleyan University.

It was found that my dear and honoured master had left a written request that his work should be completed by me, in consultation with his colleagues, Professors Frederic De Forest Allen and Clement Lawrence Smith. A month had scarcely passed when scholars everywhere had another heavy loss to mourn in the sudden death of Professor Allen. Almost immediately afterwards, Professor Smith left this country, to take charge for a year of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, but not before we had agreed that circumstances required the early publication of the book, notwithstanding his absence. I was thus deprived of two eminent counsellors, whose knowledge and experience would have been of inestimable assistance.

About one hundred and twenty pages (303-373 and 387-436), exclusive of Versification, were yet to receive their final form. Professor Lane had determined the order in which the topics contained in these pages should be treated, and no change has been made in that order. Most of the main principles of syntax, too, have been left exactly as they were expressed in his draught. This draught was written some years ago, and, although he had corrected and annotated it from time to time, there is no doubt that in writing it out afresh he would have made many alterations and improvements which are not indicated in his notes. Consequently, he is not to be held responsible for errors and omissions in the pages which had not received his final approval. Yet I conceived it my duty to preserve, so far as possible, the very language of his corrected draught; and this, in the statement of almost all the main principles, I have been able to do. Some modifications and some radical alterations were inevitable; in particular, the treatment of quamvis, quando, quin, the Supine, and Numerals seemed to call for much amplification and rearrangement. I have also deemed it necessary to add some seventy sections* under various heads, and Dr. Hayley has been good enough to write sections 2458-2510, which precede his chapter on Versification. But, in general, my principal function has been: first, to provide additional Latin examples of the principles which Professor Lane had formulated; secondly, to enter, under the various principles, historical statements regarding the usage in the Latin writers, drawn from the best authorities at my disposal.

Professor Lane’s own method was far from that of a compiler. He took nothing for granted without thorough investigation, however well established it might seem, and he followed the dictum of no man, however widely accepted as an authority. For example, his many pupils and correspondents will remember how untiring he was in his efforts to arrive at accuracy in even the minutest points of inflection. Thus, for the List of Verbs (§§ 922-1022), he made entirely new collections, and admitted no form among the ‘principal parts’ unless actually found represented in the authors. In the details of syntax, he was equally indefatigable; the sections on the Locative Proper (1331-1341), for instance, contain the result of an immense amount of painful research. He devoted much anxious thought to the definitions and the titles of the various constructions: thus, the distinction between the Present of Vivid Narration (1590) and the Annalistic Present (1591) seems obvious now that it is stated; but to reach it many pages of examples were collected and compared. He held that examples printed in the grammar to illustrate syntactical principles should never be manufactured; they should be accurately quoted from the authors, without other alteration than the omission of words by which the construction under illustration was not affected. He was careful, also, not to use an example in which there was any serious doubt as to the text in that part which covered the principle illustrated by the example. To ‘Hidden Quantity’ he had given much attention, and many of the results of his studies in this subject were published, in 1889, in the School Dictionary by his friend Dr. Lewis. Since that time he had found reason to change his views with regard to some words, and these changes are embodied in the present book, in which he marked every vowel which he believed to be long in quantity.

The order in which the divisions and subdivisions of grammar are here presented will not seem strange to those who are acquainted with the recent grammars published by Germans. It is the scientific order of presentation, whatever order a teacher may think fit to follow in his actual practice. The table of contents has been made so full as to serve as a systematic exposition of the scheme, and to make needless any further words upon it here. In the Appendix Professor Lane would have inserted, out of deference to custom, a chapter on the Arrangement of Words; but the draught of it which he left was too fragmentary for publication. Since the proper preparation of the chapter would have greatly delayed the publication of the book, it was thought best to omit it altogether, at least for the present. This topic, in fact, like some others in the Appendix, belongs rather to a treatise on Latin Composition than to a Latin Grammar.

For the indexes, and for much valuable help in proof reading, I heartily thank Dr. J. W. Walden, another of Professor Lane’s pupils.

In the course of his work, Professor Lane frequently consulted his colleagues and other distinguished scholars both in this country and in Europe. He gratefully welcomed their advice, and carefully considered and often adopted their suggestions. Had he lived to write a preface, he would doubtless have thanked by name those to whom he considered himself as under particular obligation, whether from direct correspondence or through the use of their published works; but it is obvious that the information in my possession will not allow me to attempt this pleasant duty. Of Professor Lane’s pupils, also, not a few, while in residence as advanced students at the University, were from time to time engaged in the collection of material which he used in the grammar. They, like his other helpers, must now be content with the thought of the courteous acknowledgment which they would have received from him.

MORRIS H. MORGAN.

Harvard University,
Cambridge, May, 1898.

* The sections which I have added are as follows: 1866, 1873, 1878, 1879, 1880, 1887, 1890, 1901, 1902, 1903, 1907, 1909, 1913, 1922, 1927, 1935, 1964, 1975, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981, 1982, 1983, 1984, 1989, 1990, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2068, 2086, 2088, 2097, 2111, 2122, 2152, 2155, 2255, 2264, 2267, 2271, 2273, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2281, 2289, 2292, 2345, 2357, 2400, 2406, 2407, 2408, 2409, 2410, 2411, 2412, 2413, 2414, 2740-2745.

PREFATORY NOTE TO THE
REVISED EDITION.

In this Revised Edition many changes and corrections in details have been introduced throughout the book, but no alterations have been made in the treatment of broad general principles, except in the chapter on Sound (§§ 16-179). This has been very largely rewritten and extended from nineteen to thirty-one pages by my friend, Professor Hanns Oertel, of Yale University, who has also been kind enough to make the changes in the chapters on Formation and Inflection rendered necessary by his rewriting of the sections on Sound. In this rewriting Mr. Oertel has proceeded upon the ideas that in a school grammar, even an advanced one, phonology should play a subordinate part; that nothing should be introduced that cannot be illustrated from such Latin and Greek as are available to the student; and that those points should be emphasized which assist in the analyzing of compounds and in the understanding of word-formation and inflection. With these ideas, which necessarily prevent the introduction of some important topics treated in works on phonetics, I am in entire sympathy.

My thanks are due to not a few scholars and reviewers who have pointed out passages in the first edition which in their opinion called for changes. Some of their suggestions I have adopted; with others I have found myself unable to agree.

M. H. M.

Harvard University,
Cambridge, May, 1903.

* The sections which I have added are as follows: 1866, 1873, 1878, 1879, 1880, 1887, 1890, 1901, 1902, 1903, 1907, 1909, 1913, 1922, 1927, 1935, 1964, 1975, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981, 1982, 1983, 1984, 1989, 1990, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2068, 2086, 2088, 2097, 2111, 2122, 2152, 2155, 2255, 2264, 2267, 2271, 2273, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2281, 2289, 2292, 2345, 2357, 2400, 2406, 2407, 2408, 2409, 2410, 2411, 2412, 2413, 2414, 2740-2745.

1590. The present is often used to represent past action as going on now. This is called the Present of Vivid Narration: as,

1591. The present is sometimes used in brief historical or personal memoranda, to note incidents day by day or year by year as they occur. This is called the Annalistic Present: as,

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS.

Parts of Latin Grammar, 1.

PART FIRST: WORDS, 2-1022.

Parts of Speech, 2-15.

(A.) SOUND, 16-179.

Alphabet, 16-30.

Sources of our Pronunciation, 31.

Vowels, 32-46.

Long and Short, 33-36. Pronunciation, 37-42. Classification, 43-46.

Diphthongs, 47-50.

Nature and Kinds, 47, 48. Pronunciation, 49, 50.

Consonants, 51-81.

Pronunciation, 51-72. Classification, 73-81.

Syllabic and Unsyllabic Function, 82, 83.

Accent, 84-98.

Nature, 84. Marks of Accent, 85. The Classical Accent, 86-88. Earlier Recessive Accent, 89-91. Proclitics and Enclitics, 92-94.

Change of Sound, 95-174.

Vowel Change: Of Diphthongs, 95-101; 108. Of Simple Vowels, 102-107. Loss, 110-113. Hiatus, 114-116. Synizesis, 117. Contraction, 118. Elision, 119. Combination into Diphthongs, 120. Lengthening, 121-123. Shortening, 124-132. Transfer of Quantity, 133. Variation, 134. Quantitative Vowel Gradation, 135. Qualitative Vowel Changes, 136-143. Assimilation, 144. Qualitative Vowel Gradation, 145.

Consonant Change: Disappearance or Change of Single Consonants, 146-161. Change in Consonant Groups, 162-179. Assimilation, 163-166. Consonantal Glides, 167. Disappearance, 168-171. Development of Anaptyctical Vowel, 172. Dissimilation, 173. Changes within Compounds, 174.

Syllables, 175-179.

Defined, 175, 176. Length of Syllables, 177, 178. Loss, 179.

(B.) FORMATION, 180-396.

Definitions, 180-198.

Roots, 183-189. Present Stems as Roots, 190-194. Stems, 195-197. Primitives and Denominatives, 198.

Formation of the Noun, 199-364.

Without a Formative Suffix, 199. Formative Suffixes, 200-203. Formation of the Substantive: Primitives, 204-245. Denominatives, 246-279. Formation of the Adjective: Primitives, 280-297. Denominatives, 298-341. Comparison, 342-364.

Formation of Denominative Verbs, 365-375.

Composition, 376-396.

Of Nouns, 379-390. Of Verbs, 391-396.

(C.) INFLECTION, 397-1022.

Definition, 397.

(A.) INFLECTION OF THE NOUN, 398-712.

General Principles, 398-431.

Case Endings, 398. The Stem, 399-401. Gender, 402-413. Number, 414-418. Case, 419-431.

The Substantive, 432-607.

Stems in -ā- (The First Declension), 432-445. Stems in -o- (The Second Declension), 446-466. Consonant Stems (The Third Declension), 467-512. Stems in -i- (The Third Declension), 513-569. Gender of Consonant Stems and -i- Stems, 570-584. Stems in -u- (The Fourth Declension), 585-595. Stems in -ē- (The Fifth Declension), 596-607.

The Adjective, 608-643.

Stems in -o- and -ā-, 613-620. Consonant Stems, 621-626. Stems in -i-, 627-636. Numeral Adjectives, 637-643.

The Pronoun, 644-695.

Personal and Reflexive, 644-651. Personal and Reflexive Possessive, 652-655. Other Pronouns, 656-659. Demonstrative, 660-670. Determinative, 671-675. Pronoun of Identity, 676-678. Intensive, 679-680. Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite, 681-694. Correlative Pronouns, 695.

The Adverb, Conjunction, and Preposition, 696-712.

Nouns as Adverbs, 696-698. Accusative, 699-702. Ablative, 703-707. Locative, 708-709. Other Endings, 710. Correlative Adverbs, 711. Sentences as Adverbs, 712.

(B.) INFLECTION OF THE VERB, 713-1022.

General Principles, 713-742.

The Stem, 714-720. The Person Ending, 721-731. Nouns of the Verb, 732. Principal Parts, 733-735. Designation of the Verb, 736-737. Theme, 738-740. Classes of Verbs, 741-742.

Primitive Verbs, 743-791.

Root Verbs, 743-744. Inflection of sum, 745-750. possum, 751-753. , 754-757. bibō, serō, sistō, 758. inquam, 759-761. , 762-767. queō and nequeō, 768. edō, 769-771. volō, nōlō, mālō, 772-779. ferō, 780-781. Verbs in -ere (The Third Conjugation), regō, 782-783. Verbs in -iō, -ere, 784-791. capiō, 784-785. āiō, 786-787. fiō, 788-790. Others in -iō, -ere, 791.

Denominative Verbs, 792-797.

Verbs in -āre (The First Conjugation), laudō, 792-793. Verbs in -ēre (The Second Conjugation), moneō, 794-795. Verbs in -īre (The Fourth Conjugation), audiō, 796-797.

Deponent Verbs, 798-801.

Periphrastic Forms, 802-804.

Defective Verbs, 805-817.

Redundant Verbs, 818-823.

Formation of Stems, 824-919.

Variable Vowel, 824-827. The Present System: Present Indicative Stem, 828-840. Present Subjunctive, 841-843. Imperative, 844-846. Imperfect Indicative, 847-848. Imperfect Subjunctive, 849-850. Future, 851-853. The Perfect System: Perfect Indicative Stem, 854-875. Perfect Subjunctive, 876-878. Perfect Imperative, 879. Pluperfect Indicative, 880. Pluperfect Subjunctive, 881. Future Perfect, 882-884. Short or Old forms of the Perfect System, 885-893. Nouns of the Verb: The Infinitive, 894-898. Gerundive and Gerund, 899. Supine, 900. Present Participle, 901-903. Future Participle, 904-905. Perfect Participle, 906-919.

List of Verbs arranged according to the Principal Parts, 920-1022.

PART SECOND: SENTENCES, 1023-2299.

Definitions, 1023-1061.

The Simple Sentence, 1023-1025. The Subject, 1026-1034. The Predicate, 1035-1036. Enlargements of the Subject, 1038-1047. Enlargements of the Predicate, 1048-1054. Combination of Sentences, 1055. The Compound Sentence, 1056-1057. The Complex Sentence, 1058-1061.

Agreement, 1062-1098.

Of the Verb, 1062-1076. Of the Substantive, 1077-1081. Of the Adjective, 1082-1098.

THE SIMPLE SENTENCE, 1099-1635.

(A.) USE OF THE NOUN, 1099-1468.

Number and Gender, 1099-1110.

Case, 1111-1437.

Nominative, 1113-1123. Nominative of Title, 1114-1116. Of Exclamation, 1117. Vocative Nominative and Vocative Proper, 1118-1123.

Accusative, 1124-1174. Of the Object, 1132-1139. Emphasizing or Defining, 1140-1146. Of the Part Concerned, 1147. Of the Thing Put On, 1148. Of Exclamation, 1149-1150. Of Space and Time, 1151-1156. Of the Aim of Motion, 1157-1166. Two Accusatives Combined, 1167-1174.

Dative, 1175-1225. I. The Complementary Dative: (1.) The Essential Complement: With Verbs, 1180-1199. With Adjectives, 1200-1204. (2.) The Optional Complement: Of the person or thing interested, 1205-1210. The Emotional Dative, 1211. The Dative of the Possessor, 1212-1216. Of Relation, 1217-1218. II. The Predicative Dative: Of Tendency or Result, 1219-1222. Of Purpose or Intention, 1223-1225.

Genitive, 1226-1295. I. With Substantives: In General, 1227-1231. Of the Subject, Cause, Origin, or Owner, 1232-1238. Of Quality, 1239-1240. Partitive, 1241-1254. Of Definition, 1255-1259. Objective, 1260-1262. II. With Adjectives, 1263-1270. III. With Verbs: Of Valuing, 1271-1275. With rēfert and interest, 1276-1279. With Judicial Verbs, 1280-1282. With Impersonals of Mental Distress, 1283-1286. With Verbs of Memory, 1287-1291. Of Participation and Mastery, 1292. Of Fulness and Want, 1293-1294. IV. The Genitive of Exclamation, 1295.

Ablative, 1296-1400. I. The Ablative Proper: Of Separation and Want, and of Departure, 1302-1311. Of Source, Stuff, or Material, 1312-1315. Of Cause, Influence, or Motive, 1316-1319. Of Comparison, 1320-1330. II. The Locative Ablative: The Locative Proper, 1331-1341. The Ablative used as Locative: Of Place in, on, or at which, 1342-1349. Of Time at which or within which, 1350-1355. III. The Instrumental Ablative: (1.) The Ablative of Attendance: Of Accompaniment, 1356-1357. Of Manner, 1358-1361. Ablative Absolute, 1362-1374. Ablative of Quality, 1375. Of the Route Taken, 1376. (2.) The Instrumental Proper: Of Instrument or Means, 1377-1384. Of Specification, 1385. Of Fulness, 1386-1387. Of Measure, Exchange, and Price, 1388-1392. Of the Amount of Difference, 1393-1399. Two or more Ablatives Combined, 1400.

1. Latin Grammar has two parts. I. The first part treats of words: (A.) their sound; (B.) their formation; (C.) their inflection. II. The second part shows how words are joined together in sentences.

2. The principal kinds of words or Parts of Speech are

Nouns,

Verbs, and Conjunctions.

1022. (2.) The following deponents in -īrī have the perfect participle in -sus (912):

15. There is no Article in Latin: thus, mēnsa may denote table, a table, or the table.

16. In Cicero’s time, the sounds of the Latin language were denoted by twenty-one letters (DN. 2, 93).

179. The first of two successive syllables which begin with the same sound is sometimes lost. This is called Haplology.

30. In schoolbooks, a long vowel is indicated by a horizontal line over it: as, āra, altar; mēnsis, month; ōrdō, series. A short vowel is sometimes indicated by a curved mark: as, pĕr, through; dŭx, leader; but this mark is unnecessary if long vowels are systematically marked. Usually the quantity of the vowels in each word is definitely fixed; but in a few cases the same vowel may be now short, now long, as in English the ee of been is pronounced long by some (bean), short by others (bin). Thus (2446) mihi, ibi were sometimes pyrrhics (⏖, 2522), sometimes iambi (⏑-, 2521). See for other cases 134, 2443, 2452, 2453. Such vowels of variable quantity are termed common and marked ⏓ or ⏒: as mihī̆, to me (2514).

31. The pronunciation of Latin sounds may be approximately determined: (a) from the description of the native grammarians and incidental allusions in other Latin authors; (b) from variations in spelling; (c) from the Greek transliteration of Latin words; (d) from the Latin transliteration of foreign words; (e) from the development of the sounds in languages derived from the Latin.

32. Vowels are sounds which are produced by the vibrations of the vocal chords (this may be easily felt by placing a finger on the throat at the Adam’s apple) and without any audible friction or any obstruction anywhere in the passage above the vocal chords. The difference in the sound of the vowels is due to the different shape which the position of the tongue and the lips gives in each case to the cavity of the mouth. During the pronunciation of pure vowels no air escapes through the nose.

46. Comparing the vowels in English keen and kin, it will be noted that the passage between the tongue and the hard palate is narrower in the former than in the latter case. The ee in keen is therefore said to be a narrow or close vowel, while the i in kin is wide or open. See 41.

33. The simple vowels, a, e, i, o, u (y), are either long or short. The sound of a long vowel is considered to be twice the length of that of a short.

36. All vowels are long which are:

37. The following English sounds come nearest to the Latin pronunciation of the vowels:

42. Y, which was a sound borrowed from the Greek (17), sounded like German ü. The sound, which is missing in English, is formed with the tongue in position for i (in kin) and the lips rounded as for oo (in moon).

43. Vowels are divided according to the position of the tongue. Latin i and e are called front vowels, because the front part of the tongue is elevated. This elevation is greater for i than for e. Latin o and u are called back vowels, because they require an elevation of the rear part of the tongue. This elevation is greater for u than for o. Latin a holds an intermediate position, no part of the tongue being raised, while the front part is depressed.

47. Two unlike (43-46) vowels pronounced under one stress and as one syllable form a Diphthong. All diphthongs are long.

50. Besides these, the following diphthongs occur in the older inscriptions: ai pronounced as ai in aisle; ei as ei in eight; oi as oi in boil; and ou which sounded very much like the final o in no, go, which is really a diphthong (see 39).

48. In their origin diphthongs are of two kinds: (a.) primitive diphthongs: as in foedus, treaty; aurum, gold; or (b.) secondary diphthongs, the result of vowels meeting in formation, composition, or inflection: see 120.

49. The diphthongs which occur in classical Latin are au, ae, oe, and the rare ui and eu.

51. Consonants are formed by stopping the breath somewhere in the cavity of the mouth or by squeezing it through a narrow channel or aperture.

81. Consonants were not doubled in writing till after 200 B.C.: as, FVISE for fuisse, to have been, and for more than a century afterward the usage is variable: as, in the same inscription, ESSENT, they might be, by the side of SVPERASES, thou mayest have conquered; but it must not be inferred that they were pronounced as single consonants.

72. About 100 B.C. the combinations ch, ph, and th were introduced in Greek words to represent χ, φ, and θ; as Philippus, for the older PILIPVS. Somewhat later these combinations were in general use in some Latin words (19). ch is thought to have been pronounced like kh in blockhead, ph as in uphill, and th as in hothouse. But in practice ch is usually sounded as in the German machen or ich, ph as in graphic, and th as in pathos.

73. Explosives. Consonants which are formed by stopping the breath in the oral cavity and then suddenly removing the obstruction are called explosives. They cannot be prolonged in sound. They are: c, k, q, g; t, d; p, b. These are often called mutes.

82. Whenever two or more sounds are combined in a syllable, one of them excels in acoustic prominence: as, a in English pat; n in the group pnd in opnd (opened); l in the group tld in bottld (bottled); and s in the group pst. This sound is said to have syllabic function or to be syllabic; in the examples given, a, n, l, and s are respectively syllabic. All the other members of each group are termed unsyllabic.

83. Vowels are almost always used in syllabic function. When, in rare cases, they are unsyllabic, this fact is usually indicated in phonetic works by an inverted half-circle, ̭, placed under the vowel; so in the case of diphthongs to indicate the subordinate member: as ai̭, oḙ, ṷi (49). Latin omnia and English glorious, when pronounced as words of two syllables, would be written omni̭a (2503), glori̭ous. When sounds other than vowels have, in rare cases, syllabic function, this fact is noted in phonetic works by a point, . , or circle, ˳ , under the letter: as, Latin *agṛs, *agr̥s (111, b), English opṇd, opn̥d.

84. The relative force with which the different syllables of a word are uttered varies. Such variation in emphasis is called stress accentuation.

98. Change of ei. ei as a genuine diphthong is common in old inscriptions: as, SEI; SEIVE; ADEITVR; DEIXERVNT; FEIDA. In classical Latin it has passed into ī: thus, , if; sīve, either; adītur, is approached; dīxērunt, they said; fīda, faithful. An intermediate stage between the old diphthong ei and the classical ī was a very close (46) ē: as, PLOIRVME (465) for plūrimī; IOVRE (501, 507) for iūrī. For the orthographical use of ei as a spelling for the long ī-sound, see 29.

85. It is not customary to indicate the place of accents in Latin by special signs. When, for special reasons, signs are used, ´ denotes the chief accent, ` the secondary accent, while the unstressed syllables are left unmarked.

86. In classical Latin the place of the chief accent may be determined by the following rules.

88. In a few words which have lost a syllable the accent is retained on the last syllable; such are (1.) compounds of the imperatives dīc and dūc (113): as, ēdū́c; (2.) nominatives of proper names in -ās and -īs for -ātis and -ītis: as, Arpīnā́s, for Arpīnā́tis; Laenā́s; Maecēnā́s; Quirī́s; Samnī́s; also nostrā́s, vostrā́s; (3.) words compounded with the abbreviated (113) enclitics -c for -ce and -n for -ne: as, illī́c; tantṓn; audīstī́n (for the shortening of the final syllable: as, vidén, dost see?, see 129); (4.) audī́t, contracted from audīvit (154, 893). The Latin grammarians prescribe the circumflex (90) for all these long syllables.

89. In the preliterary period of the Latin language, the accent tended to go as far from the end of the word as possible (recessive accent). Thus, while the classical accentuation is inimī́cus, the older period accented ínimīcus. In literary Latin this early recessive accent has survived, only in Plautus’s accentuation of words of the form ⏑ ⏑ ⏑ ⏓ (proceleusmatic or fourth paeon, see 2521), in which he stresses the first syllable: as, fácilius (classical facílius); vóluerat (classical volúerat). But in many instances the early recessive accent may be traced in literary Latin by the phonetic changes which it produced (102 ff.).

91. The force of the Latin stress accent must have varied at different periods and in different localities, as it now varies in the Romance countries. The early recessive accent seems to have been fairly emphatic; but the stress in classical Latin was probably weak and the difference between accented and unaccented syllables was much less marked than it is in English.

92. Proclitics are unaccented words which are pronounced as a part of the following word; they are: (1.) The relative and indefinite pronouns and their derivatives; (2.) Prepositions.

94. Two words expressing what is really one single idea are often bound together by one accent, one of them acting the part of either a proclitic or enclitic.

95. Of the six original diphthongs au, ou, eu, and ai, oi, ei, the only one which preserved its original sound in the classical period is au. Of the rest only ae (for older ai) and, in a few words, oe (for older oi) remained diphthongs; all the others had become monophthongs.

174. The final syllable of the first member of compounds (181) sometimes undergoes certain changes by analogy to other compounds:

101. Change of eu. Primitive (48) eu appears in classical Latin only in the interjections eu, heu, ē̆heu, heus. Every other original eu had, even in old Latin, passed into ou and developed like the latter: as, *neumen (Greek νεῦμα) became first *noumen, then (100) nūmen. With the exceptions noted above, the diphthong eu, as it appears in Latin, is always of secondary origin (48), the result of the two vowels e and u meeting in composition: as, neu, neither, from nē-ve; neutiquam, from and utiquam (124).

108. Diphthongs, whether medial or final, are treated alike in atonic syllables.

102. The vowel of an unstressed (atonic) syllable is often weakened, changing its quantity or quality or both. This is especially the case in syllables immediately preceded by the chief accent (posttonic syllables). The following changes took place at an early period when Latin still possessed the old, recessive accent (89).

107. (a.) In final syllables unaccented original e before s and t was weakened to i: as, salūtis, of safety, from older salūtes (507).

110. Only vowels which are short and atonic may be lost. The loss of a medial vowel is called Syncope; of an initial vowel, Aphaeresis; of a final vowel Apocope.

113. Apocope. Under the same conditions under which a medial vowel was syncopated, the final vowel of a word which stood in close union with the following word, as a preposition with its noun, was lost. In this way *peri (Greek περί) became per; *apo (Greek ἀπό) became ap, ab (164, 2); *eti (Greek ἔτι) became et. Similarly the final -e of the enclitics -ce, -ne, not, and -ne interrogative was lost: *sī-ce became sīc, so; *quī-ne, quīn, why not; habēsne, haben, hast thou; the imperatives dīc, say, dūc, lead, and fac, do, stand for earlier dīce, dūce, face (846); the shortened form em for eme (imperative of emere, take) has been turned into an interjection (1149). In the same way nec arose by the side of neque; ac by the side of atque (158). Final -e has also been dropped in the nominative sg. of a number of polysyllabic neuter stems in -āli and -āri (546): as, animal, animal, for *animāle, exemplar, pattern, for *exemplāre. See 536, 537. It must, however, be remembered that in most of the cases given the loss of a final vowel would also result from elision (119) before the initial vowel of the following word.

114. Hiatus. A succession of two vowel sounds not making a diphthong is called Hiatus.

116. Hiatus is maintained (a.) between two adjacent vowels the second of which is long and accented (according to the classical accentuation): as, coḗgi, I forced, and coā́ctus, forced (937); but cōgō (118, 3). For coepi, instead of coḗpī, I began, see 120.

117. Synizesis. In these combinations the first vowel is sometimes made unsyllabic (83). This is called synizesis (2499) and is not rare in poets, being often the only means of adapting a word to the requirements of certain metres. Thus, fortuītus (- ⏑ - ⏓) must appear in a hexameter as fortvītus (fortṷītus). See 2499, 2503.

118. Contraction. (1.) Two like vowels may unite in one long vowel; rapidity of utterance was favourable to such fusion. In compounds, the desire to keep the members distinct often prevented it. So always nēmō, nobody, for *neemō from *ne-hemō, no man (for the loss of h, see 58, 150; for e in *hemō, see 144); and by the side of the open forms, nīl from nihil, nothing; vēmēns from vehemēns, rapid (connected with the verb vehō); rarely dērunt, they will be wanting, and dēsse, to be wanting, for dēerunt, dēesse; dēlēram, I had destroyed, from *dēlēeram for dēlēveram (for the loss of v, see 153), see 890; passūm, of paces, for passuum (591).

119. Elision. Only rarely the first of two successive vowels is dropped: as, nūllus, no, for *ne-ūllus; likewise the final vowel of the first member of nominal compounds: as, multangulus, with many corners, for *multi-angulus (cf. multi-cavus, with many holes); flexanimus, heart-rending, for *flexi-animus (cf. flexi-pēs, with bent feet).

120. Combination into diphthongs. The union of two successive vowels into a diphthong is equally rare: o and i are combined to oi, oe, in coetus, meeting, by the side of the open form coïtus (116, b); the perfect coepī (812), I began, owes its diphthong oe to forms in which the e was short and unaccented, such as the rare present forms coepiō for có-ĕpiō (813); for coḗpi (813, 863) would have remained unchanged (116, a). neuter, with the accent on the e, was pronounced as three syllables, later eu became diphthongal; neutiquam with synizesis (117) of e. e and ī̆ sometimes contract to e͡i in rēi (601, 602) and in de͡inde, dēin in the classic poets.

121. Compensative lengthening. When certain groups of consonants are simplified by the dropping of a consonant, its time is absorbed by a preceding short vowel, which thereby becomes long. This is called Compensation. In many cases compensative lengthening is due to the loss of a preliterary sonant s (170, 2): as,

123. (1.) Analogical lengthening. In noun stems in -o the stem vowel is lengthened in the genitive plural -ōrum (449, 462), by analogy to the stems in (435): as, servōrum, of slaves, like mēnsārum, of tables. For other cases see 122, e.

124. A vowel originally long is regularly shortened in classical Latin before another vowel, even though an h intervene: as,

132. A long vowel is regularly shortened, in the classical period, before final -t and -m and, in words of more than one syllable, also before final r and l.

133. (1.) In a few cases the length of the vowel has been transferred to the following consonant, the length of which is then indicated by doubling it (81): as, littera for lītera, LEITERAS; Iuppiter for Iūpiter; parricīda for pāri-cīda, murder of a member of the same clan (*pāro-, member of a clan, Doric πᾶός, a relative); cuppa for cūpa, barrel. The legal formula sī pāret, if it appear, was vulgarly pronounced sī parret (Festus).

134. (1.) In some foreign proper names and in a very few Latin words the quantity of a vowel varied. Vergil has Sȳchaeus and Sychaeus within six verses; also Āsia and Asia, Lavīnium and Lāvīnius; so also glōmus (Lucr.), glomus (

Hor.

); cōturnīx (Plaut., Lucr.), coturnīx (Ov.).

135. The same stem often shows a long vowel in some of its forms and a short vowel in others. In most cases these variations of quantity were not developed on Latin soil but inherited from a much earlier period. Such old inherited differences in vowel quantity are called quantitative vowel gradation.

136. (1.) i before an r which goes back to an earlier voiced s (154) was changed to e: as, cineris, of ashes, for *cinisis, from the stem cinis (491); Faleriī, for *Falisiī, cf. Falis-cus; (formed like Etrūria, for *Etrūsia, cf. Etrūs-cī).

143. In a number of words, notably in voster, your, vorsus, turned, vortex, eddy, and votāre, forbid, the forms with o were replaced, about the second century B.C. by forms with e: as, vester, versus, vertex, vetāre (Quint. 1, 7, 25).

144. In a few cases a vowel is influenced by the vowel of a neighbouring syllable: as,

145. The same stem often shows different vowels in different forms. In most of these cases this difference was inherited from a very early period and continued in the Latin. Such old inherited variation of the quality of the stem-vowel is called qualitative vowel gradation. The qualitative variations may be accompanied by quantitative changes (135).

146. In a number of words which belong more or less clearly to the stem of the pronoun quo- (681), cu- (157), the initial c has disappeared before u: as,

161. Initial dv (dṷ) changed to b, unless the v () was converted into the corresponding vowel: as, bis, twice, for *dṷis (cf. duo); bidēns for *dṷidens, by the side of old Latin duidēns with vocalic u; bonus, good, for dṷonus, by the side of trisyllabic duonus; bellum, war, for *dṷellum, by the side of duellum with vocalic u; bēs, two thirds, for *dṷēs (2427). Cicero (O. 153) notes that the change of duellum to bellum affected even the proper name Duellius (name of the admiral who won the naval victory over the Carthaginians in 260

B.

C.) which was changed to Bellius. Plautus always scans dṷellum disyllabic with synizesis (2503).

162. Many groups of consonants undergo changes in order to facilitate their pronunciation in rapid speech. These changes involve (a.) Assimilation of consonants; (b.) the development of consonantal glides; (c.) the loss of one member of the group; and (d.) the development of a vowel between the consonants.

163. Of two successive consonants belonging to different syllables (175), the first is, as a rule, assimilated to the second (regressive assimilation), rarely the second to the first (progressive assimilation). A consonant may be assimilated, either entirely or partially, to another consonant.

166. Entire assimilation. (1.) One mute is assimilated to another: thus p or b to c: as, suc-currō, I assist; t or d to c: as, sic-cus, dry (cf. sit-is, thirst), accipiō, I accept; d to g: as, agglūtinō, I glue on; t or d to qu: as, quicquam, anything; t or d to p: as, appellō, I call; quippe, why? (1690).

167. Pronunciation of two successive consonants is sometimes facilitated by the insertion of a consonant which serves as a glide. Such insertion is not frequent.

168. A word may be lightened by the disappearance of an initial, a medial, or a final consonant.

171. Final Disappearance. (1.) A word never ends in a doubled consonant: as, es for *es-s, thou art, which Plautus and Terence still scan as a long syllable; and the following cases of assimilation: ter for *terr from *ters (cf. terr-uncius, a quarter of an ās, a farthing, 1272, for *ters-uncius, 166, 8); fār, spelt, for *farr, from *fars (489); fel, gall, for *fell, from *fels (482); in mīles, soldier, for *mīless from *mīlets (cf. Gen. mīlitis, 477) the final syllable is still long in Plautus. hoc, this, for *hocc from *hod-c(e)(the neuter *hod from the stem ho-, as istud, illud (107, c) from isto-, illo-) counts as a long syllable even in classical poetry.

172. Certain consonant groups, notably those containing a liquid, are sometimes eased by the insertion of a vowel which develops between the consonants. This is called Anaptyxis (Greek ἀναπτύσσειν, unfold). It is the opposite of syncope of vowels (110, 111).

173. (1.) To avoid the repetition of the same liquid in successive syllables l is sometimes changed to r: as, caeruleus, sky-blue, for *caeluleus, from caelum; Parīlia, by the side of Palīlia, from Palēs; the suffix -clo- appears as -cro- after an l: as, lavācrum, bath, simulācrum, image (241); the suffix -āli- under like conditions changes to -āri-; as, molāre, of a mill (313), but augurāle, of an augur.

175. A word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. The last syllable is called the Ultima; the last syllable but one is called the Penult; the last syllable but two is called the Antepenult.

176. The quantity of single sounds (e.g. the quantity of a vowel) must be carefully distinguished from the quantity of the group of sounds or the syllable of which the single sound forms a part.

177. A syllable is long if its vowel is long, or if its vowel is followed by two consonants or by x or z: as,

178. In prose or old dramatic verse a syllable with a short vowel before a mute or f followed by l or r is not long: as tenebrae. In other verse, however, such syllables are sometimes regarded as long. In compounds such syllables are long in any verse: as obruit.

180. Formation is the process by which stems are formed from roots or from other stems.

396. (

3.

) An adverb with a verb: as, circum-dare, put round; satis-facere, satis-dare, give satisfaction; intro-īre, go inside; mālle, prefer, for magis velle (170, 2); nōlō, be unwilling, for ne volō; ne-scīre, hau-scīre, not know.

198. I. A stem or word formed directly from a root or a verb stem is called a Primitive. II. A stem or word formed from a noun stem is called a Denominative.

183. A Root is a monosyllable which gives the fundamental meaning to a word or group of words.

189. A root or a part of a root is sometimes doubled in forming a word; this is called Reduplication: as, mur-mur, murmur; tur-tur, turtle-dove; po-pul-us, people; ul-ul-āre, yell.

190. Many nouns are formed from the present stems of verbs, which take the place of roots. Stems thus used are mostly those of verbs in -āre and -īre.

194. Sometimes, however, nouns are formed from such verb stems, and not from roots: as, lecti-stern-ium, a couch-spreading (sternere, √ster-, strā-); vinc-ibilis, conquerable (vincere, √vīc-); pāsc-uum, pasture (pāscere, √pā-); pect-en, comb (pectere, √pec-); fall-āx, deceitful (fallere, √fal-).

195. A Stem is that part of a word which contains its meaning, and is either a root alone or more commonly a root with an addition called a Formative Suffix.

197. The noun has usually only one form of the stem. The verb has different stems to indicate mood and tense; these stems are all based on two principal tense stems, the present and the perfect active.

199. Some roots are used as noun stems: as, duc-, N. dux, leader (√duc-, lead); rēg-, N. rēx, king (√rēg-, guide); particularly at the end of a compound: as, con-iug-, N. coniūnx, yoke-fellow, spouse (com-, √jug-, yoke); tubi-cin-, N. tubicen, trumpeter (tubā-, √can-, play).

364. A few adverbs not derived from adjectives are compared: as, diū, long, diūtius, diūtissimē; saepe, often, saepius, saepissimē; nūper, lately, no comparative, nūperrimē; secus, otherwise, sētius, the less; temperī, betimes, temperius, earlier, no superlative.

200. Simple formative suffixes are vowels: as, -ā-, -o-, -i-, -u-; also -io-, -uo-, (-vo-); or such little syllables as -mo-, -min-; -ro-, -lo-; -ōn-; -no-, -ni-, -nu-; -to-, -ti-, -tu-; -ter-, -tōr-; -unt- (-nt-); -es- (-er-), -ōr-; these syllables sometimes have slight modifications of form. Compound suffixes consist of one or more simple suffixes attached to a simple suffix: as, -tōr-io-, -ti-mo-, &c., &c.

203. There are many formative suffixes of nouns. The commonest only can be named, and these may be conveniently grouped as below, by their meanings. Compound suffixes are arranged with reference to the last element of the suffix: thus, under the adjective suffix -io- (304) will be found -c-io-, -īc-io-, -tōr-io-, and -ār-io-. In many instances it is difficult to distinguish between simple and compound suffixes.

204. The suffixes -tōr-, -o-, -ā-, -lo-, and -ōn-, are used to denote the Agent: as,

245. -bulo-, N. -bulu-m (202): pā-bulo-, N. pā-bulu-m, fodder (√pā-, keep); vēnā-bulu-m, hunting-spear (vēnā-rī); pat-ibulu-m, pillory (√pat-, stretch). -bulo- sometimes denotes the place where: sta-bulu-m, standing-place, stall (√sta-, stand). -bulā-, N. -bula, F., rare: sū-bula, awl (√su-, sew); ta-bula, board (√ta-, stretch); fā-bula, talk (√fā-, talk).

246. The suffixes -io-, -iā-; -tā-, -tāt-, -tūt-, -tū-din-, are used to denote the Quality: as,

279. Patronymics, or proper names which denote descent from a father or ancestor, have stems in -dā- (N. -dē-s), F. -d- (N. -s). These are chiefly Greek names used in poetry.

280. Primitive adjectives may usually be divided into active and passive; but the same suffix often has either an active or a passive meaning. Under primitive adjectives belong the participles; but these will be mentioned in connection with the verb.

297. The suffix -mino- (for -meno-, 103, a) in its weakest form (135, 2) is found in a few substantives: as, alu-mnu-s, nursling (√al-, nurse). The endings -minī (730) and -minō (731) are apparently case forms of the same suffix. -minō would seem to be an ablative; -minī may be a nominative plural.

298. Denominative adjectives may be divided into such as denote: I. Material or Resemblance. II. Appurtenance: implying sometimes possession, often fitness, conformity, character, or origin. III. Supply. IV. Diminutives. V. Comparatives and Superlatives; a few of these are primitive.

341. Adverbs sometimes have a diminutive form: as, bellē, charmingly; paullulum, a little bit; meliusculē, a bit better (340).

342. Comparatives and superlatives are usually formed from the stem of the positive: as, dignior, worthier, dignissimus, worthiest, from digno-, stem of dignus. A few are formed directly from roots: thus, maior, greater, and maximus, greatest, are formed from the √mag-, and not from magno-, stem of magnus.

365. Denominative verb stems have present infinitives in -āre, -ēre, or -īre (-ārī, -ērī, or -īrī), and are formed from noun stems of all endings: as,

375. A few verbs in -uriō, -urīre, express desire; such are called Desideratives: as, ēss-urīre or ēs-urīre, want to eat (edere, ēsse). A few in -ssō, -ssere, express earnest action; such are called Meditatives: as, lacē-ssō, lacē-ssere, provoke.

376. In compounds, the fundamental word is usually the second, which has its meaning qualified by the first.

379. If the first part is a noun, its stem is taken: as, Ahēno-barbus, Redbeard, Barbarossa; usually with weakening of a stem vowel (103-105): as, aurifex, jeweller (auro-). On other changes of the final vowel in the first member of compounds, see 174. Sometimes with disappearance of a syllable (179); as, *venēni-ficus, venē-ficus, poisoner (venēno-); or of a vowel (111): as, man-ceps, contractor (manu-); particularly before a vowel (119): as, magn-animus, great-souled (magno-). Consonant stems are often extended by i before a consonant: as, mōri-gerus, complaisant (mōr-).

390. (4.) From an original combination of an oblique case with a preposition: as, prōcōnsul, proconsul, from prō cōnsule, for a consul; ēgregius, select, from ē grege, out of the herd; dēlīrus, astray, mad, from dē līrā, out of the furrow.

391. Real Compounds are direct compounds of a verb with a preposition; the root vowel or diphthong of the verb is often weakened (102): as,

397. Inflection is the change which nouns, pronouns, and verbs undergo, to indicate their relation in a sentence.

398. The noun or pronoun is inflected by attaching case endings to the stem.

712. Some adverbs are condensed sentences: as,

431. Some adjectives are altogether indeclinable: as, frūgī, thrifty, an old dative; nēquam, naughty, an old accusative; quot, how many; tot, so many; and most numerals (637). These adjectives are attached to any case of a substantive without varying their own forms.

399. The stem contains the meaning of the noun. Noun stems are arranged in the following order: (1.) stems in -ā-, in -o-, in a consonant, or in -i-; these are substantive, including proper names, or adjective; (2.) stems in -u- or -ē-; these are substantive only, and include no proper names.

401. Some nouns have more than one form of the stem: as,

402. There are two genders, Masculine and Feminine. Masculine and feminine nouns are called Gender nouns. Nouns without gender are called Neuter.

413. Some substantives have different genders in the two numbers; the different gender is sometimes indicated by a difference of stem: as, epulum, neuter, epulae, feminine, feast. See balneum, frēnum, jocus, locus, margarīta, ostrea, rāstrum, in the dictionary.

414. There are two numbers, the Singular used of one, the Plural of more than one.

418. Some substantives have different meanings in the two numbers: as,

419. Nouns have five cases, the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative.

432. Stems in -ā- include substantives and adjectives; both substantives and adjectives are feminine.

607. ēluviēs, offscouring, wash, has the nominative of the plural, and glaciēs, ice, has the accusative of the plural. Five words only have the nominative and accusative plural:

445. Greek proper names sometimes have the following forms. Nominative masculine -ās, -ēs: as, Prūsiās, Atrīdēs; feminine : as, Gelā, Phaedrā; : as, Circē. Genitive feminine -ēs: as, Circēs. Accusative masculine -ān, -dēn: as, Aenēān, Pēlīdēn; feminine -ēn: as, Circēn. Ablative feminine : as, Tīsiphonē. Vocative or -a: as, Atrīdā, Atrīda, Thyesta; -tē: as, Boōtē; -dē: as, Aeacidē.

446. Stems in -o- include substantives and adjectives, masculine or neuter.

466. Greek stems in -o- are generally declined like Latin nouns, but in the singular sometimes have -os in the nominative, -on in the nominative or accusative neuter, rarely in the genitive, or in the feminine ablative. Plural, nominative sometimes -oe, masculine or feminine, and genitive, chiefly in book-titles, -ōn: as,

467. Consonant stems are mostly substantive, and include both gender words and neuters.

512. Some names in -is have forms either from a stem in -id-, or from one in -i-: as, Paris, G. Paridis, D. Paridī, Ac. Paridem, Parim or Parin, V. Pari.

513. Stems in -i- include both substantives and adjectives, gender words and neuters.

569. (b.) The following monosyllables: ās, unit, an as, faex, dregs, fraus, deceit, glīs, dormouse, līs, strife, lūx, light, mās, male, mūs, mouse, nox, night, stirps, trunk, vīs, strength. Also fauce, throat, and compede, fetter, both Ab., no N., and fornāx, furnace.

570. The gender of many of these substantives is determined by their meaning (404-412); that of participles used as substantives follows the gender of the substantive understood; Greek substantives follow the Greek gender. The gender of other words may be conveniently arranged for the memory according to the nominative endings as follows.

584. pecus, beast, is feminine; also tellūs, earth, and the substantives in -ūs which have -ūdis (475) or -ūtis (477) in the genitive: as, palūs, marsh; iuventūs, youth.

585. Stems in -u- are substantive only, and mostly masculine.

595. Some other substantives have an -u- stem in some of their cases, and an -o- stem in others: see angiportus, arcus, caestus, colus, cornū, cornus, cupressus, fīcus, fretus, gelus, laurus, murtus, penus, pīnus, quercus, rīctus, tonitrus, in the dictionary.

596. Stems in -ē- are substantive only, and feminine.

608. Adjectives are declined like substantives, and it has been shown already how their cases are formed. But they differ from substantives in having different forms in some of their cases to denote different genders; it is convenient therefore to put their complete declension together.

643. Ordinals, as prīmus, first, and distributives, as bīnī, two each, are declined like bonus (613). But distributives seldom have a singular, and often have the genitive plural -ū̆m (462): as, bīnū̆m.

613. Most adjectives with stems in -o- and -ā- are declined as follows:

620. The ordinary genitive and dative of -o- and -ā- stems, from some of the above words, is sometimes found: G. and D. aliae, sōlae, alterae, D. aliō, alterae, &c.

621. The only consonant stems of two endings are comparatives (346); they are declined as follows:

626. The plural caelitēs, heavenly, occupants of heaven, is also declined like the plural of dīves; the singular Ab. caelite occurs a couple of times. vetus, old, G. veteris, is also declined like dīves, but has a Ne. Pl. N. and Ac. vetera; the Ab. S. is regularly vetere, but veterī is sometimes used.

627. A dozen adjectives with stems in -bri-, -cri-, or -tri-, have a distinctive form in -er for the masculine nominative singular; they are:

636. (2.) The following have in the ablative, but -um of consonant stems in the genitive plural, and no nominative or accusative neuter plural: inops (535), without means, vigil (536), wide-awake, memor (537), remembering, dēgener, degenerate, ūber (537), prolific, has Ab. , twice -e, Ne. Pl. once -a (Acc.). Compounds of pēs, as, bipēs (532), two-legged, have a late and rare Ne. Pl. N. and Ac. -ia.

637. Of the cardinals, ūnus, duo, trēs, and the hundreds except centum are declined. The other cardinals are not declined.

644. The pronoun of the first person, ego, I, of the second person, , thou, and the reflexive pronoun, suī, , himself, herself, itself, themselves, are declined as follows:

695. Pronouns often correspond with each other in meaning and form; some of the commonest correlatives are the following:

651. In inscriptions, the datives MIHEI, TIBEI, and SIBEI occur, so written in verse sometimes even when the last syllable is short; and MIHE, TIBE. Plural: D. and Ab. VOBEIS. Ac. ENOS in an old hymn; SEESE (29, 1).

652. The possessives of ego, , and suī, are meus, mine, tuus, thine, and suus, his, her, its, their (own), declined like bonus (613), except that meus has in the vocative singular masculine (459); those of nōs and vōs are noster, our, and voster, later vester, your, declined like aeger (617).

655. Emphasis is given (1.) by -met added to suō, suā, suōs, and to mea and sua, neuter plural: as, suōmet; (2.) by -pte, which is oftenest found with the ablative: as, suōpte.

656. Some pronouns have a peculiar genitive singular in -ī̆us and dative singular in , for masculine, feminine, and neuter alike.

659. Six words have a peculiar neuter nominative and accusative singular in -d: id, illud, istud, quid, quod, aliud, and derivatives. In manuscripts, -t is sometimes found for -d: as, it, illut, istut, &c.; sometimes also in inscriptions of the empire. In hoc for *hod-ce and in istuc and illuc for *istud-ce, *illud-ce, the d has vanished (166, 1; 171, 1).

660. The demonstrative pronouns are hīc, this, this near me; iste, istic, that, that near you; and ille, illic, yonder, that.

670. Rare forms are: N. and Ac. Ne. istoc, illoc, G. illīusce, D. illīc, Ab. F. istāce, illāce. Plural: N. M. illīsce (461), illīc, Ac. illōsce, illāsce. Before -ne interrogative, -ce becomes -ci-: N. illicine, istucine, Ac. illancine, Ab. istōcine, istācinē. Pl. Ac. istōscine.

671. The determinative pronoun is, that, the aforesaid, the one, is declined as follows:

675. A rare and old pronoun equivalent to is is sum, sam, accusative singular, sōs, accusative plural, and sīs, dative plural.

676. The pronoun of identity, īdem, the same, is declined as follows:

678. Other case forms of īdem are found in inscriptions, as follows:

679. The intensive pronoun ipse, himself, stems ipso-, ipsā-, is declined like ille (666), but has the nominative and accusative neuter singular ipsum.

680. In dramatic verse, ipse has rarely the first syllable short, and often has the older form ipsus. Plautus has these forms: N. F. eapse, Ac. eumpse, eampse, Ab. eōpse, eāpse, equivalent to ipsa, &c. So reāpse for rē ipsā.

681. The stem qui-, or quo-, quā-, is used in three ways: as a relative, who, which; as an interrogative, who? which? what? as an indefinite, any.

694. The derivatives of uter are declined like uter; they are:

696. Adverbs, conjunctions, and prepositions are chiefly noun or pronoun cases which have become fixed in a specific form and with a specific meaning. Many of these words were still felt to be live cases, even in the developed period of the language; with others the consciousness of their noun character was lost.

698. The rather indeterminate meaning of the accusative and the ablative is sometimes more exactly defined by a preposition. The preposition may either accompany its usual case: as, adamussim, admodum, īlicō; or it may be loosely prefixed, with more of the nature of an adverb than of a preposition, to a case with which it is not ordinarily used: as, examussim, intereā. Sometimes it stands after the noun: as, parumper, a little while. Besides the three cases named above, other forms occur, some of which are undoubtedly old case endings, though they can no longer be recognized as such: see 710.

699. domum, homeward, home; rūs, afield; forās, out of doors (*forā-); vicem, instead; partim, in part; old noenum or noenu, common nōn, for ne-oenum, i.e. ūnum, not one, naught, not; admodum, to a degree, very; adamussim, examussim, to a T; adfatim, to satiety; invicem, in turn, each other.

702. Feminines: bifāriam, twofold; cōram, face to face (com- or co-, *ōrā-); tam, so (tā-, that); quam, as, how. Plural: aliās, on other occasions.

703. domō, from home, rūre, from the country; hodiē, to-day (ho-, diē-), volgō, publicly, vespere, by twilight, noctū, by nights, nights, lūce, by light, tempore, in times, betimes; sponte, voluntarily, forte, by chance; quotannīs, yearly; grātiīs or grātīs, for nothing, ingrātiīs or ingrātīs, against one’s will; īlicō, on the spot (169, 4; 170, 2), forīs, out of doors (*forā-).

707. Feminines: many in : ūnā, together; circā, around; contrā, against (com-, 347); extrā, outside (ex, 347); in classical Latin, frūstrā, in vain (fraud-). So, especially, adverbs denoting the ‘route by which:’ hāc, this way; rēctā, straightway.

708. In , from names of towns and a few other words: Karthāginī, at Carthage; Rōmae, for Rōmāī, at Rome; domī, at

home;

illī, commonly illī-c, there (illo-), istī, commonly istī-c, where you are, hī-c, here (ho-); old sei, common , at that, in that case, so, if; sīc, so (, -ce).

709. In -bī̆, from some pronouns: ibī̆, there (i-); ubī̆ (for *quobī̆, 146), where; alicubī̆, somewhere; sī-cubi, if anywhere, nē-cubi, lest anywhere.

710. Besides the above, other endings are also found in words of this class: as,

711. Adverbs derived from pronoun stems often correspond with each other in meaning and form; some of the commonest correlatives are the following:

713. The verb is inflected by attaching person endings to the several stems.

742. Verbs are sometimes arranged without regard to difference of kind, in the alphabetical order of the vowel before -s of the second person singular of the present indicative active, ā, ē, i, ī: thus, laudās, monēs, regis, audīs, sometimes called the first, second, third, and fourth conjugation respectively.

714. The stem contains the meaning of the verb, and also denotes the mode (mood) and the time (tense) of the action as viewed by the speaker.

720. Many verbs have only the present system: as, maereō, mourn; some have only the perfect system: as, meminī, remember. Some verbs have a present and perfect system made up of two separate roots or stems: as, present indicative ferō, carry, perfect indicative tulī, and perfect participle lātus; present possum, can, perfect potuī.

721. The person ending limits the meaning of the stem by pointing out the person of the subject. There are three Persons, the First, used of the speaker, the Second, of what is spoken to, and the Third, of what is spoken of. The person ending furthermore indicates number and voice.

731. Deponents have rarely -mino, in the imperative singular: as, second person, prōgredimino, step forward thou (Plaut.); in laws, as third person: FRVIMINO, let him enjoy; or -tō and -ntō for -tor and -ntor: as, ūtitō, let him use; ūtuntō, let them use. In a real passive, -ntō is rare: as, CENSENTO, let them be rated.

732. The verb is accompanied by some nouns, which are conveniently, though not quite accurately, reckoned parts of the verb; they are:

733. The several verb stems can readily be found, when once the principal parts are known; these are given in the dictionary.

735. The Principal Parts of deponents are the Present Indicative, Present Infinitive, and Perfect Participle: as,

736. A verb is usually named by the present indicative active first person singular: as, regō; laudō, moneō, audiō; or by the present infinitive active: as, regere; laudāre, monēre, audīre. Deponents are named by the corresponding passive forms: as, queror; mīror, vereor, partior; or querī; mīrārī, verērī, partīrī.

737. For convenience, verbs with -ere in the present infinitive active are called Verbs in -ere; those with -āre, -ēre, or -īre, Verbs in -āre, -ēre, or -īre, respectively. In like manner deponents are designated as Verbs in ; or Verbs in -ārī, -ērī, or -īrī, respectively.

738. The several stems of the verb come from a form called the Theme. In primitives, the theme is a root; in denominatives, the theme is a noun stem.

740. Most verbs with an infinitive of more than two syllables in -āre, -ēre, or -īre, or, if deponent, in -ārī, -ērī, or -īrī, are denominative; most other verbs are primitive.

741. Verbs are divided into two classes, according to the form of the present system: I. Root verbs, and verbs in -ere, mostly primitive; II. Verbs in -āre, -ēre, or -īre, mostly denominative.

743. A few of the oldest and commonest verbs of everyday life have a bare root as stem in the present indicative or in parts of it; and some of them have other peculiarities; such are called Root Verbs, or by some, irregular (744-781). Most primitives are verbs in -ere, like regō (782).

791. Some verbs in -iō, -ere (or -ior, ), have occasionally the form of verbs in -īre (or -īrī), in some parts of the present system, oftenest before an r, and particularly in the passive infinitive: as,

744. Primitives with the bare root as present indicative stem in almost all their forms are sum, am, , give, put, and compounds; and with the root doubled, bibō, drink, serō, sow, and sistō, set.

745. sum, am, is used only in the present system (720). The perfect system is supplied by forms of fuī (fu-).

750. A subjunctive present fuam, fuās, fuat, and fuant occurs in old Latin; and an imperfect forem, forēs, foret, and forent, in all periods. The present infinitive fore, to get to be, become, has a future meaning. Old forms in the perfect system are FVVEIT (29, 1), FVET; fūit, fūimus, fūerim, fūerit, fūerint, fūisset (Plaut., Enn.). fuī has no perfect participle or supine.

751.

753. t is retained before a vowel, except in possem, &c., for potessem, &c., and in posse; t before s changes to s (166, 2). Old forms are: possiem, &c., (748), potessem, potisset, potesse. Rare forms are POTESTO (inscr. 58 B.C.), and passives, as potestur, &c., with a passive infinitive (1484). possum has no participles; the perfect system, potuī, &c., is like fuī, &c. (745).

754. There are two verbs , one meaning give, and one meaning put. The meaning put is oftenest used in compounds; the simple verb has been crowded out by pōnō. The present system of is as follows:

757. Real compounds of have a present system like regō (782); in the perfect and the perfect participle, e and a become i: as, abdō, put away, abdere, abdidī, abditus; crēdō, put trust in. perdō, fordo, destroy, and vēndō, put for sale, have gerundives perdendus, vēndundus, and perfect participles perditus, vēnditus; the rest of the passive is supplied by forms of pereō and vēneō. reddō, give back, has future reddibō 3 times (Plaut.). In the apparent compounds with circum, pessum, satis, and vēnum, remains without change, as in 754.

758. bibō, drink, serō, sow (for *si-sō, 154), and sistō, set, form their present stem by reduplication of the root (189). The vowel before the person endings is the root vowel, which becomes variable, like a formative vowel (824). These verbs have the present system like regō (782).

759. inquam, , and queō have the bare root as present stem, in almost all their parts; in a few parts only the root is extended by a formative vowel (829).

761. Rare forms are: subjunctive inquiat (Cornif.), indicative imperfect inquiēbat (Cic.), used twice each; indicative present inquimus (Hor.), perfect inquiī (Catull.), inquīstī (Cic.), once each; imperative inque, 4 times (Plaut. 2, Ter. 2), inquitō, 3 times (Plaut.). For inquam, see 728.

762.

767. A few examples are found of a perfect system with v, as īvī, &c. This form is confined almost exclusively to poetry and late prose.

768. queō, can, and nequeō, can’t, have the perfect quīvī, the rest like (762); but they have no imperative, gerundive, or future participle, and the present participle is rare. queō is commonly used with a negative, and some parts only so. Passive forms are rare, and only used with a passive infinitive (1484).

769. edō, eat, has a present system with a formative vowel like regō throughout (782); but in some parts of the present, and of the imperfect subjunctive, parallel root forms are usually found, with d of the root changed to s, and the vowel lengthened (135), as may be seen in the following:

771. comedō, eat up, has also the following root forms: comēs, comēst, comēstis; comēstō; comēsse; comēssēs, comēsset, comēssēmus. The present subjunctive has also comedim, comedīs, comedint. The participle perfect is comēssus, comēsus, or comēstus, future comēssūrus. exedō, eat out, has exēst and exēsse; subjunctive exedint. adedō, eat at, has adēst.

772. volō (nōlō, mālō) and ferō have the bare root in some parts only of the present system; in other parts the root extended by a formative vowel, like regō (782). volō (nōlō, mālō) lack some forms, as will be seen below.

779. Old forms are māvolō, māvolunt; māvolet; māvelim, māvelīs, māvelit; māvellem. The perfect system, māluī, &c., is like that of volō (772).

780. ferō, carry, is used only in the present system (720). The other parts are supplied by forms of tollō, lift (tol-, tlā-). The present system of ferō is as follows:

781. For tulī, see 860; the full form tetulī, &c., is found in old Latin, and TOLI, &c., in inscriptions; the compound with re- is rettulī for *retetulī (861). For the participle lātus, see 169, 1.

782.

783.

784. Verbs in -iō, -ere, as capiō, capere, take (cap-), drop an i in some forms of the present and imperfect. The present system is as follows:

785. There are a dozen verbs in

-īō

, -ere, like capiō, and three deponents in -ior, , all formed from consonant roots with a short vowel: see 836. aiō, say, and fīō, grow, become, have certain peculiarities arising from the blending of the root with the suffix.

786. aiō, say, is defective, and has only these parts in common use:

787. For aiō, sometimes written aiiō (23), see 153, 2. Old forms are: present ais, aīs, a͡is, or with -n interrogative

āin

, a͡in; aīt, ait, or a͡it; imperfect a͡ibam, a͡ibās, a͡ibat, and a͡ibant; imperative once only, (Naev.). A participle aientibus, affirmative, occurs once (Cic.).

788. fīō, become, and factus sum supplement each other: in the present system, the passive of faciō, make, except the gerundive, faciendus, is not used, fīō, &c., taking its place; in the perfect system, only factus sum, &c., is used.

790. -fīō is used in apparent compounds (394): as, patē̆fit. In real compounds commonly -ficior: as, cōnficior; but sometimes -fīō: as, cōnfit, cōnfīunt, cōnfīat, cōnfieret, cōnfierent, cōnfī̆erī; dēfit, dēfīet, dēfīat, dēfierī; effit, effīant, ecfīerī; īnfit; interfīat, interfīerī; superfit, superfīat.

792.

797.

793.

794.

795.

796.

798. Deponents, that is, verbs with passive person endings and a reflexive or an active meaning (725), have these active noun forms: participles, the future infinitive, the gerund, and the supines. The perfect participle is usually active, but sometimes passive; the gerundive always passive. The following is a synopsis of deponents:

801. A few verbs are deponent in the present system only: as, dēvortor, turn in, perfect dēvortī; revortor, turn back, perfect revortī, but with active perfect participle revorsus. Four are deponent in the perfect system only: fīdō, trust, fīdere, fīsus, and the compounds, cōnfīdō, diffīdō; and audeō, dare, audēre, ausus, gaudeō, feel glad, gaudēre, gāvīsus, and soleō, am used, solēre, solitus. Most impersonals in -ēre have both an active and a deponent form in the perfect system: see 815, 816.

802. (1.) The future active participle with a form of sum is used to denote an intended or future action: as,

804. (2.) The gerundive with a form of sum is used to denote action which requires to be done: as,

805. (1.) Some verbs have only a few forms: as,

817. Of the impersonals in -ēre, some have other forms besides the third person singular and the infinitives: as,

818. (1.) Some verbs have more than one form of the present stem: thus,

823. (2.) Some verbs have more than one form of the perfect stem: as,

824. The final vowel of a tense stem is said to be variable when it is -o- in some of the forms, and -u-, -e-, or -i- in others.

919. As citus, so always percitus and incitus (once incītus, doubtful); usually concitus, rarely concītus; excitus and excītus equally common; always accītus. ambītus always has long ī (763). āgnitus, recognized, cōgnitus, known, and the adjectives inclutus or inclitus, of high renown, and putus, clean, have a short root vowel. For dēfrūtum, dēfrutum, see 134, 1.

827. In old Latin, the stem vowel of the third person plural of the present was o: as, COSENTIONT; o was long retained after v, u, or qu (107, c): as, vīvont, ruont, sequontur; or, if o was not retained, qu became c: as, secuntur.

828. A root without addition is used as the present stem, in the present tense or parts of the present tense, in root verbs (744-781): as,

840. In many of the forms, the final vowel of the theme is contracted with the variable vowel: as,

841. The suffix of the present subjunctive of sum, am, is -ī-, which becomes -i- before -m, -t, and -nt: si-m, sī-s, si-t, sī-mus, sī-tis, si-nt (35, 2, 3). So also in the singular and in the third person plural, dui-m, &c. (756), and edi-m, &c. (769), and in all the persons, veli-m, &c. (nōli-m, &c., māli-m, &c.). An old suffix is -iē- (-ie-), in sie-m, siē-s, sie-t, and sie-nt.

843. (2.) The present subjunctive stem of verbs in -āre ends in -ē-, which becomes -e- in some of the persons: as,

844. Root verbs have a root as imperative stem (745-780): as, es, &c., fer, &c. But the imperative of nōlō has a stem in -ī-, like verbs in -īre: thus, nōlī, nōlī-tō, nōlī-te, nōlī-tōte.

846. The second person singular imperative active of dīcō, dūcō, and faciō, is usually dīc, dūc, and fac, respectively, though the full forms, dīce, &c., are also used, and are commoner in old Latin. Compounds of dūcō may have the short form: as, ēdūc. ingerō has once inger (Catull.). sciō has regularly the singular scī-tō, plural scī-tōte, rarely scī-te.

847. The imperfect indicative stem ends in -bā-, which becomes -ba- in some of the persons: as,

848. The suffix of the imperfect indicative of sum, am, is -ā-, which becomes -a- before -m, -t, and -nt (35, 2, 3)

the

s becomes r between the vowels (154): era-m, erā-s, era-t, erā-mus, erā-tis, era-nt.

849. The imperfect subjunctive stem ends in -rē-, which becomes -re- in some of the persons: as,

850. The suffix of the imperfect subjunctive of sum, am, is -sē-, which becomes -se- in some of the persons; esse-m, essē-s, esse-t, essē-mus, essē-tis, esse-nt; so also ēssē-s, &c. (769). volō, wish, nōlō, won’t, and mālō, prefer, have velle-m, nōlle-m, and mālle-m respectively (166, 8

). 

851. The future stem of sum, am, is ero|e-: erō, eri-s, eri-t, eri-mus, eri-tis, eru-nt. has dabō, has ībō, and queō has quībō.

853. (2.) The future stem of verbs in -āre and -ēre ends in -bo|e-, which is preceded by a form ending in long -ā- or -ē- respectively: as,

854. There are two kinds of perfect stems: (A.) Some verbs have as perfect stem a root, generally with some modification, but without a suffix (858-866). (B.) Some perfects are formed with a suffix, -s-, or -v- or -u- (867-875).

875. The perfect potuī to the present possum (751) is from a lost present *poteō, *potēre (922). pōnere (for *po-sinere, 112; 170, 2) forms an old perfect posīvī (964), later posuī, as if pos- were the stem.

876. The perfect subjunctive stem ends in -erī-, for which -eri- is sometimes used (35, 2, 3): as,

878. In the perfect subjunctive, short i is found, as in the future perfect, some 9 times, thus: -is, 8 times (Plaut. in anapests 3, Verg. 2, Hor. 3), -imus once (Verg.). But before -tis, short i is not found.

879. One verb only, meminī, remember, has a perfect imperative; in this imperative, the person endings are not preceded by a vowel, thus: memen-tō, memen-tōte.

880. The pluperfect indicative stem ends in -erā-, which becomes -era- in some of the persons: as,

881. The pluperfect subjunctive stem ends in -issē-, which becomes -isse- in some of the persons: as,

882. The future perfect stem ends in -erō- and -eri-: as,

884. In the future perfect, long ī is found, as in the perfect subjunctive, some 33 times, thus: -īs, 28 times (Plaut. 3, Hor. 5, Ov. 15, Prop., Stat., Mart., Priap., inscr., once each), -īmus, once (Catull.), -ītis, 4 times (Ov. 3, Priap. 1).

885. (1.) Some shorter forms in the perfect system are principally found in old Latin.

893. (b.) In tenses formed from perfect stems in -īv-, v is often dropped before -is-, -ēr-, or -er-; but contraction is common only in the forms which have -is-: as,

894. The active infinitive has the ending -re in the present, and -isse in the perfect: as,

898. The place of the perfect passive, future active, and future passive infinitive is supplied by a circumlocution, as seen in the paradigms. For the future perfect -āssere, see 887.

899. The gerundive stem is formed by adding -ndo-, nominative -ndus, -nda, -ndum, to the present stem: as,

900. The supine stem is formed by the suffix -tu-, which is often changed to -su- (912).

901. The present participle stem is formed by adding -nt- or -nti-, nominative -ns, to the present stem: as,

903. Some adjectives which were originally present participles have no verb: as, clēmēns, merciful, ēlegāns, choice, ēvidēns, clear, frequēns, thick, petulāns, wanton, recēns, fresh, repēns, sudden, &c., &c. For potēns, powerful, see 922.

904. The future participle suffix is -tūro-, nominative -tūrus, -tūra, -tūrum, which is often changed to -sūro-, nominative -sūrus, -sūra, -sūrum (912).

905. Some future participles have a different formation from that of the perfect participle: as, mortuus, dead, moritūrus; see also in the dictionary arguō, fruor, orior, ruō, secō. And some verbs have two forms of the future participle: as, āgnōscō, īgnōscō, hauriō, iuvō, pariō. Some verbs which have no perfect participle have a future participle: as, acquiēscō, appāreō, ardeō, caleō, careō, doleō, ēsuriō, fugiō, haereō, incidō, iaceō, -nuō, parcō, rauciō, recidō, sonō, stō, valeō.

906. The perfect participle suffix is -to-, nominative -tus, -ta, -tum, which is often changed to -so-, nominative -sus, -sa, -sum (912).

920. I. The principal parts of root verbs and of verbs in -ere are formed in a variety of ways and are best learned separately for every verb (922-986).

1023. A Sentence is a thought expressed by means of a verb. The Subject is that which is spoken of. The Predicate is that which is said of the subject.

2299. A passive with a verb meaning represent is expressed, for lack of a present passive participle, by the infinitive (2175). The infinitive active is rare.

1061. A subordinate sentence introductory in thought to the main sentence, though not necessarily first in the order of the words, is called a Protasis; the main sentence which completes the thought is called an Apodosis: as,

1025. The sentence may be declarative, stating a fact, exclamatory, crying out about something, interrogative, asking a question, or imperative, giving a command.

1026. The subject is a substantive, or any word or words having the value of a substantive.

1034. Some verbs have no subject at all in the third person singular; these are called Impersonal. Such are: a few verbs expressing ‘operations of nature,’ five verbs of ‘mental distress,’ and any verb used to denote merely the occurrence of action, without reference to any doer: as,

1035. The predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb of indeterminate meaning with a predicate nominative added to complete the sense.

1036. The verb is sometimes omitted, when it is easily understood. So particularly such everyday verbs as mean am, do, say, come, and go, in proverbs and maxims, in short questions, and in emphatic or lively assertion or description: as,

1038. I. The subject may be enlarged by the addition of attributes, appositives, or objects.

1047. A substantive in any case may be modified like the subject.

1048. II. The predicate may be enlarged by the addition of accusatives, datives, predicate nouns, or adverbial adjuncts.

1054. A predicate substantive may be modified like the subject. An adjective either of the subject or of the predicate, may be modified by an oblique case or by an adverb.

1055. Simple sentences may be combined in two different ways. The added sentence may be I. Coordinate; or II. Subordinate.

1056. A Compound Sentence is one which consists of two or more coordinate simple sentences: as,

1057. A compound sentence is usually abridged when the members have parts in common: as,

1058. A Complex Sentence is one which consists of a main and a subordinate sentence: as,

1062. A verb agrees with its subject in number and person: as,

1098. A demonstrative, determinative, or relative pronoun in agreement with a substantive is often equivalent to a genitive limiting the substantive: as,

1076. If the subjects are of different persons, the first person is preferred to the second or the third, and the second to the third: as,

1077. A substantive which explains another substantive referring to the same thing is put in the same case.

1081. A substantive in the accusative or nominative is sometimes in apposition to a thought or clause: as,

1082. An adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle, agrees with its substantive in number, gender, and case: as,

1099. The singular of a word denoting a person is sometimes used in a collective sense.

1635. The present subjunctive is sometimes used in reference to past action, like the indicative present of vivid narration (1590): as, migrantīs cernās, V. 4, 401, you can descry them swarming out (1556). comprehendī iussit; quis nōn pertimēscat? V. 5, 14, he ordered them to be arrested; who would not be thoroughly scared? (1565). See also 2075.

1468. In exaggerated style, the superlative of eminence may be capped by a comparative: as, stultior stultissumō, Pl. Am. 907, a greater than the greatest fool. ego miserior sum quam tū, quae es miserrima, Fam. 14, 3, 1, I am myself more unhappy than you, who are a most unhappy woman.

1110. The plural is sometimes used in generalizations, and in poetry to magnify a single thing, to give mystery to the statement, or often merely for metrical convenience: as, advēnisse familiārēs dīcitō, Pl. Am. 353, say that the people of the house are come, the plural familiārēs denoting one person. Priamī dum rēgna manēbant, V. 2, 22, while Priam’s realms still stood. externōs optāte ducēs, V. 8, 503, choose captains from a foreign strand, i.e. Aeneas.

1111. There are two groups of cases, the principal and the secondary.

1437. In oaths and adjurations, per is often separated from its proper accusative by the accusative of the object: as, per tē de͡ōs ōrō, T. Andr. 538, I beg thee by the gods, in the gods’ name.

1113. The nominative is principally used as the subject or predicate noun of a verb or of an infinitive. Besides this use, the nominative occurs in titles, exclamations, and addresses (1114-1123).

1123. The vocative nominative or vocative proper is sometimes accompanied by ō, but only in impassioned addresses: as, ō fortūnāte adulēscēns, Arch. 24, oh thou thrice blest youth; also by prō in addresses to gods, by eho and heus in calls on men. Rarely by au, ehem, hem, ē̆heu, eia or heia, .

1114. The nominative is used in inscriptions, notices, titles, or headings: as,

1116. Sometimes the nominative of a title or exclamation is retained in a sentence for some other case: as, Gabīniō cōgnōmen ‘Cauchius’ ūsurpāre concessit, Suet. Cl. 24, he allowed Gabinius to take the surname ‘Cauchius;’ (compare Catō quasi cōgnōmen habēbat Sapientis, L. 6, Cato had the virtual surname of the Wise). ‘Marsya’ nōmen habet, O. 6, 400, it has the name of ‘Marsyas;’ (compare nōmen Dānuvium habet, S. Fr. 3, 55, it has the name Danube), resonent mihi ‘Cynthia’ silvae, Prop. 1, 18, 31, let woods reecho ‘Cynthia’ for me; (compare tū, Tītyre, fōrmōsam resonāre docēs Amaryllida silvas, V. E. 1, 4, thou, Tityrus, dost teach the woods to echo Amaryllis Fair).

1117. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations: as,

1118. The vocative nominative is used when a person or thing is addressed: as,

1124. The accusative is used primarily with verbs, or with expressions equivalent to verbs. The relations expressed by the accusative are all of one general kind; but they vary somewhat, according to the nature of the verb.

1174. The accusative of extent or duration, or of aim of motion is often combined with that of the object: as,

1132. The object of a verb is put in the accusative: as,

1139. Verbs of weeping and wailing, and some other verbs of feeling, which commonly have an intransitive use, sometimes have a transitive use with an accusative: as,

1140. The meaning of a verb, even of one ordinarily intransitive, may be emphasized or more exactly defined by an accusative of kindred derivation added.

1146. The accusative is sometimes disengaged from a verb, and qualifies a substantive as an attribute, chiefly in a few set expressions (1129): as, ōrātiōnēs aut aliquid id genus, Att. 13, 12, 3, speeches or something that kind. aucupium omne genus, Cat. 114, 3, fowling of every kind. nūgās hoc genus, H. S. 2, 6, 43, small talk—this kind. hoc genus in rēbus, Lucr. 6, 917, in matters of this kind. cum id aetātis fīliō, Clu. 141, with a son of that age. Similarly diēs quīndecim supplicātiō, 2, 35, 4, a fortnight thanksgiving.

1147. Poets use the accusative to express the part concerned, especially a part of the human body: as,

1148. The accusative is used with reflexive verbs in poetry to denote the thing put on: as,

1149. The accusative is used in exclamations, sometimes merely to call attention to something, but generally with a predicate to express a judgment with emphasis.

1150. The accusative is used in excited orders, appeals, and questions, without any verb expressed, or even distinctly felt: as, Tiberium in Tiberim, Suet. Tib. 75, Tiberius to the Tiber. dī vostram fidem, T. Andr. 716, ye gods your help. prō fidem, Thēbānī cīvēs, Pl. Am. 376, oh help, or murder, ye citizens of Thebes. So with unde, quō, and quandō, often followed by mihī̆ or tibī̆: as, quō mihi fortūnam, sī nōn concēditur ūtī? H. E. 1, 5, 12, why wealth for me, if wealth I may not use?

1151. Extent of space or duration of time is denoted by the accusative: as,

1156. The accusative in some pronominal expressions and adverbs passes over from ‘time through which’ to a loose ‘time at which’: as, id temporis, RA. 97, at that time. hoc noctis, Pl. Am. 163b, at this time of night. tum, then, num, nunc, now, nunc ipsum, Pl. B. 940, Att. 10, 4, 10, this very minute, commodum, just in time. For the locative ablative exceptionally used to denote duration, see 1355.

1157. (1.) Proper names of towns and of little islands or peninsulas are put in the accusative to denote the aim with expressions of motion: as,

1166. With the accusative in -tum (or -sum), called the supine, the idea of ‘aim’ passes over into that of ‘purpose:’ as mīlitātum abiīt, T. Hau. 117, he’s gone away a soldiering (2270).

1167. Many verbs may take two accusatives, an object and a predicate.

1175. The dative denotes that for or to which a thing is or is done, and either accompanies single words, such as verbs, adjectives, sometimes adverbs, rarely substantives, or serves to modify the entire sentence. It has two principal uses.

1225. The dative receptuī is also used in military language to denote purpose: as, Caesar receptuī canī iussit, 7, 47, 1, Caesar ordered the retreat sounded. Quīnctius receptuī canere iussit, L. 34, 39, 13. This dative is sometimes attached immediately to a substantive: as, receptuī sīgnum, Ph. 13, 15, the trumpet for retreat.

1180. Many verbs require a dative to complete their meaning.

1199. A few compound verbs admit either the dative of the person or thing and accusative of the thing, or the accusative of the person or thing and ablative of the thing; such are adspergō and īnspergō, circumdō, circumfundō, exuō and induō, impertiō, interclūdō; also the uncompounded dōnō: as, praedam mīlitibus dōnat, 7, 11, 9, he presents the booty to the soldiers. scrībam tuum ānulō dōnāstī, V. 3, 185, you presented your clerk with a ring. For the different constructions of interdīcō, see the dictionary.

1200. The dative with many adjectives and some adverbs denotes that to which the quality is directed.

1204. In Plautus and Terence, similis, the like, the counterpart, and its compounds, regularly take the genitive. The dative, as well as the genitive, is also used from Ennius on, particularly of a limited or approximate likeness: see the dictionary.

1205. The dative of a person or thing interested, benefited, harmed, may be added at option to almost any verb: as,

1210. With verbs of motion the dative of the person interested denotes in poetry the end of motion also: as, multōs Danaūm dēmittimus Orcō, V. 2, 398, we send down many a Danaan for the nether king. So also the dative of personified words of place: as, it clāmor caelō, V. 5, 451, up goes a shout for heaven, i.e. heaven hears a shout. sēdibus hunc refer ante suīs, V. 6, 152, first bear him duly to his place of rest, i.e. let his expectant grave receive him.

1211. The dative of the personal pronoun is often used with expressions of emotion, interest, surprise, or derision: as,

1212. The dative is used with forms of sum to denote the possessor: as,

1216. This dative is sometimes used with the perfect participle, and the tenses formed with it: as, mihī̆ est ēlabōrātum, Caecil. 40, I have it all worked out. carmina nūlla mihī sunt scrīpta, O. Tr. 5, 12, 35, no poetry have I ready made. Rarely with passives of the present system: as, nūlla placēre diū nec vīvere carmina possunt, quae scrībuntur aquae pōtōribus, H. E. 1, 19, 2, no verse can take or be longlived that by teetotallers is writ.

1217. The dative may denote the person viewing or judging: as,

1218. In imitation of a Greek idiom, volēns, cupiēns, or invītus, is used by Sallust and Tacitus in agreement with a dative dependent on a form of sum, the combination being equivalent to a subject with a form of volō, cupiō, or invītus sum, respectively: as, cēterīs remanēre volentibus fuit, Ta. H. 3, 43, i.e. cēterī remanēre voluērunt, the rest were minded to bide where they were. Once in Livy.

1219. (1.) Certain datives are used with a form of sum to denote what a thing tends to, proves, or is. This dative is generally accompanied by a dative of the person interested: as,

1222. (2.) The dative is also used with a few verbs of considering or accounting to denote what a thing is accounted.

1223. A few datives are used to denote what a thing is intended to be. This dative is generally accompanied by a dative of the person interested.

1226. The genitive is principally used with nouns, less frequently with verbs. Sometimes even when it seems to be dependent on a verb, it really depends on a substantive understood, or on a noun virtually contained or implied in the verb. Some verbs require an accusative also, in addition to the genitive.

1295. In poetry, the genitive with an adjective in agreement occurs two or three times in exclamation: as, foederis heu tacitī, Prop. 5, 7, 21, alas, that secret covenant. Usually the nominative (1117), or the accusative (1149).

1227. A substantive is often limited by another substantive in the genitive.

1231. The relations expressed by the limiting genitive vary very much according to the context. These relations may be put in classes, as below (1232-1260). But it must be remembered that as the genitive connects substantives in a loose way, the same construction may sometimes be referred to more than one head.

1232. (1.) The genitive is used to denote that which does the action, or which causes, originates, or possesses the object designated by the substantive it limits: as,

1238. With the possessive genitive, the limited substantive is sometimes defined by commūnis, proprius or aliēnus, sacer, or tōtus added: as, hoc proprium virtūtis exīstimant, 6, 23, 2, this they consider a special characteristic of bravery. omnia quae nostra erant propria, RA. 150, everything which was our peculiar property (1234). illa īnsula eōrum deōrum sacra putātur, V. 1, 48, that island is considered the hallowed property of those gods. iam mē Pompēī tōtum esse scīs, Fam. 2, 13, 2, you are aware that I am become Pompey’s, out and out.

1239. (2.) The genitive with an adjective in agreement is used to denote quality, either attributively or predicatively: as,

1240. A substantive expressing quality with aequus, pār, similis, or dissimilis in agreement, is put not in the genitive, but in the ablative, by Cicero, Caesar, Nepos, and Livy.

1241. (3.) The partitive genitive denotes a whole of which the limited substantive denotes a part. There are two kinds of partitive genitive, the numerical and the quantitative: as,

1254. In Sallust, Livy, and Tacitus, genitives of abstracts are used with the adverbs , quō, and hūc: as, eō miseriārum, S. I. 14, 3, to that pitch of distress. Ones with ut: ut quisque audentiae habuisset, adcurrerent, Ta. 15, 53, they should run up, with a speed commensurate in every case to their daring.

1255. (4.) The genitive is used to define that of which a thing consists: as,

1259. quidquid est, quantum est, quod est, or quodcumque est, with a genitive, is equivalent to an emphatic omnis: as, quidquid patrum est, L. 3, 17, 5, whatever there is in the shape of senators, i.e. every single senator. quod est pecūniae, trādit, Caes. C. 2, 20, 8, what there is in the-way of money, he hands over. Similarly tantum for tot: as, tantum hominum, Pl. Poen. 619, such a mass of men.

1260. (5.) The objective genitive denotes the object of the action expressed in the limited substantive: as,

1262. A possessive pronoun or adjective is sometimes used for the objective genitive: as,

1263. (1.) The genitive is used with many adjectives to denote the object.

1270. (3.) In poetry and late prose, the genitive is used very freely with many adjectives of various meanings, often merely to indicate what they apply to: as,

1271. A few neuter adjectives of quantity are put in the genitive with verbs of valuing to denote the amount of estimation; such genitives are:

1275. A similar genitive occurs in one or two set forms, such as aequī bonīque dīcō, or faciō, aequī faciō, and bonī cōnsulō: as, istūc, Chremēs, aequī bonīque faciō, T. Hau. 787, I count that, Chremes, fair and good. aequī istūc faciō, Pl. MG. 784, that’s all the same to me.

1276. rēfert and interest, it concerns, are much alike in meaning and in construction. But the use of rēfert is characteristic of old Latin and poetry; in prose from Cicero on it is almost supplanted by interest, especially where persons are concerned.

1279. The matter of concern is expressed by a sentence or infinitive, or by a neuter pronoun; rarely by an appellative: as, nōn quō meā interesset locī nātūra, Att. 3, 19, 1, not that the character of the place concerned me. The degree of concern is expressed by an adverb, as magnopere, by a neuter accusative, as multum, or by a genitive of estimation, magnī, permagnī, plūris, parvī, tantī, quantī (1271).

1280. Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, and acquitting, take a genitive of the charge: as,

1282. The penalty also is sometimes denoted by the genitive: as, cupiō octuplī damnārī Aprōnium, V. 3, 28, I want to have Apronius condemned to a payment of eightfold. damnātusque longī Sīsyphus Aeolidēs labōris, H. 2, 14, 19, and Sisyphus the Aeolid, amerced with penance long. Sometimes by the ablative: as, capite, V. 5, 109. So usually from Livy on, when the penalty is a definite sum of money or fractional part of a thing.

1283. A genitive of the thing, commonly with an accusative of the person, is used with five impersonals of mental distress:

1286. Personal verbs of desiring, loathing, admiring, and dreading, sometimes take the genitive: as, pol, quamquam domī cupiō, opperiar, Pl. Tri. 841, although I yearn for home, I vow I’ll wait (1263). fastīdit meī, Pl. Aul. 245, he views me with disdain (1263). iūstitiaene prius mīrer, bellīne labōrum? V. 11, 126, thy justice first shall I admire? thy toils in war? nē tuī quidem testimōnī veritus, Att. 8, 4, 1, not having any awe about your recommendation either.

1287. The genitive is used with verbs of remembering and forgetting when they denote an inherent state of memory or of forgetfulness: as,

1291. Verbs of reminding take the accusative of a person and sometimes with it the genitive of a thing: as,

1292. Verbs of participation and mastery sometimes take the genitive in old Latin and in poetry: as, servom su͡i participat cōnsilī, Pl. Cist. 163, she makes a slave a sharer in her plot (1263). quā Daunus agrestium rēgnāvit populōrum, H. 3, 30, 11, where Daunus was the lord of rural folk (1260). So, even in prose, potior, which usually has the ablative (1379): as, totīus Galliae sēsē potīrī posse spērant, 1, 3, 8, they hope they can get the mastery over the whole of Gaul. Especially with persons, or with the genitive plural rērum: rērum potior, get to be, or often, am, master of the situation, or I am monarch of all I survey. Similarly in Tacitus apīscor, adipīscor: as, arma, quīs Servius Galba rērum adeptus est, Ta. 3, 55, the war by which Galba became master of the throne. In Plautus crēdō sometimes has the genitive of a thing and dative of a person.

1293. The genitive is sometimes used with verbs of filling, abounding, and lacking, as it is with the corresponding adjectives (1263): as,

1294. With verbs of separating and abstaining, the ablative is regularly used (1302). But the genitive is sometimes found in poetry: as, mē omnium labōrum levās, Pl. R. 247, thou riddest me of all my woes. abstinētō īrārum calidaeque rixae, H. 3, 27, 69, from bursts of rage keep thou and hot affray.

1296. The ablative is used principally with verbs and their participles, or with adjectives, and consists of three cases that were originally distinct.

1400. Two or more ablatives denoting different relations are often combined in the same sentence: as,

1302. Verbs of separation take an ablative of the thing from which separation takes place: as,

1311. (2.) The ablatives domō and rūre, and in poetry humō, are used like proper names of towns: as,

1312. The verb nāscor and participles of origin take an ablative to denote parentage or rank in life.

1315. The ablative with forms of faciō and sum denotes that with which or to which something is done: as, quid hōc homine faciās? Sest. 29, what can you do with such a fellow? quid mē fīet? T. Andr. 709, what will become of me? But often the dative (1205): as, quid tibī̆ faciam? Att. 7, 3, 2, what shall I do to you? Or the ablative with : as, dē frātre quid fīet? T. Ad. 996, as to my brother, what will come to pass?

1316. The ablative is used to denote cause, influence, or motive: as,

1319. In poetry, an ablative denoting a person, with an adjective in agreement, is sometimes equivalent to an expression with an abstract substantive: as, et adsiduō ruptae lēctōre columnae, J. 1, 13, and pillars by persistent reader riven, i.e. adsiduitāte lēctōris, or adsiduā lēctiōne. cūrātus inaequālī tōnsōre capillōs, H. E. 1, 1, 94, my locks by unsymmetric barber trimmed.

1320. (1.) The ablative may be used with a comparative adjective, when the first of two things compared is in the nominative, or is a subject-accusative.

1330. With a comparative adjective or adverb, the ablatives opīniōne, exspectātiōne, and spē, and some others, chiefly in poetry, take the place of a sentence with quam: as,

1331. (1.) Singular proper names of towns and of little islands are put in the locative to denote the place in or at which action occurs: as,

1341. The locative proper sometimes denotes time when: as, lūcī, by light, temperī, betimes, herī or here, yesterday, vesperī, at evening, herī vesperī, DO. 2, 13, last evening. In Plautus, diē septimī, Men. 1156, Per. 260, on the seventh day, māne sānē septimī, Men. 1157, bright and early on the seventh, diē crāstinī, Most. 881, tomorrow. Often with an adjective juxtaposed: as, postrīdiē, the day after, postrīdiē māne, Fam. 11, 6, 1, early next day, cōtīdiē, each day, daily, prīdiē, the day before.

1342. (1.) Plural proper names of towns and of little islands are put in the locative ablative to denote the place in or at which action occurs: as,

1349. The locative ablative is used with fīdō and cōnfīdō, glōrior, laetor, nītor, stō, and with frētus: as, barbarī cōnfīsī locī nātūrā in aciē permānsērunt, 8, 15, 1, the natives, trusting in the nature of their position, kept their stand in battle array. superiōribus vīctōriis frētī, 3, 21, 1, relying on their former victories. For other constructions with these words, see the dictionary.

1350. (1.) The locative ablative is used to denote the point of time at which action occurs.

1355. The ablative is exceptionally used to denote duration of time: as,

1356. A few indefinite designations of military forces denote accompaniment by the ablative alone, or oftener with cum: as,

1357. The participles iūnctus and coniūnctus take the ablative of the thing joined with: as, dēfēnsiōne iūncta laudātiō, Br. 162, a eulogy combined with a defence. But sometimes the ablative with cum is used, or the dative (1186).

1358. (1.) Certain substantives without an attribute are put in the ablative alone to denote manner; but usually substantives without an attribute have cum.

1361. Other expressions denoting manner, particularly prepositional expressions with per, may be found in the dictionary: as, per dolum, 4, 13, 1, by deceit, per iocum, Agr. 2, 96, in fun, per litterās, Att. 5, 21, 13, by letter, in writing, per vim, RA. 32, violently, per praestigiās, V. 4, 53, by some hocus pocus or other, &c., &c. Sometimes the ablative with ex.

1362. (1.) The ablative of a substantive, with a predicate participle in agreement, is used to denote an attendant circumstance of an action.

1374. The ablative absolute is sometimes attended, especially in Livy and Tacitus, by an explanatory word, such as etsī, tamen, nisi, quasi, quamquam, or quamvīs: as, etsī aliquō acceptō dētrīmentō, tamen summā exercitūs salvā, Caes. C. 1, 67, 5, though with some loss, yet with the safety of the army as a whole.

1375. The ablative with an adjective in agreement or with a limiting genitive is used to denote quality, either predicatively or attributively: as,

1376. The instrumental ablative is used with verbs of motion to denote the route taken: as,

1377. The ablative is used to denote the instrument or means: as,

1384. ūsus est is employed chiefly in comedy, but also once or twice in Cicero, Lucretius, Vergil, and Livy. Once with the accusative: ūsust hominem astūtum, Pl. Ps. 385, there’s need of a sharp man.

1385. The instrumental ablative is used to denote that in respect of which an assertion or a term is to be taken: as,

1386. The instrumental ablative is used with verbs of abounding, filling, and furnishing: as,

1387. The ablative is sometimes used with adjectives of fulness, instead of the regular genitive (1263). Thus, in later Latin, rarely with plēnus: as, maxima quaeque domus servīs est plēna superbīs, J. 5, 66, a grand establishment is always full of stuck-up slaves. et ille quidem plēnus annīs abiīt, plēnus honōribus, Plin. Ep. 2, 1, 7, well, as for him, he has passed away, full of years and full of honours. So in Cicero and Caesar, once each. Also with dīves in poetry, and, from Livy on, in prose. With refertus, the ablative of things is common, while persons are usually in the genitive (1263). With onustus, the ablative is generally used, rarely the genitive.

1388. The instrumental ablative is used with verbs of measuring and of exchanging, and in expressions of value and price: as,

1392. The ablative is also used with dignus and indignus: as,

1393. The instrumental ablative is used to denote the amount of difference.

1399. In numerical designations of distance, the words intervāllum and spatium are regularly put in the ablative: as, rēx VI mīlium passuum intervāllō ā Saburrā cōnsēderat, Caes. C. 2, 38, 3, the king had pitched six miles away from Saburra. So sometimes mīlle: as, mīlibus passuum VI a Caesaris castrīs sub monte cōnsēdit, 1, 48, 1. See 1152.

Use of Cases with Prepositions, 1401-1437.

In General, 1401-1409. With the Accusative, 1410-1416. With the Ablative, 1417-1421. With the Accusative or the Ablative, 1422-1425. Combination of Substantives by a Preposition, 1426-1428. Repetition or Omission of a Preposition, 1429-1430. Two Prepositions with one Substantive, 1431-1432. Position of Prepositions, 1433-1437.

Use of Adverbs, 1438-1453.

Use of Degrees of Comparison, 1454-1468.

(B.) USE OF THE VERB, 1469-1635.

Voice, 1469-1492.

Active, 1469-1471. Passive, 1472-1485. Deponents, 1486-1492.

Mood, 1493-1586.

The Indicative, 1493-1533. In Declarations, 1493-1498. In Questions, 1499-1533. Yes or No Questions, 1502-1510. Positive and Negative Answers, 1511-1514. Alternative Questions, 1515-1525. Pronoun Questions, 1526-1530. Some Applications of Questions, 1531-1533.

The Infinitive of Intimation, 1534-1539.

The Subjunctive, 1540-1570. The Subjunctive in Declarations: I. Of Desire: Of Wish, 1540-1546. Of Exhortation, Direction, Statement of Propriety, 1547-1552. Of Willingness, Assumption, Concession, 1553. II. Of Action Conceivable, 1554-1562. The Subjunctive in Questions, 1563-1570.

The Imperative, 1571-1586. Of Command, 1571-1580. Of Prohibition, 1581-1586.

Tense, 1587-1635.

Of the Indicative, 1587-1633. Present, 1587-1593. Imperfect, 1594-1601. Perfect, 1602-1613. Pluperfect, 1614-1618. Future, 1619-1625. Future Perfect, 1626-1632. The Future Active Participle with sum, 1633.

Of the Subjunctive, 1634-1635.

THE COMPOUND SENTENCE, OR COORDINATION, 1636-1713.

Without a Connective, 1637-1642.

With a Connective, 1643-1692.

Conjunctions, 1643. Copulative, 1644-1666. Disjunctive, 1667-1675. Adversative, 1676-1686. Other Words as Connectives, 1687-1692.

The Intermediate Coordinate Sentence, 1693-1713.

The Subordinate Idea unindicated by the Mood, 1695-1704. The Subordinate Idea indicated by the Subjunctive, 1705-1713.

THE COMPLEX SENTENCE, OR SUBORDINATION, 1714-2299.

Definitions and Classifications, 1714-1716. Primary and Secondary Tenses, 1717. Virtual Futures, 1718.

Mood of the Subordinate Sentence, 1720-1731.

The Indicative, 1721. The Subjunctive: In Indirect Discourse, and in cases of Attraction, 1722-1729. Of Repeated Action, 1730. As in the Simple Sentence, 1731.

Tense of the Subordinate Sentence, 1732-1772.

Of the Indicative, 1732-1739. Of the Subjunctive, 1740-1772. Sequence of Tenses, 1745-1772. Tense subordinate to an Indicative, 1746-1761. Tense subordinate to a Subjunctive, 1762-1765. Tense subordinate to a Noun of the Verb, 1766-1769. Subjunctive due to another Subjunctive or to an Infinitive, 1770-1772.

The Indirect Question, 1773-1791.

In General, 1773-1774. Yes or No Questions, 1775-1777. Alternative Questions, 1778-1784. Pronoun Questions, 1785. Original Subjunctives, 1786. Indicative Questions apparently Indirect, 1787-1791.

The Relative Sentence, 1792-1837.

Agreement of the Relative, 1801-1811. Moods in the Relative Sentence, 1812-1830. Relative Sentences of Purpose, 1817. Of Characteristic or Result, 1818-1823. Of Cause or Concession, 1824-1830. Correlative Sentences, 1831. Relative Sentences Combined, 1832-1834. The Relative introducing a main Sentence, 1835-1837.

The Conjunctive Particle Sentence, 1838-2122.

Introduced by quod, 1838-1855. quia, 1856-1858. quom or cum, 1859-1881. quoniam, 1882-1884. quotiēns, quotiēnscumque, 1885-1887. quam, 1888-1898. quamquam, 1899-1902. quamvīs, 1903-1907. tamquam, 1908-1910. antequam, priusquam, 1911-1922. postquam, ubī̆, ut, cum prīmum, simul atque, 1923-1934. ut, 1935-1970. ubī̆, 1971. quō, 1972-1976. quōminus, 1977-1979. quīn, 1980-1990. dum, dōnec, quoad, quamdiū, 1991-2009. quandō, 2010-2014. , 2015-2115. etsī, tametsī, etiamsī, 2116. quasi, tamquam sī, ut or velut sī, 2117-2122.

Connection of Separate Sentences or Periods, 2123-2159.

Without a Connective, 2124-2127. With a Connective, 2128-2158. Affirmative Coordination, 2159.

Nouns of the Verb, 2160-2299.

The Infinitive, 2160-2236. Definitions, 2160-2163. The Infinitive of Purpose, 2164-2165. With Adjectives, 2166. The Infinitive as Object: The Complementary Infinitive, 2168-2171. The Accusative with the Infinitive, 2172-2206. The Infinitive as Subject, 2207-2215. The Infinitive of Exclamation, 2216. Tenses of the Infinitive, 2218. Present, 2219-2222. Perfect, 2223-2231. Future, 2232-2236.

The Gerundive and Gerund, 2237-2268. Definitions, 2237-2242. Nominative, 2243-2249. Accusative, 2250-2253. Dative, 2254-2257. Genitive, 2258-2264. Ablative, 2265-2268.

The Supine, 2269-2277. Definitions, 2269. Supine in -um, 2270-2273. Supine in , 2274-2277.

The Participle, 2278-2299. Definition, 2278. Time of the Participle, 2279-2281. The Attributive Participle, 2282-2286. The Substantive Participle, 2287-2292. The Appositive Participle, 2293-2296. The Predicative Participle, 2297-2299.

APPENDIX, 2300-2745.

Some Occasional Peculiarities of Verbs, 2300-2307.

The Conative Use, 2301-2303. The Causative Use, 2304. The Potential Use, 2305. The Obligatory Use, 2306. The Permissive Use, 2307.

Indirect Discourse, 2308-2334.

Definitions, 2308-2311. Mood, 2312-2320. Tense, 2321-2324. Pronoun, 2325. Conditional Periods in Indirect Discourse, 2326-2334.

Use of Pronouns, 2335-2403.

Personal, 2335. Reflexive, 2336-2343. Equivalents for a Reciprocal Pronoun, 2344-2345. Possessive, 2346. Demonstrative, 2347-2364. Determinative, 2365-2370. Pronoun of Identity, 2371-2373. Intensive, 2374-2384. Interrogative, 2385-2386. Relative, 2387. Indefinite, 2388-2403.

Numerals, 2404-2428.

Classification, 2404. List of Numerals, 2405. Notation, 2406-2411. Some forms of Numerals, 2412-2418. Some uses of Numerals, 2419-2422 Other Numerals, 2423. Fractions, 2424-2428.

Prosody, 2429-2739.

Rules of Quantity, 2429-2472. In Classical Latin, 2429-2457. Position, 2458. Hidden Quantity, 2459-2463. Peculiarities of Quantity in Old Latin, 2464-2469. Iambic Shortening, 2470-2472.

Figures of Prosody, 2473-2510. Hiatus, 2473-2480. Elision, 2481-2492. Ecthlipsis, 2493-2496. Semi-Hiatus or Semi-Elision, 2497. Synaloepha, 2498. Synizesis, 2499. Synaeresis, 2500. Dialysis, 2501. Diaeresis, 2502. Hardening, 2503. Softening, 2504. Diastolé, 2505-2506. Systolé, 2507. Syncopé, 2508. Tmesis, 2509. Synapheia, 2510.

Versification, 2511-2739. Definitions, 2511-2548. Numeri Italici, 2549. The Saturnian, 2550-2554. Dactylic Rhythms, 2555-2580. Iambic Rhythms, 2581-2627. Trochaic Rhythms, 2628-2649. Logaoedic Rhythms, 2650-2074. Dactylo-Trochaic Rhythms, 2675-2681. Anapaestic Rhythms, 2682-2690. Cretic Rhythms, 2691-2697. Bacchiac Rhythms, 2698-2706. Choriambic Rhythms, 2707. Ionic Rhythms, 2708-2717. Lyric Metres of Horace, 2718-2737. Lyric Strophes of Catullus, 2738. Index of Horatian Odes and their metres, 2739.

Abbreviations used in citing the Authors, 2740-2745.

Index of Subjects.

Index of Latin Words.

1401. Two cases, the accusative and the ablative, are used with prepositions.

1437. In oaths and adjurations, per is often separated from its proper accusative by the accusative of the object: as, per tē de͡ōs ōrō, T. Andr. 538, I beg thee by the gods, in the gods’ name.

1409. On the other hand, some verbal prefixes are never used as separate prepositions with a substantive. These are called Inseparable Prepositions; they are: amb-, round, an-, up, dis-, in two, por-, towards, rē̆d-, back. Usually also sēd-, apart (1417).

1410. The accusative is accompanied by the following prepositions:

1416. subter, under, is used in poetry, once by Catullus and once by Vergil, with the locative ablative: as, Rhoetēō subter lītore, Cat. 65, 7, beneath Rhoeteum’s strand.

1417. The ablative is accompanied by the following prepositions:

1421. The adverbs palam, in presence of, procul, apart from, either near or far, simul, with, are rarely used in poetry and late prose as prepositions with the ablative. coram occurs but once as a preposition (inscriptional) before Cicero’s time. absque with the ablative occurs once each in Cicero and Quintilian; in Plautus and Terence only in a coordinate protasis (1701; 2110).

1422. Two cases, the accusative and the ablative, are accompanied by the prepositions in, older endo, indu, into, in, sub, under, and super, over, on.

1425. (2.) super accompanies the ablative when it has colloquially the sense of , about, in reference to: as, hāc super rē scrībam ad tē Rēgiō, Att. 16, 6, 1, I’ll write you about this from Regium. In other senses, the accusative, but sometimes in poetry the ablative, chiefly in the sense of on: as, ligna super focō largē repōnēns, H. 1, 9, 5, piling on hearth the faggots high. nocte super mediā, V. 9, 61, at dead of night. paulum silvae super hīs, H. S. 2, 6, 3, a bit of wood to crown the whole.

1426. (1.) Two substantives are sometimes connected by a preposition, to indicate certain attributive relations (1043); such are particularly:

1428. Prepositional expressions are sometimes used predicatively: as, sunt omnēs sine maculā, Pl. 6, 14, they are all without spot or blemish. And sometimes they are equivalent to adjectives: as, contrā nātūram, TD. 4, 11, unnatural, suprā hominem, DN. 2, 34, superhuman. Or to substantives: as, sine pondere, O. 1, 20, things without weight. Or to adverbs: as, sine labōre, Pl. R. 461, easily.

1429. (1.) A preposition is often repeated with emphasis before two or more substantives: as,

1430. (2.) A preposition is often used with the first only of two or more substantives: as, in labōre ac dolōre, TD. 5, 41, in toil and trouble. incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater suus, N. 5, 3, 1, he fell under the selfsame ban as his father. Particularly when the second is in apposition: as, cum duōbus ducibus, Pyrrhō et Hannibale, L. 28, with two commanders, Pyrrhus and Hannibal.

1431. (1.) When two prepositions belong to one and the same substantive, the substantive is expressed with the first. With the second, the substantive is repeated, or its place is taken by a pronoun: as,

1432. (2.) The second preposition is often used adverbially, without any substantive: as, et in corpore et extrā, Fin. 2, 68, both in the body and outside.

1433. In general a preposition precedes its case: see 178.

1438. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, or adverbs.

1453. Sometimes, however, in old Latin, a second negation is used merely to emphasize the negative idea: as, lapideō sunt corde multī, quōs nōn miseret nēminis, E. in Fest. p. 162, there’s many a man with heart of stone, that feels for nobody. For doubled negatives in compound sentences, see 1660.

1454. The positive sometimes expresses an idea of disproportion: as,

1468. In exaggerated style, the superlative of eminence may be capped by a comparative: as, stultior stultissumō, Pl. Am. 907, a greater than the greatest fool. ego miserior sum quam tū, quae es miserrima, Fam. 14, 3, 1, I am myself more unhappy than you, who are a most unhappy woman.

1469. In the active voice, the subject is represented as performing the action of the verb.

1635. The present subjunctive is sometimes used in reference to past action, like the indicative present of vivid narration (1590): as, migrantīs cernās, V. 4, 401, you can descry them swarming out (1556). comprehendī iussit; quis nōn pertimēscat? V. 5, 14, he ordered them to be arrested; who would not be thoroughly scared? (1565). See also 2075.

1492. The perfect participle of deponents is sometimes used with a passive meaning. Some of the commonest of these participles are: adeptus, commentus, complexus, cōnfessus, ēmentītus, expertus, meditātus, opīnātus, pactus, partītus, testātus, &c., &c.

1471. The active of one verb sometimes serves as the passive of another: thus, pereō, go to destruction, die, serves as the passive of perdō, destroy, and vēneō, go to sale, am sold, as the passive of vēndō, put for sale, sell. Similarly fīō, become, get to be, am made, is used in the present system as the passive of faciō, make (788).

1472. In the passive voice, the subject is represented as acted upon.

1485. Some perfect participles have an active meaning: as, adultus, grown up. See 907, and also in the dictionary cautus, cōnsultus, concrētus, dēflāgrātus, incōnsīderātus, occāsus, nūpta.

1486. Many verbs have only passive inflections, but with the meaning of active inflections. Such verbs are called Deponents.

1493. The indicative mood is used in simple, absolute declarations: as,

1586. In law language, prohibitions are expressed by the third person of the imperative with , and with nēve as a connective: as,

1533. A question is sometimes united with a participle, or an ablative absolute, or thrown into a subordinate sentence: as,

1498. Forms of possum are sometimes put in the subjunctive (1554). Thus, possim, &c., often (1556), also possem, &c., usually of present time (1560), less frequently of past time (1559), potuissem, &c., particularly in sentences of negative import (1561), rarely potuerim, &c. (1558). Sometimes also dēbērem, &c., of present time (1560), dēbuissem, &c., chiefly in apodosis.

1499. The indicative is the mood ordinarily used in enquiries and in exclamations: as,

1502. (1.) Yes or No questions are sometimes put without any interrogative particle: as,

1510. (4.) In Plautus, satin or satin ut, really, actually, sometimes becomes a mere interrogative or exclamatory particle: as, satin abiīt ille? Pl. MG. 481, has that man really gone his way?

1511. There are no two current Latin words corresponding exactly with yes and no in answers.

1514. immō introduces a sentence rectifying a mistake, implied doubt, or understatement in a question: as, nūllane habēs vitia? :: immō alia, et fortasse minōra, H. S. 1, 3, 20, have you no faults? :: I beg your pardon, other faults, and peradventure lesser ones. causa igitur nōn bona est? immō optima, Att. 9, 7, 4, isn’t the cause a good one then? good? yes, more than good, very good.

1515. The alternative question belongs properly under the head of the compound sentence. But as the interrogative particles employed in the single question are also used in the alternative question, the alternative question is most conveniently considered here.

1525. An alternative question is answered by repeating one member or some part of it, with such changes as the context may require.

1526. Pronoun questions or exclamations are introduced by interrogative pronouns, or words of pronoun origin.

1530. Two or more questions or exclamations are sometimes united with one and the same verb: as,

1531. A question in the indicative present or future may be used to intimate command or exhortation, deliberation, or appeal: as,

1534. The infinitive is principally used in subordination, and will be spoken of under that head. One use, however, of the present infinitive in main sentences, as a kind of substitute for a past indicative, requires mention here.

1539. It may be mentioned here, that the infinitive of intimation is sometimes used from Sallust on in relative clauses and with cum, when. Also by Tacitus in a temporal protasis with ubī̆, ut, dōnec, or postquam, co-ordinated with a present or imperfect indicative protasis: as,

1540. The subjunctive may be used to express a wish.

1570. It may be mentioned here, that the interrogative subjunctive is often used in subordinate sentences: see 1731.

1546. In poetry, a wish is sometimes thrown into the form of a conditional protasis with or ō sī: as, ō sī urnam argentī fōrs quae mihi mōnstret, H. S. 2, 6, 10, oh if some chance a pot of money may to me reveal.

1547. The subjunctive may be used to express an exhortation, a direction, or a statement of propriety.

1552. (3.) The imperfect or (but not in old Latin) pluperfect subjunctive is sometimes used to express past obligation or necessity: as,

1553. The subjunctive of desire may be used to denote willingness, assumption, or concession: as,

1554. The subjunctive is often used to represent action as conceivable, without asserting that it actually takes place.

1562. It may be mentioned here, that the subjunctive of action conceivable often extends to subordinate sentences: see 1731.

1563. I. The subjunctive is often used to ask what action or whether any action is desired, commanded, proper, or necessary.

1571. The second person of the imperative mood is used in commands, either particular or general.

1580. A periphrastic perfect passive form is rare: as, iūre caesus estō, Twelve Tables in Macrob. Sat. 1, 4, 19, he shall be regarded as killed with justifying circumstances. probē factum estō, L. 22, 10, 6, let it be considered justified. at vōs admonitī nostrīs quoque cāsibus este, O. Tr. 4, 8, 51, but be ye warned by our misfortunes too.

1581. (1.) In prohibitions with the second person, the imperative with is used in old Latin, and with nēve as a connective, rarely neque: as,

1587. The present indicative represents action as going on at the time of speaking or writing: as,

1633. The future active participle combined with the tenses of sum expresses action impending, resolved on, or destined, at the time indicated by the tense of the verb: as,

1593. The present is sometimes loosely used of future action: as,

1594. The imperfect indicative represents action as going on in past time: as,

1601. In letters, the imperfect may denote action at the time of writing, the writer transferring himself to the time of the reader: as,

1602. The Latin perfect indicative represents two English tenses: thus, the preterite, I wrote, and the perfect, I have written, are both expressed by the perfect scrīpsī. In the first sense, this perfect is called the Historical Perfect; in the second sense, it is called the Perfect Definite.

1613. It may be mentioned here, that the perfect is regularly used in a subordinate sentence denoting time anterior to a present of repeated action (1588). In such sentences the present is preferred in English: as,

1614. The pluperfect indicative expresses past action, completed before another past action expressed or understood: as,

1618. It may be mentioned here, that the pluperfect is used in a subordinate sentence denoting time anterior to a past tense of repeated action. In such sentences the preterite is preferred in English: as,

1619. The future indicative expresses future action, either momentary or continuous: as,

1625. It may be mentioned here, that the future is used in sentences subordinate to a future, an imperative, or a subjunctive implying a future: as,

1626. The future perfect indicative expresses completed future action: as,

1632. The future perfect is often not perceptibly different from the future, especially in the first person singular in old Latin: as,

1634. In simple sentences, the tenses of the subjunctive correspond in general to the same tenses of the indicative. But the present has a future meaning; the imperfect sometimes expresses past, sometimes present action; and the perfect sometimes expresses past action, and sometimes future action.

1636. Two or more independent simple sentences may be coordinated to form a compound sentence in one of two ways: either without a connective, or with a connective.

1713. A subjunctive is now and then loosely coordinated with verbs in general, to indicate the purpose of the action: as,

1637. When simple sentences or parts of sentences are coordinated without any connective, this mode of arrangement is called Asyndetic Coordination or Asyndeton.

1642. Asyndeton is also common with parentheses. These often take the place of a modern foot-note: as, lēgātus capite vēlātō fīlō (lānae vēlāmen est) ‘audī, Iuppiter,’ inquit, L. 1, 32, 6, the envoy with his head covered with a ‘filum’ (that is to say a wrap of wool) says ‘bow down thine ear, Jupiter.’ Parentheses however are often introduced, from Terence on by nam, and from Sallust and Cicero on, by et, neque, autem, enim, &c.

1643. Simple sentences or parts of sentences may be connected by copulative, disjunctive, or adversative conjunctions.

1692. In animated rhetorical discourse any word repeated with emphasis may serve as a copulative; this is called Anaphora: as,

1644. Copulative conjunctions denote union, and connect both the sentences and their meaning. They are et, -que, atque or ac, and, and neque or nec, neither.

1666. Of all the Latin writers, Tacitus aims most at variety by combination of asyndeton and by the use of different copulatives: as, rēgem Rhamsēn Libyā Aethiopiā Mēdīsque et Persīs et Bactriānō ac Scythā potītum, 2, 60, that king Rhamses got control of Libya and Aethiopia and the Medes and Persians, and the Bactrian and Scythian.

1667. Disjunctive conjunctions connect the sentences, but disconnect the meaning. They are aut, vel, sīve or seu, -ve, and an, or. Of these conjunctions, aut, vel, and

sīve

are often placed before two or more members of a sentence in the sense of either . . . or. And in poetry, -ve . . . -ve sometimes occurs.

1675. (5.) The interrogative particle an sometimes becomes a disjunctive conjunction, or, or possibly, or perhaps: as, Simōnidēs an quis alius, Fin. 2, 104, Simonides or possibly somebody else. Common in Cicero, though not so in his speeches, and in Livy, commonest in Tacitus.

1676. Adversative conjunctions connect the sentences, but contrast the meaning. They are autem, on the other hand, sed, vērum, cēterum, but, vērō, but, indeed, at, but, tamen, nihilō minus, nevertheless.

1686. (6.) tamen, nihilō minus, nevertheless.

1687. Instead of a conjunction, other words are often used as connectives: as, pars . . . pars, aliī . . . aliī; adverbs of order or time: as, prīmum, first, or prīmō, at first ... deinde . . . tum, &c.; and particularly adverbs in pairs: as, modo . . . modo, tum . . .

tum,

less frequently quā . . . quā, simul . . . simul: as,

1693. A sentence coordinate in form with another sentence is often equivalent in meaning to a subordinate sentence. Such sentences are called Intermediate Coordinate Sentences.

1695. I. The relation of the two members may not be indicated by the mood, but left to be determined from the context.

1704. (9.) The coordinated member may represent the protasis of a comparative sentence with ut (1937): as,

1705. II. The subordinate idea is often indicated by the subjunctive of desire coordinated with another verb, usually with one which has a different subject.

1714. In a complex sentence, that is one consisting of a main and a subordinate sentence, the subordinate member is introduced by some subordinating word: such are,

2299. A passive with a verb meaning represent is expressed, for lack of a present passive participle, by the infinitive (2175). The infinitive active is rare.

1716. Subordinate sentences which express time or place, are called Temporal or Local sentences; comparison or manner, Comparative or Modal sentences; condition, cause, or concession, Conditional, Causal, or Concessive sentences; purpose, Final sentences; result, Consecutive sentences.

1717. In a main sentence, the indicative present, future, and future perfect, and the imperative, are called Primary Tenses; the indicative imperfect, historical perfect, and pluperfect, and the infinitive of intimation, are called Secondary Tenses. The perfect definite and the present of vivid narration are sometimes regarded as primary tenses, oftener as secondary tenses.

1718. Verbs which have an implication of futurity, such as those meaning can, ought, must, &c., with an infinitive, also subjunctives of wish (1540) or of exhortation (1547), may be called Virtual Futures.

1720. The indicative and the subjunctive are both used in subordinate sentences, as will be shown in the treatment of the several words of subordination. Some general uses may be mentioned collectively here.

1731. The subjunctive of wish, of action conceivable, or of interrogation, is sometimes used in a subordinate sentence exactly as in main sentences: as,

1721. The indicative is ordinarily used in sentences introduced by a relative pronoun, or by a causal conjunctive word other than cum.

1722. The subjunctive is used in relative, causal, temporal, and conditional sentences in indirect discourse, and in cases of attraction.

1729. The indicative is kept in subordinate statements added or vouched for by the person reporting, and also in circumlocutions equivalent to a substantive: as,

1730. The subjunctive is sometimes used in relative, temporal, or conditional sentences, to express action repeated or occurring at no particular time: as,

1732. I. The tense of a subordinate indicative often indicates a close relation of time with the tense of the leading verb, particularly in cases of repeated contemporaneous or antecedent action. The subordinate sentence in such combinations is said to have Relative time.

1772. (2.) Sentences with independent time retain the independent time in the subjunctive in primary sequence (1744); in secondary sequence the present becomes imperfect, and the perfect becomes pluperfect: as,

1739. With dum, in the time while, an independent present is used: see 1995. With postquam, &c., after, an independent perfect is used of a single action; see 1925.

1740. Subordinate subjunctive sentences were originally independent coordinate sentences, in the tense required to express the thought. By degrees the subordinate sentence blended closely with the main sentence, and the combination of the two was regarded as one whole.

1745. The use of subordinate subjunctive tenses relatively to the main tense, or what is commonly called the Sequence of Tenses, is as follows:

1746. (1.) The present, or perfect subjunctive, or the future participle with a form of sim, is used in sentences subordinate to a primary tense (1717): as,

1761. The subordinate subjunctive has sometimes the sequence of the nearest verb, instead of that of its proper verb: as, cūrāvit, quod semper in rē pūblicā tenendum est, nē plūrimum valeant plūrimī, RP. 2, 39, he arranged it so, a point which is always to be held fast in government, that the greatest number may not have the greatest power.

1762. When the leading verb is a subjunctive, the present is regarded as primary, and the imperfect and pluperfect as secondary: as,

1765. (2.) In subordinate sentences, the perfect subjunctive has the main sequence when it represents the indicative perfect definite, and the secondary when it represents the indicative historical perfect or the imperfect: as,

1766. (1.) A subjunctive subordinate to one of the nouns of the verb, except the perfect infinitive or the perfect participle, follows the sequence of the verb: as,

1769. The secondary sequence is used with meminī, remember, even when it has the present infinitive (2220): as, L. Metellum meminī ita bonīs esse vīribus extrēmō tempore aetātis, ut adulēscentiam nōn requīreret, CM. 30, I can remember Metellus’s being so good and strong in the very last part of his life that he did not feel the want of youth.

1770. Sentences with a subjunctive due to another subjunctive or to an infinitive are put as follows:

1773. The subjunctive is used in indirect questions or exclamations.

1791. Relative constructions often have the appearance of indirect questions, and care must be taken not to confound the two. Thus, ut is a relative in hanc rem, ut factast, ēloquar, Pl. Am. 1129, I’ll tell this thing as it occurred, i.e. not how it occurred. nōstī quae sequontur, TD. 4, 77, you know the things that follow, i.e. not what follows.

1774. The indirect question is one of the commonest of constructions. It depends on verbs or expressions meaning not only ask, but also tell, inform, ascertain, see, hear, know, consider, deliberate, doubt, wonder, fear, &c., &c.

1775. Indirect Yes or No questions are introduced by the same interrogative particles that are used in direct questions (1503). But in indirect questions, num and -ne are used without any essential difference, in the sense of whether, if. nōnne is used thus only by Cicero, and by him only with quaerō: as,

1777. A conditional protasis with , if, to see if, or sī forte, if perchance, sometimes takes the place of an indirect question in expressions or implications of trial, hope, or expectation: as, ībō, vīsam sī domīst, T. Hau. 170, I’ll go and see if he’s at home. Usually with the subjunctive: as, exspectābam, sī quid scrīberēs, Att. 16, 2. 4, I was waiting to see whether you would write anything. circumfunduntur hostēs, sī quem aditum reperīre possent, 6, 37, 4, the enemy came streaming round, to see if they could find any way of getting in.

1778. Indirect alternative questions are introduced like direct questions (1519). But when the second member is negative, it has oftener necne than an nōn: as,

1784. Two alternatives are rarely used without any interrogative particles at all: as, velit nōlit scīre difficile est, QFr. 3, 8, 4, will he nill he, it is hard to know, i.e. whether he will or not. Compare 1518.

1785. Indirect pronoun questions are introduced by the same pronominal words that are used in direct pronoun questions (1526): as,

1786. Questions already in the subjunctive may also become indirect.

1787. In old Latin, the indicative occurs often in connections where the subjunctive would be used in classical Latin: as,

1792. Relative sentences are introduced by relative words, the most important of which is the pronoun quī, who, which, or that. The relative pronoun may be in any case required by the context, and may represent any of the three persons.

1837. A connective quod is often used before , nisi, or etsī, less frequently before quia, quoniam, utinam, quī, &c.

1801. The agreement of the relative has already been spoken of in a general way (1082-1098). For convenience, however, it may be set forth here more explicitly.

1811. When reference is made to the substance of a sentence, the neuter quod is used, or more commonly id quod, either usually in parenthesis: as,

1812. The relative is sometimes equivalent to a conditional protasis. When thus used, it may have either the indicative or the subjunctive, as the sense requires: as,

1830. The indicative, however, is used in quod attinet ad, as to, and usually with quantum, and with forms of sum and possum: as, quod sine molestiā tuā facere poteris, Att. 1, 5, 7, as far as you can without troubling yourself.

1817. (1.) Relative sentences of purpose are equivalent to subjunctive sentences introduced by ut, in order that, to (1947): as,

1818. (2.) Relative sentences of characteristic or result are equivalent to subjunctive sentences introduced by ut, so as to, so that (1947).

1823. The indicative, however, is not infrequently found in affirmative sentences, particularly in old Latin and in poetry: as, sunt quōs sciō esse

amīcōs,

Pl. Tri. 91, some men there are I know to be my friends. interdum volgus rēctum videt, est ubi peccat, H. E. 2, 1, 63, sometimes the world sees right, there be times when it errs. sunt item, quae appellantur alcēs, 6, 27, 1, then again there are what they call elks.

1824. (3.) Relative sentences of cause, reason, proof, or of concession, are equivalent to subjunctive sentences introduced by cum, since, though (1877): as,

1831. Sentences are said to be correlative, when a relative pronoun or adverb has a corresponding determinative or demonstrative pronoun or adverb in the main sentence.

1832. (1.) When two coordinate relative sentences would have the second relative in the same case as the first, the second relative is usually omitted: as,

1834. A sentence consisting of a main and a relative member, may be further modified by a more specific relative sentence: as,

1835. Besides the ordinary use of the relative, to introduce a subordinate sentence, it is often used like hīc, or is, or like et is, is autem, is enim, or is igitur, to append a fresh main sentence or period to the foregoing: as,

1838. The conjunctive particle quod, originally the neuter of the relative pronoun, has both a declarative sense, that, and a causal sense, because. In both senses it regularly introduces the indicative (1721). For special reasons, however, the subjunctive is often used, and particularly in indirect discourse (1722).

2122. In old Latin, quasi is found a few times for the original quam sī after a comparative: as, mē nēmō magis respiciet, quasi abhinc ducentōs annōs fuerim mortuos, Pl. Tru. 340, nobody will pay any more attention to me than if I had been dead two centuries. It is also used (once in classical Latin, CM. 71) in periods of actual comparison, like tamquam (1908), with the indicative: as, senex ille illī dīxit, quasi ego nunc tibi dīcō, Pl. St. 545, that old man said to him, as I now say to you. For its use in figurative comparisons, see 1908, 1944. For tamquam introducing a reason &c., see 1909, a late usage found rarely with quasi and ut.

1855. An untenable reason is introduced in Plautus by nōn eō quia, in Terence by nōn eō quō; in Cicero very rarely by neque or non eō quō, usually by nōn quod or nōn quō; by nōn quia rarely in classical Latin, but commonly from Livy on. The valid reason follows, with sed quod, sed quia, or with sed and a fresh main sentence.

1856. quia, a neuter accusative plural of the relative stem (701) is used in both a declarative and a causal sense, like quod (1838). It is, however, more prevalent in Plautus, less so from Terence on.

1858. Causal quia, with or without a correlative, such as ideō, , proptereā, &c., is common in old Latin (1854) and poetry, unusual in prose (once in Caesar) before Tacitus. For nōn quia, &c., see 1855.

1859. quom or cum (157, 711), used as a relative conjunctive particle (1794), has a temporal meaning, when, which readily passes over to an explanatory or causal meaning, in that, since or although. In both meanings it introduces the indicative in old Latin. In classical Latin, temporal cum in certain connections, and causal cum regularly, introduces the subjunctive. The subjunctive is also used with cum for special reasons, as in the indefinite second person (1731), by attraction (1728), and commonly by late writers to express repeated past action (1730). cum, when, is often used as a synonym of , if, and may then introduce any form of a conditional protasis (2016, 2110).

1881. A protasis with cum is often followed by an emphatic apodosis introduced by tum.

1882. quoniam, compounded of quom and iam, when now, refers primarily to time, but is seldom so used and only by early writers. The temporal meaning passed early into an exclusively causal meaning, since. In both meanings it regularly introduces the indicative (1721). For special reasons, however, the subjunctive is used, as in indirect discourse (1725), or by attraction (1728).

1884. (2.) quoniam, since, seeing that, now that, with the indicative, introduces a reason, usually one known to the person addressed, or one generally known: as,

1885. The relative particle quotiēns (711), or quotiēnscumque, every time that, whenever, introduces the indicative: as,

1887. The subjunctive imperfect and pluperfect are common in the later writers to indicate repeated action (1730): as, quotiēns super tālī negōtiō cōnsultāret, ēditā domūs parte ac lībertī ūnīus cōnscientiā ūtēbātur, Ta. 6, 27, whenever he had recourse to astrologers, it was in the upper part of his house and with the cognizance of only a single freedman.

1888. quam, as or than, introduces an indicative protasis in periods of comparison. For special reasons, however, the subjunctive is used, as by attraction (1728), or of action conceivable (1731); see also 1896, 1897.

1898. When the main clause is an infinitive, quam is often followed by an infinitive: as,

1899.

(1.

) quamquam is used in old Latin as an indefinite adverb, ever so much, however much: as,

1902. For quamquam appending a fresh main sentence, see 2153; for its use with the infinitive, 2317.

1903. quam vīs or quamvīs is used as an indefinite adverb (712), as much as you please, and is often joined with an adjective or other adverb to take the place of a superlative: as,

1907. It may be mentioned here that the indefinite adverb quamlibet, however you please, is used in subjunctive clauses of concession or permission (1904) once or twice by Lucretius, Ovid, and Quintilian. Velleius has it with the participle, a construction sometimes found with quamvīs in late writers.

1908. tamquam, just as, introduces an indicative protasis in periods of comparison.

1910. For tamquam instead of tamquam sī, see 2118; with a participle, 2121.

1911. antequam and priusquam accompany both the indicative and the subjunctive.

1922. It may be mentioned here that postrīdiē quam and prīdiē quam occur a few times in Plautus and Cicero with the indicative; postrīdiē quam with the indicative in Suetonius; and prīdiē quam with the subjunctive in Livy, Valerius Maximus, and Suetonius.

1923. With posteā quam, postquam (posquam), after, the following words may conveniently be treated: ubī̆, ut, when; ubī̆ prīmum, ut prīmum, cum prīmum, when first, and in Plautus quom extemplō; simul atque (or ac, less frequently et or ut, or simul alone), at the same time with, as soon as.

1934. ubī̆ or simul atque, referring to definite time, introduces the future or future perfect, when the apodosis is also future: as,

1935. The relative adverb utī or ut (711) is found in the oldest Latin in the form utei, but ut was the prevalent form even in the time of Plautus. As a conjunctive particle, it accompanies both the indicative and the subjunctive. For ut in wishes, see 1540; in questions, 1568.

1970. The subjunctive is used with ut or ut nōn to denote result.

1971. ubī̆, in the sense of where (709), has the ordinary construction of a relative (1812-1831). For ubī̆, when, see 1923-1926 and 1932-1934; as a synonym of , if, see 2110.

1972. quō, whereby, wherewith, or in old Latin sometimes quī (689), is the instrumental ablative from the relative and interrogative stem qui-. Combined with minus, the less, not, quō gives quōminus.

1976. In old Latin quī, whereby, wherewith, withal, is partly felt as a live relative pronoun in the ablative, and partly as a mere conjunction of purpose; as a pronoun it may even take a preposition; as a conjunction, it may refer to a plural antecedent (689): as, quasi patriciīs puerīs aut monērulae aut anitēs aut cōturnīcēs dantur, quīcum lūsitent: itidem mī haec upupa, quī mē dēlectem datast, Pl. Cap. 1002, as to the sons of gentlemen or daws or ducks or quails are given, wherewith to play; just so to me this crow is given, to entertain myself withal. enim mihi quidem aequomst dari vehicla quī vehar, Pl. Aul. 500, in sooth ‘t were fair that carriages be given me, to ride withal. The indicative occurs where the subjunctive would be used in classical Latin: as, multa concurrunt simul, quī coniectūram hanc faciō, T. Andr. 511, a thousand things combine whereby I come to this conjecture.

1977. The subjunctive with quōminus (1972) is used to complete the sense of verbs of hindering or resisting.

1979. It may be mentioned here that quō sētius with the subjunctive, instead of quōminus, is found twice in Cicero’s earliest extant prose, and twice in older Latin.

1980. quīn is composed of quī, the ablative or locative of the interrogative and relative stem qui- (689), and -ne, not. It is used in simple sentences and as a conjunctive particle.

1990. quīn is used very rarely instead of quōminus to introduce clauses completing the sense of verbs which have no negative expressed or implied: as, once each in the Bellum Alexandrīnum, in Tacitus, and in Seneca’s prose.

1991. With the temporal particles dum, while, until, and dōnec, until (in old Latin dōnicum and in Lucretius dōnique), may be conveniently treated the relative quaad or quoad (that is quā or quō combined with ad), while, until, and the comparative quamdiū, as long as.

2009. Other constructions occur, chiefly in old Latin or poetry, with dōnec, or dōnicum, until. (a.) The future perfect: as, haud dēsinam, dōnec perfēcerō hōc, T. Ph. 419, I shall not stop till I have finished this. dēlīcta maiōrum luēs, dōnec templa refēceris, H. 3, 6, 1, for sins of sires thou shalt atone, till thou hast shrines repaired. (b.) The future: coquitō usque dōnec conmadēbit bene, Cato, RR. 156, 5, boil until it is very soft. ter centum rēgnābitur annōs, dōnec geminam partū dabit Īlia prōlem, V. 1, 272, for thrice a hundred years there will be kings, till Ilia gives birth to twins. (c.) The perfect indicative, less frequently the present, introductory to a general present: impedit piscīs usque adeō, dōnicum ēdūxit forās, Pl. Tru. 38, he always draws his net about the fish, until he’s brought them out (1613). usque mantant neque id faciunt, dōnicum parietēs ruont, Pl. Most. 116, they keep waiting and don’t do it until the walls are falling. (d.) The pluperfect indicative: horriferīs accībant vōcibus Orcum, dōnique eōs vītā prīvārant vermina saeva, Lucr. 5, 996, with horrid cries on Death they’d call till gripings sore had set them free from life. The imperfect indicative is found once in Tacitus, who also has the infinitive of intimation (1539) once or twice. An imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive sometimes occurs where purpose is intimated, and in Livy and late Latin to express repeated past action: as, dōnec ēgregius properāret exsul, H. 3, 5, 45, till he could hasten forth a peerless exile. trepidātiōnis aliquantum ēdēbant, dōnec quiētem ipse timor fēcisset, L. 21, 28, 11, the elephants always displayed some nervousness, till terror itself restored quiet (1730). But the habit of using the imperfect subjunctive is very common in Tacitus where neither purpose nor repetition is intimated: as neque proelium omīsit dōnec caderet, Ta. 3, 20, he ceased not fighting till he fell.

2010. quandō, originally a temporal particle, has the meaning when, which readily passes over to a causal meaning, since, because. In both meanings it introduces the indicative. For special reasons, however, the subjunctive is used, as in indirect discourse (1725) or of action conceivable (1731). quandō is also used to introduce a conditional protasis (2110).

2014. quandōque, inasmuch as, is used a few times in a formal or legal sense in Cicero and Livy: as, quandōque hīsce hominēs iniussū populī Rōmānī Quirītium foedus ictum īrī spopondērunt, L. 9, 10, 9, inasmuch as these persons have promised that a covenant should be made, without the order of the Roman nation of Quirites.

2015. , in early Latin sei, is originally a locative, meaning under those circumstances, so. With the enclitic -ce, it forms sīce or sīc, so. The two are sometimes found as correlatives in colloquial style: as, sīc scrībēs aliquid, sī vacābis, Att. 12, 38, 2, so you shall have time, so you will write something. See 708.

2115. For expressions of trial, hope, or expectation, followed by a conditional protasis with , see 1777.

2116. etsī, tametsī, though, etiamsī, even if, or sometimes simple , if, is used to introduce a concessive protasis. The verb of the protasis is either indicative or subjunctive; but the indicative is the prevailing construction, especially with etsī. The apodosis often has tamen as an adversative correlative, even with tametsī.

2117. following a word meaning than or as is used with the subjunctive in conditional comparisons.

2123. Separate sentences or periods have a connective more commonly in Latin than in English. Sometimes, however, like the members of single periods, they are for special reasons put asyndetically (1637).

2159. A new sentence affirmative of a foregoing is often introduced by an emphatic sīc or ita.

2124. Asyndeton is common with two or more separate sentences or periods:

2127. (c.) When the last sentence sums up the result of the preceding with emphasis: the Asyndeton of Summary: as,

2128. Separate sentences or periods may be connected: (1.) by pronominal words: (a.) demonstrative or determinative; (b.) relative; (2.) by conjunctions and adverbs.

2158. A conclusion is denoted by ergō, itaque or igitur, therefore, so, introducing a new period: as,

2160. The infinitive is in its origin a verbal substantive.

2236. (2.) A looser present infinitive is sometimes used with the above verbs, especially in old Latin, generally without a subject accusative. Thus with iūrō by Cato and Plautus, and with minor, proclaim with threats, by Lucretius. Similarly dare pollicentur, 6, 9, 7, they offer to give. reliquōs dēterrērī spērāns, Caes. C. 3, 8, 3, hoping that the rest were scared. spērō nostram amīcitiam nōn egēre testibus, Fam. 2, 2, I trust our friendship needs no witnesses. As possum has no future infinitive, the present of this verb is necessarily used: as, tōtīus Galliae sēsē potīrī posse spērant, 1, 3, 8, they hope to be able to get the control of the whole of Gaul.

2163. The infinitive has furthermore two other properties of the verb: (a.) it is modified by an adverb, not by an adjective; and (b.) it is followed by the construction of its verb.

2164. The infinitive denotes purpose: (a.) when loosely added to a substantive in old Latin, (b.) with verbs of motion, , veniō, currō, mittō, in old or poetical Latin, and (c.) in the combination dō bibere, give to drink, in old, colloquial, or poetical Latin: as,

2165. In poetry, the infinitive of purpose is used with synonymes of also, and with verbs of leaving, taking away, taking up, &c.

2166. The infinitive is sometimes used with adjectives, chiefly by poets of the Augustan age, and late prose writers, often in imitation of a Greek idiom: as,

2168. The present infinitive is often used to complete the meaning of certain kinds of verbs which imply another action of the same subject: as,

2171. A predicate noun used in the construction of the complementary infinitive, is put in the nominative: as,

2172. A very common form of a dependent sentence is that known as the Accusative with the Infinitive.

2206. In poetry, the infinitive is used as a substantive object with such verbs as , reddō, adimō, perdō: as, hīc verērī perdidit, Pl. B. 158, this youth has lost his sense of shame.

2207. The accusative with the infinitive, or the infinitive alone, present or perfect, may be used as the subject of a verb, in apposition with the subject, or as a predicate nominative: as,

2215. The infinitive, used as a substantive in the nominative or

accusative,

sometimes has a neuter attribute.

2216. The infinitive alone, or the accusative with the infinitive, is sometimes used in exclamations of surprise, incredulity, disapproval, or lamentation: as,

2218. The present infinitive represents action as going on, the perfect as completed, and the future as not yet begun, at the time of the action of the verb to which the infinitive is attached.

2219. In itself, the present infinitive denotes action merely as going on, without any reference to time. With some verbs, however, which look to the future, the present relates to action in the immediate future. With verbs of perceiving, knowing, thinking, and saying, it denotes action as going on at the time of the verb: as,

2222. The present infinitive dependent on a past tense of dēbeō, oportet, possum, often requires the English perfect infinitive in translation: as, quid enim facere poterāmus? Pis. 13, for what else could we have done? See, however, 1495. For the infinitive perfect, see 2230.

2223. (1.) The perfect active infinitive sometimes serves as a complement of dēbeō, volō, possum, &c. (2168): as,

2231. The perfect infinitive of completed action is very common with such expressions as satis est, satis habeō, iuvat, melius est, paenitet, &c., also with verbs of emotion, such as gaudeō, &c.: as, mē quoque iuvat ad fīnem bellī Pūnicī pervēnisse, L. 31, 1, 1, I am delighted myself to have reached the end of the Punic war. Oftentimes, however, in verse, the use of the perfect is partly due to the metre.

2232. The future infinitive is only used as a representative of the indicative, and not as a substantive.

2237. The gerundive is a verbal adjective (899). The gerund is a neuter verbal substantive, used only in the oblique cases of the singular. Both gerundives and gerunds express, in a noun form, the uncompleted action of the verb.

2268. With a comparative expression, the ablative of the gerundive is found once: nūllum officium referendā grātiā magis necessārium est, Off. 1, 47, no obligation is more binding than the returning of a favour. The gerundive construction in the ablative of separation (1302) is found rarely in Livy and Pliny the younger; Livy has also the gerund: as, Verminam absistere sequendō coēgit, L. 29, 33, 8, he forced Vermina to abandon his pursuit.

2242. Gerunds of verbs of transitive use are exceptionally found with a substantive object (2255, 2259, 2265), and regularly with neuter pronouns and neuter plural adjectives to avoid ambiguity (1106). See also 2247.

2243. The nominative of the gerundive construction, as the subject of sum, denotes action which is to be done.

2249. The attributive gerundive (2248), particularly with a negative, in- privative, or vix, may denote possibility, like the verbal in -bilis: as,

2250. (1.) The accusative of the gerundive construction is used with locō and condūcō, with suscipiō, habeō, and cūrō, and with verbs of giving or assigning.

2253. Other prepositions are sometimes used: as, inter, in old Latin, Vergil, Livy, and later writers; ob, once in Ennius, rarely in Cicero and Sallust; in very rarely, but even in Cicero; ante (Vergil, Livy), circā (post-Augustan), propter (Varro, Val. Max.), all rare.

2254. The dative of the gerundive construction is used with adjectives, verbs, and phrases of ability, attention, and adaptation, with titles of office, and with comitia, election.

2257. The dative of the gerund is used chiefly by old and late writers, and is confined in the best prose to a few special phrases.

2258. (1.) The genitive of the gerundive construction or gerund is used with substantives or adjectives.

2264. Tacitus has the genitive of the gerundive construction two or three times with a judicial verb (1280) to denote the charge: as, occupandae rē̆ī pūblicae arguī nōn poterant, Ta. 6, 10, they could not be charged with an attempt on the throne.

2265. In the ablative a transitive gerund with a substantive object is not uncommon.

2269. The supine is a verbal substantive. The form in -um is an accusative. The form in is used sometimes as a dative, sometimes as an ablative.

2277. In Plautus and Cato, the supine in is very rarely used like an ablative of separation (1302): as, nunc opsonātū redeō, Pl. Men. 288, I’m only just back from catering. prīmus cubitū surgat, postrēmus cubitum eat, Cato, RR. 5, 5, let him be first to get up from bed and last to go to bed. Statius imitates this use in Ach. 1, 119.

2270. The supine in -um denotes purpose with verbs of motion (1166): as,

2273. The supine in -um followed by īrī forms the future passive infinitive: as,

2274. The supine in is used with fās, nefās, and adjectives, chiefly of such meaning as easy, good, pleasant, strange, or their opposites.

2278. The participle is a verbal adjective. Like the adjective, it is inflected to agree with its substantive. Like the verb, it may be modified by an adverb, it is active or passive, and it expresses action as continuing, completed, or future. It may also be followed by the same case as its verb.

2279. (1.) The time to which the participle refers is indicated by the verb of the sentence.

2281. For the perfect participle with forms of sum and fuī, see 1608, 1609; for the conative present participle, 2301; reflexive, 1482.

2282. The present or perfect participle is often used as an adjective to express a permanent condition: as,

2286. This use of the participle, though old, is not common before Livy, who, like Tacitus, has it frequently, both with substantives and with prepositions. Very rare in Caesar, rare in Cicero, who, however, uses it both with substantives and with a few prepositions. In old Latin (not in Terence), it is found with the substantives opus and ūsus, in Cato with post, in Varro with propter: as, mī homine conventōst opus, Pl. Cur. 302, I needs must see the man. propter mare congelātum, Varro, RR. 1, 2, 4, by reason of the freezing of the sea water. For the participle alone with ūsus est and opus est, see 1382.

2287. Participles sometimes become substantives, especially the perfect participle: as,

2292. The future participle is very rarely used as a substantive.

2293. The appositive participle is a loose substitute for a subordinate sentence introduced by a relative or by a conjunctive particle.

2296. The participle with a negative may be translated by without: as,

2297. habeō is sometimes used with certain perfect participles to express an action continuing in its consequences, faciō, , and in old Latin reddō and cūrō, with a perfect participle, are emphatic substitutes for the verb to which the participle belongs.

2300. In many cases where in English a verb like wish or try to have a thing done, can, must, or am allowed to, is used, the equivalent Latin verb is omitted. As this use generally extends through the entire system of the verb, examples of the nouns of the verb and of subordinate sentences thus used, are conveniently included here.

2745. (4.) Roman letters are used in the abbreviations of the names of authors, italics in the abbreviations of the names of their works, as in the following List:—

2307. A verb is sometimes used to denote permitted action. This is called the Permissive Use of the verb: as,

2301. A verb is sometimes used to denote action proposed, attempted, or begun, but not necessarily carried out. This is called the Conative Use of the verb: as,

2303. When the conative use is to be expressed more distinctly, a form of volō or cōnor is used, or a frequentative, like vēnditō, try to sell, adventō, strive to come.

2304. A verb is sometimes used to denote not what the subject actually does himself, but what he has another do. This is called the Causative Use of the verb: as,

2305. A verb is sometimes used to indicate action that can be done, and especially action that can be done at any time. This is called the Potential Use of the verb: as,

2306. A verb is sometimes used to denote obligatory action. This is called the Obligatory Use of the verb: as,

2308. The speech or thought of another, quoted in his own words, is called Direct Discourse (1723).

2334. futūrum fuisse ut with the imperfect subjunctive is rarely used in apodoses of the passive voice (2331): as,

2311. The principles which govern the change of direct discourse into indirect discourse have been already set forth in the foregoing pages; but, for the convenience of the learner, they are here put together.

2312. Declarative sentences of direct discourse are put in the accusative with the infinitive, and interrogative and imperative sentences of direct discourse are put in the subjunctive, in indirect discourse.

2320. Sometimes a verb of saying or thinking is added, and is itself irrationally put in the subjunctive. For examples, see 1727.

2321. The tenses of the infinitive follow their usual law (2218), representing the action as present, past, or future, from the speaker’s point of view.

2324. The future of direct discourse is represented in indirect discourse by the imperfect, and the future perfect by the pluperfect subjunctive.

2325. ego and nōs, of direct discourse, are represented by in indirect discourse, and meus and noster by suus. and vōs, of direct discourse, are represented in indirect discourse by ille, or, when less emphatic, by is.

2326. The protasis of every kind (2023, 2024) has the verb in the subjunctive in indirect discourse (2315).

2335. For the use of the nominatives ego tū, nōs vōs, see 1029. The genitive plurals nostrū̆m and vestrū̆m are used as partitive, nostrī and vestrī as objective genitives: as,

2403. nēmō is generally used for nōn quisquam, nēmō umquam for numquam quisquam, nihil for nōn quicquam, and nūllus for nōn ūllus. If only two are spoken of, neuter is used. The plural neutrī is used of two parties.

2336. The reflexive regularly refers to the subject of the verb: as,

2343. The reflexive referring to the main subject is sometimes irregularly used in subordinate indicative clauses.

2344. The place of a reciprocal pronoun, each other, is supplied by inter nōs, inter vōs, inter sē, or by alter or alius followed by another case of the same word: as,

2345. From Livy on, invicem inter sē, invicem sē, or invicem alone, is often used in the expression of reciprocal relations: as,

2346. The possessive of the personal and reflexive pronoun is regularly omitted, unless it is required for emphasis or contrast: as,

2347. hīc points out what is near the speaker in place, time, or thought: as,

2364. (3.) As a provisional subject, to anticipate the real subject, and keep the attention in suspense till the real subject comes with emphasis: as,

2365. is refers to something named in the context. When some feeling is to be expressed, such as admiration, or oftener contempt, homō is often put for is.

2370. is sometimes is loosely used for the reflexive (2341); here the point of view of the writer shows itself.

2371. īdem, the same, often connects two different predicates to the same person or thing. In this case, it may be variously rendered by likewise, also, all the same, on the other hand, at once, very, nevertheless.

2373. The same as is expressed by īdem followed by quī, atque or ac, ut, quasi, cum, sometimes in poetry by the dative.

2374. ipse, self, is used in contrasts.

2384. (6.) Of oneself, voluntarily, of one’s own motion.

2385. uter, whether? which? is used in questions about two things; quis and quī, who? what? in questions about more than two, though sometimes loosely of two things.

2386. quis and quid ask to have a thing named; quī and quod to have it described. But see 685.

2387. The relative pronoun has already been treated; see 1792-1837.

2388. quis or quī, a, some, somebody, always stands after one or more words of the sentence. quis or quī is used after (nisi, sīve), , num, utrum, an, quō, or quandō, in preference to aliquis, unless emphasis is intended.

2404. Numerals are divided into Adjectives: Cardinal, ūnus, one, duo, two, &c.; Ordinal, prīmus, first, secundus, second, &c.; Distributive, singulī, one each, bīnī, two each, &c.; and Numeral Adverbs: semel, once, bis, twice, &c.

2428. Sometimes fractions are expressed by addition: as, dīmidia et quarta, 3/4; pars tertia et septima, 10/21; sometimes by division of the denominator: as, dīmidia quīnta, 1/10.

2405.

2406. Numbers are noted by combinations of the characters I = 1; V = 5; X = 10; ↆ, later , , or L = 50; C = 100; D = 500; ↀ or , post-Augustan M = 1000.

2411. Of the two methods of writing the symbols for 4, 9, 14, 19, &c., the method by subtraction (IV, IX, XIV, XIX, &c.) is rarer, and is characteristic of private, not public inscriptions.

2412. quīnctus, the older form of quīntus (170, 4) is sometimes found in old and even in classical writers. Instead of septimus and decimus, the older septumus and decumus are not uncommon (28).

2418. In numbers from a hundred and one upwards, the larger number comes first, either with or without et; but with distributives et is not used. With cardinals and ordinals the smaller number sometimes comes first with et; as, iīs rēgiīs quadrāgintā annīs et ducentīs praeteritīs, RP. 2, 52, after these two hundred and forty years of monarchy were ended.

2419. Dates are expressed either by cardinals with a plural substantive or by ordinals with a singular substantive: as,

2422. Poets sometimes use the singular of distributives: as, centēnāque arbore flūctum verberat, V. 10, 207, and with a hundred beams at every stroke the wave he smites. duplicī nātūrā et corpore bīnō, Lucr. 5, 879, twynatured and of body twain. The plural is sometimes used in verse for the cardinal: centum bracchia . . . centēnāsque manūs, V. 10, 565, a hundred arms . . . and hundred hands.

2423. Other numerical adjectives are multiplicatives, ending in -plex; they are: simplex, onefold, simple, sēscuplex, one and a half fold, duplex, triplex, quadruplex, quīncuplex, septemplex, decemplex, centuplex; and proportionals, used mostly in the neuter as substantives: duplus, twice as great, triplus, three times as great, quadruplus, septuplus, octuplus. Besides these there are other adjectives derived from numerals: as, prīmānus, soldier of the first: prīmārius, first rate: bīmus, twinter, two-year-old; &c., &c.

2424. One half may be expressed by dīmidium or dīmidia pars; other fractions with 1 as a numerator by ordinals, with or without pars: as, tertia pars or tertia, 1/3.

2429. The length of the vowel in some classes of syllables, as used in the classical period, may be conveniently fixed in the memory by the following rules. For the usage of older writers, see 126, 129, 132 and 2464-2472. For the general principles of length of vowels and syllables, see 33-41; 121-134; 177-178.

2739. Index of Horatian Odes and their Metres.

2472. Iambic shortening took place not only in verse, but also to a considerable extent in common speech, particularly in iambic words (see 130), in which the accent coöperated with the verse-ictus to produce the shortening.

2457. Final os has short o in the nominative of stems in -o-: as, servos, suos, Dēlos; also in compos, impos, and exos; and in the endings of some Greek nouns: as, N. and Ac. epos; G. chlamydos, Erīnyos.

2458. For the general rule of position, see 177, 178; but, except in the thesis of a foot, a final syllable ending with a short vowel generally remains short before a word beginning with two consonants or a double consonant: as, molliă strāta, nemorōsă Zacȳnthos, lūcĕ smaragdī.

2459. A vowel which stands before two consonants, or a double consonant, belonging to the same word, so that its natural quantity cannot be determined from the scansion of the word, is said to possess Hidden Quantity.

2463. In the perfect indicative active, perfect participle passive and kindred formations of verbs in -gō preceded by a short vowel, as agō, regō, the theme syllable shows a long vowel: as, lēxī, rēxī, tēxī; āctus, lēctus; rēctor; āctitō.

2464. For the preservation of a long vowel in certain specific endings in old Latin, see 132.

2469. The first syllable of ille, illic (the pronoun), quippe, immō, inde, unde, nempe, omnis, and perhaps iste, is sometimes shortened.

2470. A long syllable, preceded by a short monosyllable or by a short initial syllable, and immediately preceded or followed by the verse-ictus, may be shortened: as, ét hŭnc, dómŏ mē, ad ŭxṓrem, volŭntā́te.

2473. For hiatus within a word, and the means by which it is avoided, see 114-120.

2510. Synapheia (Greek συνάφεια, a joining together) is the linking together of two verses belonging to the same system. Here elision or word division may occur at the end of the first verse: as,

2480. Vergil sometimes admits hiatus when the final syllable ending in a vowel is preceded or followed (or both) by two short syllables: as, lāmentīs gemitūque et fēmĭnĕō ŭlŭlātū, V. 4, 667.

2481. For elision within a word, see 119.

2492. Elision rarely occurs in the first syllable or last syllable of a verse; but see under Synapheia (2510), and for the elision of the enclitic -que or -ve at the end of a dactylic hexameter, see 2568.

2493. Ecthlipsis (Gr. ἔκθλιψις, a squeezing out). Final m and a preceding short vowel are usually elided before a vowel or h: as,

2496. After a word ending with a vowel, -m, or -us, the verb est often loses its e: as, bonast, bonumst, bonust, vīsust. So, too, es sometimes loses its vowel: as homo’s,

adeptus’

. This usage reflects the actual pronunciation of common speech.

2497. Semi-hiatus or Semi-elision. A long final vowel is sometimes shortened before a vowel. This may occur either in the arsis (2520), or in a resolved thesis: as, án quĭ amant (Verg.); léctulŏ ērudītulī (Cat.); nam quĭ́ aget (Ter.).

2498. Synaloepha (Greek συναλοιφή, a smearing together) is a general term used to denote the means of avoiding hiatus. It includes elision and synizesis, though some grammarians use it in the same sense as synizesis.

2499. Synizesis (Greek συνίζεσις, a settling together). Two vowels (or a vowel and a diphthong) which belong to different syllables sometimes coalesce so as to form one syllable. This is called Synizesis, and is especially common in the early dramatists. Examples are: me͡o, e͡adem, cu͡ius, aure͡i. See 117.

2500. The term Synaeresis (Greek συναίρεσις, a taking together) is sometimes used as a synonym for Synizesis. The ancient grammarians, however, used it in the sense of Contraction (118).

2501. Dialysis (Greek διάλυσις, a breaking up). Conversely, two vowels which usually form a diphthong are sometimes separated so as to form two syllables: as coëpī (Lucr.) for coepī.

2502. The name Diaeresis (Greek διαίρεσις, a separating) is sometimes used as a synonym for Dialysis; but it is better to restrict it to the meaning defined in 2542.

2503. Hardening. A vocalic i or u is sometimes made consonantal before another vowel: as, abi͡ete, ari͡ete (Verg.); cōnsili͡um (Hor.); omni͡a (Lucr.). See 117 and 83.

2504. Softening. Conversely, a consonantal i or u sometimes becomes vocalized before a vowel, thus giving an additional syllable: as, silüae for silvae (Hor.); ēvolüisse for ēvolvisse (Ov.). See 52.

2505. Diastolé (Greek διαστολή, a drawing asunder). A syllable which in verse of the classical period is generally short is sometimes used as long for metrical convenience. The syllable so employed generally falls under the verse-ictus, and in most cases is immediately followed by the principal caesura, or by a pause in the sense. Examples are:

2506. The enclitic -que is sometimes lengthened under the ictus when another -que precedes or follows in the arsis: as, cālōnēs famulīque metallīquḗ caculaeque (Accius).

2507. Systolé (Greek συστολή, a drawing together). Conversely a syllable which in verse is regularly long is sometimes shortened for metrical convenience: as, dedĕrunt (Hor.), nūllĭus (Hor.), imperat. commodă (Cat.).

2508. Syncopé (Greek συγκοπή, a cutting short). A short vowel is often dropped between two consonants: as, surpite for surripite (Hor.), repostum for repositum (Verg.).

2509. Tmesis (Greek τμῆσις, a cutting) is the separation of the parts of a word: as, septem subiecta triōnī = septemtriōnī subiecta (Verg.).

2511. Rhythm (Gr. ῥυθμός, from ῥεῖν, to flow) is the effect of regularity produced by the discrimination of a movement or sound into uniform intervals of time. It is often marked by a stress or ictus recurring at fixed intervals.

2548. Although in all probability the Latin accent was mainly one of stress rather than of pitch, it seems to have been comparatively weak. Hence, when it conflicted with the metrical ictus, it could be the more easily disregarded. But accentual or semi-accentual poetry seems to have existed among the common people even in the Augustan age, and even in classical Latin verse in certain cases (as in the last part of the dactylic hexameter) conflict between ictus and accent was carefully avoided. After the third century A.D. the accent exerted a stronger and stronger influence upon versification, until in the Middle Ages the quantitative Latin verse was quite supplanted by the accentual.

2549. Some of the earliest remains of Latin literature are believed to show a rhythmical structure. These are chiefly prayers, imprecations, sacred songs and the like, couched in a set form of words. Of the rules according to which these carmina were composed, almost nothing is known. According to one theory, they are wholly accentual, and are composed of rhythmical series, each series containing four theses. Frequently an arsis is suppressed, and compensation for the omission is made by dwelling longer upon the thesis. As an example is given the prayer in Cato, Dē Rē Rūsticā, 141:

2550. The Saturnian is the best known and most important of the old Italian rhythms; but its nature long has been, and still is, matter of high dispute. There are two principal theories as to its character, the quantitative and the accentual, each of which is advocated by many distinguished scholars.

2554. The accentual theory was held by the scholiast on V. G. 2, 385, and in modern times has been upheld (in one form or another) by O. Keller, Thurneysen, Westphal, Gleditsch, Lindsay and others. The brief statement given above agrees essentially with that of O. Keller. Gleditsch holds that each half-verse has four accents, as: Dábunt málum Métellī́ ‖ Naéviṓ poḗtaé; Lindsay that the first hemistich has three accents and the second two, as: Dábunt málum Metéllī ‖ Naéviō poḗtae. The whole question is still far from its final settlement.

2555. These are descending rhythms belonging to the Equal Class (see 2527). In them the fundamental foot is the dactyl (–́ ⏑ ⏑), for which its metrical equivalent, the spondee (–́ –), is frequently substituted.

2580. These verses (2578, 2579) are often called Archilochian because they were first used by the Greek poet Archilochus.

2581. These are ascending rhythms (2528) in 3/8 time. The fundamental foot is the Iambus (⏑ –́), for which its metrical equivalent the tribrach ⏑ ⏑́ ⏑, the irrational spondee > –́, the irrational dactyl > ⏑́ ⏑, the cyclic anapaest ⏑ ⏑ –́, or the proceleusmatic ⏑ ⏑ ⏑́ ⏑ is sometimes substituted.

2627. For other iambic verses and combinations of verses, see special editions of the dramatists.

2628. These are descending rhythms in 3/8 time. The fundamental foot is the trochee –́ ⏑, for which its metrical equivalent the tribrach

⏑́ ⏑ ⏑,

the irrational spondee –́ >, the cyclic dactyl –́ ⏑ ⏑, the irrational anapaest ⏑́ ⏑ >, and (rarely) the proceleusmatic ⏑́ ⏑ ⏑ ⏑, are sometimes substituted.

2649. The Trochaic Monometer Acatalectic is sometimes used by Plautus as a clausula (2536) to Cretic tetrameters., It consists of one complete trochaic dipody, e.g. nímis in|epta’ s, R. 681. iū́re in|iūstās, Am. 247. Terence uses the catalectic monometer twice (Eu. 292, Ph. 485) at the beginning of a scene, e.g. Dṓri|ō, Ph. 485. Plautus has a few other trochaic verses and combinations of verses, for which see special editions of his plays.

2650. Logaoedic verse consists of dactyls and trochees combined in the same metrical series. The dactyls are “cyclic” (see 2523), occupying approximately the time of trochees, and hence the verse moves in 3/8 time. Except in the “Lesser Alcaic” verse (2663), only one dactyl may stand in a single series; and a dactyl must not occupy the last place in a line.

2074. The indicative is sometimes used in the apodosis, especially in expressions of ability, duty, &c. (1495); nōn possum is regularly in the indicative when the protasis is also negative. For the future indicative the periphrastic form is sometimes used.

2675. Dactylo-Trochaic verse, like logaoedic, is composed of dactyls and trochees; but whereas in logaoedic verse the dactyls and trochees occur within the same metrical series, in dactylo-trochaic they always form separate series. Hence dactylo-trochaic verses are always composite, consisting of two or more series in combination.

2681. This verse occurs only in the Third Archilochian Strophe (2727) of Horace. The name Elegiambus is given to it as being the reverse of the Iambelegus (see 2679).

2682. In these the fundamental foot is the anapaest ⏑ ⏑ –́, for which its metrical equivalents the spondee —́, dactyl – ⏑́ ⏑ and proceleusmatic ⏑ ⏑ ⏑́ ⏑ are sometimes substituted.

2690. (2.) Other anapaestic verses sometimes occur, especially in the early comedy, but they are rare.

2691. These are rhythms of the Hemiolic class (2527), in 5/8 time. The fundamental foot is the Cretic (–́ ⏑ –̇).

2697. The Cretic trimeter acatalectic sometimes occurs, though rarely: e.g.

2698. These are rhythms of the Hemiolic class (2527), in 5/8 time. The fundamental foot is the Bacchīus (⏑ –́ –̇). Either (or both) of the two longs of a bacchīus is sometimes resolved. For the initial short syllable an irrational long is sometimes substituted. Occasionally two shorts are so substituted, especially in the first foot of a verse.

2706. (3.) Hypermetrical combination of bacchii into a system appears to occur in Varro, Sat. Men. fr. 405 Buech.

2707. In these, the fundamental foot is the choriambus (–́ ⏑ ⏑ –̇). True choriambic verse is very rare in Latin poetry, though apparent choriambi of the form –́ ⏖ | – or –́ ⏖ | ⏗́ are common in logaoedic verse (2652).

2708. In these, the fundamental foot is the Ionic, of which there are two forms, the Ionic ā māiōre –́ –̇ ⏑ ⏑, so called because it begins with the greater part (i.e. the thesis) of the foot, and the Ionic ā minōre ⏑ ⏑ –́ –̇, which receives its name from the fact that it begins with the less important part of the foot (i.e. the arsis).

2717. Horace (3, 12) employs a system of ten pure Ionics ā minōre, e.g.:—

2718. The following is a list of the Horatian lyric metres:—

2737. (XIX.) The Ionic System, a system of ten pure Ionics ā minōre (see 2717):—

2738. Catullus in 34 uses a strophe consisting of three Glyconics (2660) followed by a Pherecratean (2659):—

2740. In Part First, in which authors are occasionally cited, but without direct reference to their works, the usual abbreviations are employed: as Plaut., Ter., Cic., Verg., Hor., &c., &c.

LATIN GRAMMAR

1. Latin Grammar has two parts. I. The first part treats of words: (A.) their sound; (B.) their formation; (C.) their inflection. II. The second part shows how words are joined together in sentences.

PART FIRST ❧ WORDS

PARTS OF SPEECH.

2. The principal kinds of words or Parts of Speech are

Nouns,

Verbs, and Conjunctions.

3. I. Nouns are Substantive or Adjective.

4. (A.) Nouns Substantive, otherwise called Substantives, are divided, as to meaning, into Concrete and Abstract.

5. (1.) Concrete Substantives denote persons or things. Concrete Substantives are subdivided into Proper Names, which denote individual persons or things: as, Cicerō, Cicero; Rōma, Rome; and Common Names, otherwise called Appellatives, which denote one or more of a class: as, homo, man; taurus, bull.

6. Appellatives which denote a collection of single things are called Collectives: as, turba, crowd; exercitus, army. Appellatives which denote stuff, quantity, material, things not counted, but having measure or weight, are called Material Substantives: as, vīnum, wine; ferrum, iron; faba, horsebeans.

7. (2.) Abstract Substantives denote qualities, states, conditions: as, rubor, redness; aequitās, fairness; sōlitūdō, loneliness.

8. (B.) Nouns Adjective, otherwise called Adjectives, attached to substantives, describe persons or things: as, ruber, red; aequus, fair; sōlus, alone.

9. Pronouns are words of universal application which serve as substitutes for nouns.

Thus, taurus, bull, names, and ruber, red, describes, particular things; but ego, I, is universally applicable to any speaker, and meus, mine, to anything belonging to any speaker.

10. Adverbs are mostly cases of nouns used to denote manner, place, time or degree: as, subitō, suddenly; forās, out of doors; diū, long; valdē, mightily, very.

11. Prepositions are adverbs which are used to modify as prefixes the meaning of verbs, or to define more nicely the meaning of cases: as, vocō, I call, ēvocō, I call out; ex urbe, from town.

12. II. Verbs are words which denote action, including existence or condition: as, regit, he guides; est, he is; latet, he is hid.

13. III. Conjunctions connect sentences, nouns, or verbs: as, et, and; sed, but.

14. Interjections are cries which express feeling, and are not usually a part of the sentence: as, ā, ah; heu, alas.

15. There is no Article in Latin: thus, mēnsa may denote table, a table, or the table.

A. SOUND.

ALPHABET.

16. In Cicero’s time, the sounds of the Latin language were denoted by twenty-one letters (DN. 2, 93).

Character

Name

pronounced

A

a

ah

B

be

bay

C

ce

kay

D

de

day

E

e

eh

F

ef

ef

G

ge

gay

H

ha

hah

I

i

ee

K

ka

kah

L

el

el

M

em

em

N

en

en

O

o

o

P

pe

pay

Q

qu

koo

R

er

air

S

es

ess

T

te

tay

V

u

oo

X

ix

eex

The names given above are those employed by Roman grammarians. The sound indicated by -ay is only approximate; the true sound is that of the French ê in fête; see 39. The names of the letters are indeclinable; for their gender, see 412.

17. Two other letters were also in use to represent Greek sounds in Greek words; these were always called by their Greek names, and were placed at the end of the alphabet; they are Y, named ü (42), and Z, named zēta (71).

18. Origin of the Alphabet. The Latin alphabet, which originally consisted of capitals only, was adapted from the alphabet of Chalcidian colonies in Italy.

19. Spelling. The signs for the Greek sounds denoted by φ and χ, and perhaps also that for θ, these three sounds being unknown in Latin, were used as numerals (2407). In words borrowed from the Greek the Romans at first represented θ by t, φ by p, and χ by c: as, tūs, incense, for θύος; Poenī, Punians, for Φοίνικες; calx, chalk, for χάλιξ. Occasionally also the Latin mute was doubled: as, struppus, strap, for στρόφος. Later, about the middle of the second century B.C., th, ph, and ch begin to be used: as, cothurnus, boot, for κόθορνος; amphora, jar, for ἀμφόρα; Achaea for Ἀχαιά. In some instances these aspirates were next introduced even into words purely Latin: as, chommodus, affable, for commodus, an affectation ridiculed by Catullus (Cat. 84) and disapproved by Quintilian (1, 5, 20). But pulcher, pretty, is the usual spelling for pulcer (formed by the suffix -cro- from the stem of the verb poliō, I polish). Even Cicero (O. 160) aspirated the c in this word as a concession to popular usage, as he did the t in Cethēgus, Karthāgō, and the p in triumphus, while he retained the unaspirated explosive in the proper names Orcīvius, name of a ‘gens,’ Matō, Otō, Caepiō, and in sepulcrum, tomb; corōna, crown; and lacrima, tear. In a similar manner Greek ρ was at first transcribed by r: as, rumpia, a kind of weapon, for ῥομφαία; but later by rh: as, rhētor, rhetorician, for ῥητωρ.

20. The letters C (first written <) and K were at an early period used promiscuously, and C stood for both unvoiced k and voiced g: as, VIRCO, virgō, virgin. Afterwards K dropped out of general use except in the abbreviations K. or Kal. for kalendae, first of the month, and K. for the proper name Kaesō (Quint. 1, 7, 10). About 300 B.C. the sign < or C was used for the unvoiced k alone, while a separate sign, which became G, was set apart for the voiced g. But C continued to be used for g in the abbreviations C for Gāius, for Gāia, and Cn. for Gnaeus. Occasionally q is written for c, almost always before the vowels o and u: as, qum for cum, with; qolunt for colunt, they cultivate; peqūnia, money. But ordinarily q is found before unsyllabic (consonantal) u (v) only (22).

21. Before the introduction of Y and Z (17), u was used for the Greek υ: as, Burrus, later Pyrrhus (Cic. O. 160); and s, or, as a medial, ss, for ζ: as, sōna, belt, later zōna; massa, lump, for μᾶζα; malacissō, I soften, for μαλακίζω. By a blunder, y was occasionally introduced in words of Latin origin: as, lacryma, tear, for lacrima, which was wrongly supposed to be derived from Greek δάκρυ.

22. The characters I and V represent not only the two vowels i and u, but also their cognate semivowels (52) and (83), called commonly consonant i and u, but with less ambiguity unsyllabic i and u (8283). They are equivalent to the English y and w respectively.

23. In words like maior, simple i was commonly written for the sound of i̭i̭ (153, 2; 8283). But Cicero in such cases wrote ii: as, aiiō, I say, Maiia, Troiia (Quint. 1, 4, 11). In the same way Lucretius spelled Graiiugenārum, of Greek-born men, and EIIVS, of him, CVIIVS, whose, occur in inscriptions. Sometimes the same sound is represented by a taller letter, ‘i longa,’ especially in the imperial age: as, maIor, greater. There are also cases in which the two designations were confounded, a double i being written, and one or the other letter made taller: as, eiIvs or eIivs, of him.

24. The tall i, I longa, was used not only to represent unsyllabic i (22), but, beginning with Sulla’s time, also for long vowel i (29, 2, b): as, sIgna, signs; qvInqve, five. It also represents sometimes double i: as, vIs for viīs, in the roads. At the beginning of words it occurs without reference to quantity for both short and long i, and, by mistake, I is elsewhere found for short i.

25. The emperor Claudius (A.D. 41-54) introduced a separate sign for unsyllabic u (22), restricting the sign v to the vowel u (Quint. 1, 7, 26; Ta. 11, 14); but it did not become current.

26. In schoolbooks and most texts of the authors, the vowel u is printed U, u, and the consonant V, v. A character, J, j, was introduced in the 17th century, to indicate the consonant i. But this character is no longer usual in editions of the authors or in schoolbooks.

27. The distinction between u and v is not always made very consistently: q has regularly, and g and s have sometimes, an aftersound of w, best represented by v; but the usual practice is to write u, as in the following disyllables: quōrum, of whom; anguis, snake; suāvis, sweet. qu is always counted as a single sound (177). See also 2504.

28. For the intermediate sound (103) between i and u, as in the first syllable of lubet, libet, it pleases, and in the second syllable of optimus, optumus, best (Quint. 1, 4, 8; 7, 21), the emperor Claudius invented a separate character. It failed of acceptance, as did also the sign which he attempted to introduce for ps.

29. The same characters were ordinarily used to denote both long and short vowels. But at different periods long vowels were sometimes indicated in inscriptions thus:

(1.) Long a, e, or u was sometimes doubled: as, AARA, altar; PAASTORES, shepherds; LEEGE, by law; IVVS, right. This doubling, which was never frequent, seems to have been introduced into Latin from the Oscan by the poet Accius. It occurs most frequently in inscriptions about the year 150 B.C., but sporadically much later: as, CONVENTVVS, of the assembly; ARBITRATVV, by the decree; and in other stems in -u- (593).

(2.) Long i was often denoted (a.) By the spelling ei (after the pronunciation of this diphthong had been changed to ī98): as, DAREI, be given; REDIEIT, hath come back; INTERIEISTI, hast died. Some Roman grammarians prescribed this spelling for every long i; others tried to regulate the use of ei for ī by special rules. At the end of the republic, the spelling EI had given way to uniform I. (b.) Since the time of Sulla, by a taller letter (‘i longa’): as, fIxa, fastened (23, 24).

(3.) A mark called an apex (

) was often put over a long vowel: as, FE͆CIT, made; HORTE͆NSIVS; DVV͆MVIRATVS, duumvirate. The apex was written ´ in the imperial age; the form -, which occurs in an inscription, was adopted by the grammarians, and is still in use to mark the long vowels. It may be mentioned that inscriptions which employ the apex are by no means consistent in its use, and that late inscriptions have it over short and long vowels, apparently for decorative purposes. Quintilian 1, 7, 2 prescribes it only for cases which otherwise might be ambiguous: as, MÁLVS (mālus), mast, to distinguish it from MALVS (malus), bad.

30. In schoolbooks, a long vowel is indicated by a horizontal line over it: as, āra, altar; mēnsis, month; ōrdō, series. A short vowel is sometimes indicated by a curved mark: as, pĕr, through; dŭx, leader; but this mark is unnecessary if long vowels are systematically marked. Usually the quantity of the vowels in each word is definitely fixed; but in a few cases the same vowel may be now short, now long, as in English the ee of been is pronounced long by some (bean), short by others (bin). Thus (2446) mihi, ibi were sometimes pyrrhics (⏖, 2522), sometimes iambi (⏑-, 2521). See for other cases 134, 2443, 2452, 2453. Such vowels of variable quantity are termed common and marked ⏓ or ⏒: as mihī̆, to me (2514).

PRONUNCIATION.

31. The pronunciation of Latin sounds may be approximately determined: (a) from the description of the native grammarians and incidental allusions in other Latin authors; (b) from variations in spelling; (c) from the Greek transliteration of Latin words; (d) from the Latin transliteration of foreign words; (e) from the development of the sounds in languages derived from the Latin.

VOWELS.

32. Vowels are sounds which are produced by the vibrations of the vocal chords (this may be easily felt by placing a finger on the throat at the Adam’s apple) and without any audible friction or any obstruction anywhere in the passage above the vocal chords. The difference in the sound of the vowels is due to the different shape which the position of the tongue and the lips gives in each case to the cavity of the mouth. During the pronunciation of pure vowels no air escapes through the nose.

33. The simple vowels, a, e, i, o, u (y), are either long or short. The sound of a long vowel is considered to be twice the length of that of a short.

34. That a long vowel is equal to two shorts is a rule of metrical theory (see 2515). In actual pronunciation, there were undoubtedly various degrees of length, as in English: e.g., sea, seize (long), cease (half-long).

QUANTITY OF VOWELS.

The quantity of vowels must in general be learned by observation; but some convenient helps for the memory may be found in 2429; and the quantity of many vowels may be ascertained by the general principles given in 35 and 36. Except in the case of Hidden Quantity (2459), the quantity of vowels is in general ascertained from verse. But some information may also be gleaned from such rhetorical prose as exhibits well defined habits in the rhythmical endings selected for sentences (clausulae, Cic. O. 191-226).

(A.) SHORT VOWELS.

35. A vowel is short:

(1.) Before another vowel or h (124): as, eōs, ēvehō; compare taceō with tacēre. For exceptions in classical Latin, see 127; for exceptions in early Latin see 126.

(2.) Before nt and nd (128) if not the result of contraction: as, calendae, centum; compare amant, amandus, with amāre.

(3.) Before final t and m, and, in words of more than one syllable, before final r and l (132): compare amat, amem, with amās and amēs.

(B.) LONG VOWELS.

36. All vowels are long which are:

(1) Weakened from a diphthong (96-101; 108), or which are the result of contraction (118): as, concīdō from caedō; cōgō from co-agō.

(2) Lengthened by compensation (121): as, quīnī for *quincnī.

(3) Before nf, ns, often before nc followed by a consonant, and, in some cases, before gn (122).

PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS.

37. The following English sounds come nearest to the Latin pronunciation of the vowels:

38. Long vowels. ā had the sound of a in father; ē that of a in fate (but see 39); ī that of i in machine; ō that of o in tone; ū that of u in rule.

39. It must be noted, however, that all English long vowels, save a as in father, are more or less diphthongal, that is, they become gradually closer (46); a in fate ends in a vanishing sound of ee (not heard in the ê of French fête), and o in no ends in the sound of oo. Similarly the long e sound in he becomes closer and ends in a sound similar to the y in year. In Latin all long vowels had one sustained sound.

40. Short vowels. a sounded approximately like the English a in the first syllable of aha; e, i, o, and u sounded like e in step, i in pit, o in obey, and u in pull respectively.

41. Latin short a did not differ, except in quantity, from long ā; it never had the ‘flat’ sound of English a in pat. In the case of the other vowels, i, e, o, and u, the long vowels were closer (46) than the short ones. This is the same difference which the English shows in keen (long and close) and kin (short and open); pool (long and close) and pull (short and open). For this reason, open i is sometimes represented by e in inscriptions: as, ANEMA for anima, soul; and vea was the rustic pronunciation for via, road (Varro, R. R. 1, 2, 14).

42. Y, which was a sound borrowed from the Greek (17), sounded like German ü. The sound, which is missing in English, is formed with the tongue in position for i (in kin) and the lips rounded as for oo (in moon).

CLASSIFICATION OF VOWELS.

43. Vowels are divided according to the position of the tongue. Latin i and e are called front vowels, because the front part of the tongue is elevated. This elevation is greater for i than for e. Latin o and u are called back vowels, because they require an elevation of the rear part of the tongue. This elevation is greater for u than for o. Latin a holds an intermediate position, no part of the tongue being raised, while the front part is depressed.

44. In the formation of i and e, the tongue approaches the hard palate; hence these two vowels are also called palatal vowels. Similarly, o and u are called velar or guttural vowels, because in their formation the tongue approaches the soft palate (vēlum palātī).

45. o and u require a rounding of the lips (labia); hence they are called labial vowels. The same is true for y.

46. Comparing the vowels in English keen and kin, it will be noted that the passage between the tongue and the hard palate is narrower in the former than in the latter case. The ee in keen is therefore said to be a narrow or close vowel, while the i in kin is wide or open. See 41.

DIPHTHONGS.

47. Two unlike (43-46) vowels pronounced under one stress and as one syllable form a Diphthong. All diphthongs are long.

In all diphthongs the transition from one vowel to the other is gradual. A diphthong is, therefore, not formed simply by pronouncing two vowels in succession, but the vocal organs pass through all the intermediate positions and consequently the sound is constantly changing.

48. In their origin diphthongs are of two kinds: (a.) primitive diphthongs: as in foedus, treaty; aurum, gold; or (b.) secondary diphthongs, the result of vowels meeting in formation, composition, or inflection: see 120.

49. The diphthongs which occur in classical Latin are au, ae, oe, and the rare ui and eu.

au sounded like ou in house. ae had the sound of short Latin a rapidly combined with the sound of e in English men. But it is the common practice now to give to ae the sound of ay or ai in ay, aisle, although the difference between Latin ae and the earlier ai from which it descended is thus obliterated. oe had the sound of short Latin o rapidly followed by the sound of e in English men. But it is now customary not to distinguish between Latin oe and oi, and to give to both the sound of oi in boil. ui is pronounced by combining Latin short u and i (40, 41) with the stress on the i like French oui; eu by combining Latin short e and u with stress on the u.

50. Besides these, the following diphthongs occur in the older inscriptions: ai pronounced as ai in aisle; ei as ei in eight; oi as oi in boil; and ou which sounded very much like the final o in no, go, which is really a diphthong (see 39).

CONSONANTS.

51. Consonants are formed by stopping the breath somewhere in the cavity of the mouth or by squeezing it through a narrow channel or aperture.

52. Semivowels. There is no sharp line of demarcation between consonants and vowels. Some vowels in unsyllabic function (8283) notably i () and u () (corresponding to English y and w), though usually classed as consonants, are so closely related to the vowels that they are termed semivowels (2504). To these may be added also the liquids l and r. Contact of the semivowels i and u with their corresponding vowels i and u is avoided in classical times. See for -vu- 107, c; for -quu- 157; and for -i̭i- 104, c (on obi̭iciō); 458 (Bōī for *Bōi̭ī). See 153, 3.

PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS.

53. Most of the consonants are pronounced as in English. The following points must be noticed:

54. b before a surd, as s or t, has the sound of p. The spelling b is here simply etymological: as, abs, pronounced aps (the b retained in spelling because of ab); urbs, pronounced urps (the b retained because of the oblique cases urbis, urbī, etc.); obterō, pronounced opterō (Quint. 1, 7, 7), where the spelling of the preposition ob was kept (164).

55. c has always the sound of English k.

56. d before the surd s is pronounced t; the spelling d is preserved for etymological reasons only: as, adsum, pronounced atsum.

57. g always has the sound of English g in go, never that of g in gentle. gu, when it makes one syllable with the following vowel, is pronounced like English gw: as, sanguine like sanguine.

58. h has a weak sound as h in British English (Southern), and by some was not counted as a consonant. Consequently the same uncertainty existed as to initial h. The omission of initial h is recognized in classical Latin for ānser (originally *hānser). Elsewhere the omission of initial h in spelling, as ostia for hostia, is rare until the third century A.D.

Very rarely h is written between two vowels to denote that each should be pronounced separately (like our diaeresis in coëxtensive): as, ahēneus, bronze, with separate (116 a); but aes, bronze, with diphthongal ae.

59. Unsyllabic (22) or consonant i has the sound of English y in year.

60. There were two varieties of l. One was like the English l, guttural in character, because in its pronunciation not only the blade (front part) of the tongue touched the gums, but in addition to this the rear part of the tongue was elevated toward the soft palate. The other l was purely dental, and formed without such back elevation. This second variety appeared in the combination ll, or whenever l was followed by the front vowels (43) e or i, or when it was final. Elsewhere l was guttural.

61. From the earliest times final m in unaccented syllables had a faint sound or was even inaudible (Quint. 9, 4, 39). Consequently it is often omitted in writing in the older inscriptions both before an initial vowel or consonant: as, POCOLO for pōcolom; OINO for oinom (ūnum), and the grammarian Verrius Flaccus proposed to write only half an M for final m before a vowel. In prosody, therefore, final m did not prevent elision (2493). The same is seen in prose in cases like animadvertō, I pay heed to, from animum advertō, I turn my mind toward (395); vēnīre, to be sold for vēnum īre, to go to sale (1165). But in monosyllables where m closes the accented syllable, it did not vanish (2494, 2495), and this difference in the treatment of final m is reflected in the Romance languages.

62. n stands for two sounds. It represents the dental nasal, as n in English now. But before the gutturals k, c, g, q, and the compound x (= cs), it represents the guttural nasal which is written ng in English sing, wrong. This second n is sometimes called n adulterīnum or ‘spurious n,’ thus: nc (in avunculus) as in uncle; ng (in angulus) as in angle; ngu (in sanguine) as in sanguine; nqu (in inquit) as inkw in inkwiper; nx (in pīnxit) as in lynx.

63. Dental n before s had a reduced sound, and is therefore sometimes omitted in writing: as, CESOR for cēnsor; COSOL for cōnsul, in older inscriptions; and fōrmōsus by the side of fōrmōnsus; vīcēsimus by the side of vīcēnsimus, Cicero omitted the n in the adjective suffix -ēnsis: as, forēsia, of the forum; hortēsia, garden plants.

64. q, in classical Latin, appears only in the combination qu, sounded like English qu or kw (27). r was trilled.

65. s, in classical Latin was always unvoiced (surd, 75) like English s in so, sin, never voiced (sonant, 75) as English s in ease. su, when it makes one syllable with the following vowel, is like sw in sweet (27).

66. In old Latin, final s after a short vowel and before a consonant seems to have been reduced in sound or to have disappeared altogether. In the older inscriptions it is often omitted in the ending of the nominative singular -us, and in the pre-Ciceronian poets final s often does not make position (2468). But such omission was considered vulgar in Cicero’s time (Cic. O. 161; Quint. 9, 4, 38).

67. In the archaic period Latin s stood also for the voiced sibilant (English s in ease, z in zeal), as in ASA, altar (154).

68. t is always sounded as in time, never as in nation. The pronunciation of ci and ti with the c and t as sibilants (as in English cinder, nation) is very late.

69. v is like the English w.

70. x is a compound consonant, standing for cs, and so sounded, never as English gs or gz.

71. z, being a Greek sound, should have retained its Greek pronunciation. This differed in the different dialects; in the Attic of the fourth century B.C. it was approximately that of English z in zeal, while its earlier value was zd. The Romans had great difficulty in pronouncing this sound (Quint. 12, 10, 27 f.), but the grammarian Velius Longus expressly states that it should not be pronounced as a compound sound (zd).

72. About 100 B.C. the combinations ch, ph, and th were introduced in Greek words to represent χ, φ, and θ; as Philippus, for the older PILIPVS. Somewhat later these combinations were in general use in some Latin words (19). ch is thought to have been pronounced like kh in blockhead, ph as in uphill, and th as in hothouse. But in practice ch is usually sounded as in the German machen or ich, ph as in graphic, and th as in pathos.

CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS.

73. Explosives. Consonants which are formed by stopping the breath in the oral cavity and then suddenly removing the obstruction are called explosives. They cannot be prolonged in sound. They are: c, k, q, g; t, d; p, b. These are often called mutes.

74. Continuants. Consonants which may be prolonged in sound are called continuants. They are: unsyllabic (83) i (59) and u (66); l (60), r; l, s, f; n (62), m.

75. Voiced and Unvoiced. If during the emission of breath the vocal chords vibrate (32), the consonant is said to be voiced or sonant: g; d; b; n (62), m; l (60), r; unsyllabic (83) i (59) and u (69); otherwise it is said to be unvoiced or surd: c, k, q; t; p; h, s, f.

76. Nasals. In the majority of consonants, the breath escapes through the cavity of the mouth, and the cavity of the nose is closed in the rear by means of the raised soft palate. Those consonants in which the breath escapes through the nose, while the oral cavity is closed, are called nasals: as, n, m, n adulterīnum (see 62).

77. Classification according to place of

formation.

Consonants are further divided according to the place where the breath is stopped or squeezed. (1.) If the breath is stopped by the lips, as in p, b, m, or squeezed through the lips, as in v (English w), we speak of labials. (2.) If the breath is forced through an opening between the upper teeth and the lower lip, as in f, we speak of a labiodental. (3.) Sounds which are produced by the point of the tongue touching the upper gums and teeth, as t, d, n, r, or by the formation of a narrow median channel in the same place, like s, or of a lateral channel, like l (60), are called dentals. (4.) Palatals are formed by an elevation of the front part of the tongue against the forward section of the palate, like i consonant (English y). (

5.

) If the back of the tongue touches or approaches the rear part of the palate as in k, q, c, g, n adulterīnum (English ng in sing), and l (60), we speak of gutturals (velars); see 44.

78. Spirants. Sounds which are produced by friction of the breath are called spirants: as, s, f, and h.

79. Sibilants. On account of its hissing sound, s is called a sibilant. English s, z, th are sibilants.

80. Doubling of Consonants. In English, double consonants as the tt, nn, pp, mm in motto, Anna, tapping, grammar, are sounded exactly like the corresponding single consonants in cot, pan, tap, ram. In Latin, on the other hand, double consonants (geminātae) were pronounced as they are in modern Italian. In the case of explosives (73), as in mitto, after the tongue had come in contact with the roof of the mouth (= first t) a short pause ensued before the explosion took place (= second t). In the case of continuants (74), as in summus, Apollo, the mm or ll was sounded appreciably longer than a single m or l, and at the beginning of the second half of the long continuant there was a slight increase of force.

81. Consonants were not doubled in writing till after 200 B.C.: as, FVISE for fuisse, to have been, and for more than a century afterward the usage is variable: as, in the same inscription, ESSENT, they might be, by the side of SVPERASES, thou mayest have conquered; but it must not be inferred that they were pronounced as single consonants.

SYLLABIC AND UNSYLLABIC FUNCTION.

82. Whenever two or more sounds are combined in a syllable, one of them excels in acoustic prominence: as, a in English pat; n in the group pnd in opnd (opened); l in the group tld in bottld (bottled); and s in the group pst. This sound is said to have syllabic function or to be syllabic; in the examples given, a, n, l, and s are respectively syllabic. All the other members of each group are termed unsyllabic.

83. Vowels are almost always used in syllabic function. When, in rare cases, they are unsyllabic, this fact is usually indicated in phonetic works by an inverted half-circle, ̭, placed under the vowel; so in the case of diphthongs to indicate the subordinate member: as ai̭, oḙ, ṷi (49). Latin omnia and English glorious, when pronounced as words of two syllables, would be written omni̭a (2503), glori̭ous. When sounds other than vowels have, in rare cases, syllabic function, this fact is noted in phonetic works by a point, . , or circle, ˳ , under the letter: as, Latin *agṛs, *agr̥s (111, b), English opṇd, opn̥d.

ACCENT.

84. The relative force with which the different syllables of a word are uttered varies. Such variation in emphasis is called stress accentuation.

LATIN GRAMMAR

PARTS OF SPEECH.

ALPHABET.

39. It must be noted, however, that all English long vowels, save a as in father, are more or less diphthongal, that is, they become gradually closer (46); a in fate ends in a vanishing sound of ee (not heard in the ê of French fête), and o in no ends in the sound of oo. Similarly the long e sound in he becomes closer and ends in a sound similar to the y in year. In Latin all long vowels had one sustained sound.

412. Infinitives, words and expressions quoted or explained, and letters of the alphabet, are neuter: as,

42. Y, which was a sound borrowed from the Greek (17), sounded like German ü. The sound, which is missing in English, is formed with the tongue in position for i (in kin) and the lips rounded as for oo (in moon).

71. z, being a Greek sound, should have retained its Greek pronunciation. This differed in the different dialects; in the Attic of the fourth century B.C. it was approximately that of English z in zeal, while its earlier value was zd. The Romans had great difficulty in pronouncing this sound (Quint. 12, 10, 27 f.), but the grammarian Velius Longus expressly states that it should not be pronounced as a compound sound (zd).

2407. Of these signs, V seems to be the half of X, which may be Etruscan in origin. The original signs for 50 and 1000 were taken from the Chalcidian Greek alphabet (18, 19), in which they represented sounds unknown to early Latin. Thus, ↆ, in the Chalcidian alphabet representing ch (49), was used by the early Romans for 50, and became successively , , and L. The form ↆ, is found very rarely,

oftener, in the Augustan period;

is common during the last century of the republic and in the early empire; L, due to assimilation with the Roman letter, appears in the last century of the republic. The sign for 1000 was originally ↀ (Chalcidian ph); it became

(the common classical form), , or ; the form M as a numeral appears in the second century A.D., although M is found much earlier as an abbreviation for mīllia in M · P, that is mīllia passuum. For 100, the sign

(Chalcidian th) may have been used originally; but C (the abbreviation for centum) came into use at an early period. The sign D, = 500, is the half of ↀ.

22. The characters I and V represent not only the two vowels i and u, but also their cognate semivowels (52) and (83), called commonly consonant i and u, but with less ambiguity unsyllabic i and u (82; 83). They are equivalent to the English y and w respectively.

52. Semivowels. There is no sharp line of demarcation between consonants and vowels. Some vowels in unsyllabic function (82, 83) notably i () and u () (corresponding to English y and w), though usually classed as consonants, are so closely related to the vowels that they are termed semivowels (2504). To these may be added also the liquids l and r. Contact of the semivowels i and u with their corresponding vowels i and u is avoided in classical times. See for -vu- 107, c; for -quu- 157; and for -i̭i- 104, c (on obi̭iciō); 458 (Bōī for *Bōi̭ī). See 153, 3.

83. Vowels are almost always used in syllabic function. When, in rare cases, they are unsyllabic, this fact is usually indicated in phonetic works by an inverted half-circle, ̭, placed under the vowel; so in the case of diphthongs to indicate the subordinate member: as ai̭, oḙ, ṷi (49). Latin omnia and English glorious, when pronounced as words of two syllables, would be written omni̭a (2503), glori̭ous. When sounds other than vowels have, in rare cases, syllabic function, this fact is noted in phonetic works by a point, . , or circle, ˳ , under the letter: as, Latin *agṛs, *agr̥s (111, b), English opṇd, opn̥d.

82. Whenever two or more sounds are combined in a syllable, one of them excels in acoustic prominence: as, a in English pat; n in the group pnd in opnd (opened); l in the group tld in bottld (bottled); and s in the group pst. This sound is said to have syllabic function or to be syllabic; in the examples given, a, n, l, and s are respectively syllabic. All the other members of each group are termed unsyllabic.

177. A syllable is long if its vowel is long, or if its vowel is followed by two consonants or by x or z: as,

2504. Softening. Conversely, a consonantal i or u sometimes becomes vocalized before a vowel, thus giving an additional syllable: as, silüae for silvae (Hor.); ēvolüisse for ēvolvisse (Ov.). See 52.

103. (a.) Atonic medial e before a single consonant was weakened (with the exceptions given under b.) to i: as, cólligō, collect, from legō; óbsideō, besiege, from sedeō; cértāminis, of the contest, from certāmen (224); flāminis, from flāmen (470). And so probably hic (664) arose from *hec or *hoc (105, g) when used as proclitic (92). Before the labials p, b, f, and m this weakened sound was intermediate between i and u (28), and both spellings occur: as, quadripēs and quadrupēs, four-footed; alimentum, nourishment; monumentum, monument. The choice of i or u was probably governed by the quality of the stressed vowel in the preceding syllable: viz., u after o and u, and i after a, e, and i. But such distinction is only imperfectly maintained in classical Latin.

593. Other case forms are found in inscriptions, as follows:

98. Change of ei. ei as a genuine diphthong is common in old inscriptions: as, SEI; SEIVE; ADEITVR; DEIXERVNT; FEIDA. In classical Latin it has passed into ī: thus, , if; sīve, either; adītur, is approached; dīxērunt, they said; fīda, faithful. An intermediate stage between the old diphthong ei and the classical ī was a very close (46) ē: as, PLOIRVME (465) for plūrimī; IOVRE (501, 507) for iūrī. For the orthographical use of ei as a spelling for the long ī-sound, see 29.

2446. (b.) Final i is common in mihī̆, tibī̆, sibī̆; ibī̆, ubī̆ (129, 2).

2522. Other feet mentioned by the ancient grammarians are:—

2521. The feet in common use are the following:—

134. (1.) In some foreign proper names and in a very few Latin words the quantity of a vowel varied. Vergil has Sȳchaeus and Sychaeus within six verses; also Āsia and Asia, Lavīnium and Lāvīnius; so also glōmus (Lucr.), glomus (

Hor.

); cōturnīx (Plaut., Lucr.), coturnīx (Ov.).

2443. (b.) Before Ovid, o of the present indicative is regularly long. It is shortened only in the following words (130, 3): in

2452. (a.) Final is has ī in all plural cases: as,

2453. (b.) Final is has ī in the second person singular of verbs in -īre, in māvīs, in compounds of sīs, and in all present subjunctives singular: as, duīs, edīs, velīs, mālīs, nōlīs. For -rī̆s of the perfect subjunctive and the future perfect, see 877, 878, 883, 884.

2514. Signs of Quantity. A long syllable is indicated by –, a short one by ⏑. A syllable which varies in quantity, being sometimes long, sometimes short, is indicated by ⏓ or ⏒.

PRONUNCIATION.

VOWELS.

2515. The Unit of Measure is the duration of a short syllable and is called a Time, Tempus, or Mora. The mora did not have an absolute length, but varied with the nature of the rhythm. For greater convenience, however, it is assumed that its length was uniform, and equalled that of an eighth note ♪ A long syllable, being equal to two shorts, has a length of two morae, which is assumed to be the same as that of our quarter-note ♩ Hence in notation ⏑ = ♪ and – = ♩

2429. The length of the vowel in some classes of syllables, as used in the classical period, may be conveniently fixed in the memory by the following rules. For the usage of older writers, see 126, 129, 132 and 2464-2472. For the general principles of length of vowels and syllables, see 33-41; 121-134; 177-178.

35. A vowel is short:

36. All vowels are long which are:

2459. A vowel which stands before two consonants, or a double consonant, belonging to the same word, so that its natural quantity cannot be determined from the scansion of the word, is said to possess Hidden Quantity.

(A.) SHORT VOWELS.

124. A vowel originally long is regularly shortened in classical Latin before another vowel, even though an h intervene: as,

127. But even in classical Latin there are cases where a vowel before another vowel remains long: thus,

126. An increased tendency to shorten a long vowel before another vowel can be traced in the history of the language: thus, classical fuī, I was, for Plautus’s fūī (750); clueō, I am called, for Plautus’s clūeō; perfect pluit, it rained, for Varro’s plūit (cf. plūvit, 823, 947); pius, pious, for Ennius’s pīus; see also 765.

128. A long vowel preceding unsyllabic or followed by a consonant is shortened: as, gaudeō for *gāudeō (cf. gāvīsus, 111); claudo for clāudō (cf. clāṷis, 111).

132. A long vowel is regularly shortened, in the classical period, before final -t and -m and, in words of more than one syllable, also before final r and l.

(B.) LONG VOWELS.

108. Diphthongs, whether medial or final, are treated alike in atonic syllables.

118. Contraction. (1.) Two like vowels may unite in one long vowel; rapidity of utterance was favourable to such fusion. In compounds, the desire to keep the members distinct often prevented it. So always nēmō, nobody, for *neemō from *ne-hemō, no man (for the loss of h, see 58, 150; for e in *hemō, see 144); and by the side of the open forms, nīl from nihil, nothing; vēmēns from vehemēns, rapid (connected with the verb vehō); rarely dērunt, they will be wanting, and dēsse, to be wanting, for dēerunt, dēesse; dēlēram, I had destroyed, from *dēlēeram for dēlēveram (for the loss of v, see 153), see 890; passūm, of paces, for passuum (591).

121. Compensative lengthening. When certain groups of consonants are simplified by the dropping of a consonant, its time is absorbed by a preceding short vowel, which thereby becomes long. This is called Compensation. In many cases compensative lengthening is due to the loss of a preliterary sonant s (170, 2): as,

122. Induced lengthening. Before certain groups of consonants short vowels have a tendency to become long: as,

PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS.

46. Comparing the vowels in English keen and kin, it will be noted that the passage between the tongue and the hard palate is narrower in the former than in the latter case. The ee in keen is therefore said to be a narrow or close vowel, while the i in kin is wide or open. See 41.

CLASSIFICATION OF VOWELS.

DIPHTHONGS.

120. Combination into diphthongs. The union of two successive vowels into a diphthong is equally rare: o and i are combined to oi, oe, in coetus, meeting, by the side of the open form coïtus (116, b); the perfect coepī (812), I began, owes its diphthong oe to forms in which the e was short and unaccented, such as the rare present forms coepiō for có-ĕpiō (813); for coḗpi (813, 863) would have remained unchanged (116, a). neuter, with the accent on the e, was pronounced as three syllables, later eu became diphthongal; neutiquam with synizesis (117) of e. e and ī̆ sometimes contract to e͡i in rēi (601, 602) and in de͡inde, dēin in the classic poets.

CONSONANTS.

157. As v before u (107, c), so qu was not tolerated before u, but changed to c.

458. Proper names ending in -āius, -ēius, or -ōius have -āī, -ēī, or -ōī in the genitive and vocative singular and nominative plural, and -āīs, -ēīs, or -ōīs in the dative and ablative plural (127, 7): as,

PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS.

164. Partial assimilation. (1.) A voiced mute before an unvoiced consonant became unvoiced: as, rēx, king, for *rēgs (cf. rēgis); rēxī, I guided, for *rēgsī (cf. regō); rēctus, guided, for *rēgtus; scrīpsī, I wrote, for *scrībsī (cf. scribō); scrīptus,

written

, for *scribtus; trāxī, I dragged, for

*trāghsī;

tractus, dragged, for *traghtus (152). The spelling did not always conform to this pronunciation: as, urbs, city, pronounced urps (54) but spelled with b by analogy to the oblique cases urbis, urbem, etc.; obtineō, I get, pronounced optineō.

2493. Ecthlipsis (Gr. ἔκθλιψις, a squeezing out). Final m and a preceding short vowel are usually elided before a vowel or h: as,

395. (2.) A substantive with a verb: as, anim-advertere, pay heed to, animum advertere; vēnum-dare, or vēndere, sell, vēnum dare; vēn-īre, be sold, vēnum īre; lucrī-facere, make gain, lucrī facere; manū-mittere, set free.

1165. (3.) In old Latin, exsequiās and īnfitiās are also used with , and sometimes malam crucem and malam rem, though these last more commonly have in: as,

2494. Sometimes a monosyllable ending in a short vowel and m is not elided before a vowel: as quắm ego (Ter.); súnt cŭm odōre (Lucr.).

2495. The monosyllables dem, stem, rem, spem, sim, are thought never to be elided before a short vowel.

75. Voiced and Unvoiced. If during the emission of breath the vocal chords vibrate (32), the consonant is said to be voiced or sonant: g; d; b; n (62), m; l (60), r; unsyllabic (83) i (59) and u (69); otherwise it is said to be unvoiced or surd: c, k, q; t; p; h, s, f.

2468. In Latin poetry down to the time of Cicero, final s often does not “make position” before a following consonant (66); as, tempŭs fert (Plaut.); magĭs stetisse (Ter.).

154. In early Latin s between two vowels was voiced (75), and in the fourth century B.C. this voiced s changed into r. According to Cicero (Fam. 9, 21, 2) L. Papīrius Crassus, consul in 336 B.C., changed his family name Papīsius to Papīrius. Old inscriptions show frequently s for r: as, ASA, altar, AVSELII. This change of intervocalic s to r plays an important part in declension, conjugation, and derivation: as,

CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS.

SYLLABIC AND UNSYLLABIC FUNCTION.

2503. Hardening. A vocalic i or u is sometimes made consonantal before another vowel: as, abi͡ete, ari͡ete (Verg.); cōnsili͡um (Hor.); omni͡a (Lucr.). See 117 and 83.

ACCENT.

The degrees of stress are really infinite, but for practical purposes it is sufficient to distinguish between (1.) the strongest stress (chief accent); (2.) a weaker stress (secondary accent); and (3.) absence of stress (atonic syllable). In the English contradict, the last syllable has the chief accent, a secondary accent falls on the first, and the second syllable is unstressed.

85. It is not customary to indicate the place of accents in Latin by special signs. When, for special reasons, signs are used, ´ denotes the chief accent, ` the secondary accent, while the unstressed syllables are left unmarked.

THE CLASSICAL ACCENT.

86. In classical Latin the place of the chief accent may be determined by the following rules.

(1.) Words of two syllables have the accent on the penult (175): as,

hómo; ā́cer.

(2.) Words of more than two syllables have the accent on the penult when that syllable is long (177); otherwise on the antepenult: as,

palū́ster, onústus (177); mulíebris, génetrīx (178); árborēs, árbutus, gladíolus.

87. A short penult retains the accent in the genitive and vocative with a single ī from stems in -io- (456, 459): as, genitive, cōnsílī; impérī; genitive or vocative, Vergílī; Valérī; Mercúrī. For calefácis, &c., see 394.

88. In a few words which have lost a syllable the accent is retained on the last syllable; such are (1.) compounds of the imperatives dīc and dūc (113): as, ēdū́c; (2.) nominatives of proper names in -ās and -īs for -ātis and -ītis: as, Arpīnā́s, for Arpīnā́tis; Laenā́s; Maecēnā́s; Quirī́s; Samnī́s; also nostrā́s, vostrā́s; (3.) words compounded with the abbreviated (113) enclitics -c for -ce and -n for -ne: as, illī́c; tantṓn; audīstī́n (for the shortening of the final syllable: as, vidén, dost see?, see 129); (4.) audī́t, contracted from audīvit (154, 893). The Latin grammarians prescribe the circumflex (90) for all these long syllables.

EARLIER RECESSIVE ACCENT.

89. In the preliterary period of the Latin language, the accent tended to go as far from the end of the word as possible (recessive accent). Thus, while the classical accentuation is inimī́cus, the older period accented ínimīcus. In literary Latin this early recessive accent has survived, only in Plautus’s accentuation of words of the form ⏑ ⏑ ⏑ ⏓ (proceleusmatic or fourth paeon, see 2521), in which he stresses the first syllable: as, fácilius (classical facílius); vóluerat (classical volúerat). But in many instances the early recessive accent may be traced in literary Latin by the phonetic changes which it produced (102 ff.).

90. Musical element. The native Latin grammarians slight the stress accentuation and pay much attention instead to the variations in pitch. But they are so greatly dependent on their Greek models that they are unsafe guides in this matter. It is, however, probable that a stressed vowel was uttered on a higher key (acute) than an unstressed vowel (grave), and that in certain syllables the long, accented vowel showed a rise and fall (circumflex): as, illîc (88).

91. The force of the Latin stress accent must have varied at different periods and in different localities, as it now varies in the Romance countries. The early recessive accent seems to have been fairly emphatic; but the stress in classical Latin was probably weak and the difference between accented and unaccented syllables was much less marked than it is in English.

PROCLITICS AND ENCLITICS.

92. Proclitics are unaccented words which are pronounced as a part of the following word; they are: (1.) The relative and indefinite pronouns and their derivatives; (2.) Prepositions.

(a.) Thus, quō diē, pronounced quōdíē; quī vīxit, quīvī́xit; genus unde Latīnum, génus undeLatī́num. Similarly quamdíū, as long as; iamdíū, this long time. A distinction is thus made between the interrogative quālis (1526), which is accented, and the relative quālis (1831) which is proclitic (Quint. 1, 5, 26); cf. the English who, which is accented when interrogative, and proclitic when

relative.

(b.circum lītora, pronounced circumlī́tora; ab ōrīs, pronounced abōrīs (Quint. 1, 5, 27); in inscriptions and manuscripts prepositions are often united in writing with the following word. Phrases like extemplō, suddenly, invicem (94), in turn, are commonly written and accented as one word. But the preposition is accented when it is followed by a monosyllabic unemphatic (and therefore enclitic) personal pronoun: as, ín mē; ábs tē (but abs tḗ, if is emphatic). All prepositions used as adverbs (1402) have an independent accent.

93. Enclitics are words which have no accent of their own, but are pronounced as a part of the word preceding. This increase of the number of syllables produced certain accentual changes, all the details of which are not clear. When the enclitic was monosyllabic the place of the accent seems to have been determined as in 86; thus vídēs, but vidḗsne; Látiō, but Latiṓque. Again, when by the addition of a monosyllabic enclitic the accent falls on the fourth syllable from the end, a secondary (84, 85) accent was probably placed on the penult: as, perī́cula, but perī́culàque. The Roman grammarians agree, however, in demanding that everywhere the syllable preceding the enclitics -que, -ne, -ve, and -ce should be accented. In deinde and subinde there is authority for placing the accent on the first syllable.

Enclitics are: (1.) Unemphatic personal and indefinite pronouns: as, in mē, pronounced, ínmē; dā mihi, dā́mihi; sīc tibi, sī́ctibi; sī quis, sī́quis; nē quid, nḗquid. (2.) Verbs when used as auxiliaries: as, possum for pót(e) sum (752); quī́ libet (2401); vidḗlicet, īlicet, scīlicet (712); quámvīs (1903); the forms of esse in compound tenses (719), so that est is frequently combined, even in writing, with the preceding past participle (747). (3.) The particles -ne (-n), -ve, and -ce (-c): as, satísne or shortened satín; Hyrcānīsve Arabī́sve; istī́ce or shortened istîc (90), adhûc (90). (4.) The copulative conjunction -que: as, Latiṓque, līmináque. (5.) The preposition cum when it follows (1435) its case. (6.) The particle quidem: as, sī quidem, síquidem (131). (7.) Other enclitics are: -met (650): as, egómet; -dem: as, ibídem; -nam: as, ubínam; -dum (1573): as, agédum; -inde: as, déinde, próinde (which are disyllabic in verse), and súbinde; -tum; as, etiámtum; -per: as, parúmper; the vocative when it was closely joined to the preceding word, e.g. an imperative: as, dī́c puer (106).

94. Two words expressing what is really one single idea are often bound together by one accent, one of them acting the part of either a proclitic or enclitic.

Thus, with the earlier recessive accent (89), Iū́piter (133; 389; originally a vocative which came to be used as nominative; for the change of pater to piter see 104); ínvicem, in turn; dḗnuō for dḗ nóvō (106); with the later, classical accent, lēgislā́tor, paterfamíliās, orbisterrā́rum, extémplō, imprī́mīs. When unemphatic ille and iste preceded their noun and had practically the value of our definite article they formed a unit with the following noun and thus the accent might fall on their last syllable: as, illé pater, isté canis. This use is particularly common in vulgar and late Latin (see 112).

CHANGE OF SOUND.
(A.) VOWEL CHANGE.

CHANGE OF DIPHTHONGS IN ACCENTED SYLLABLES.

95. Of the six original diphthongs au, ou, eu, and ai, oi, ei, the only one which preserved its original sound in the classical period is au. Of the rest only ae (for older ai) and, in a few words, oe (for older oi) remained diphthongs; all the others had become monophthongs.

96. Change of ai. ai is common in inscriptions: as, AIDILIS, PRAITOR. Toward the end of the republic the two elements of the diphthong had been partially assimilated to ae (49): as, aedīlis (Quint. 1, 7, 18). This is its pronunciation in the classical period. Between 130 and 100 B.C. ai is displaced by ae in public documents; but the old-fashioned ai was often retained in private inscriptions. Still later the two elements completely converged to ē. In provincial Latin ē is found as early as 200 B.C.: as, CESVLA for CAESVLLA; in Rome itself the pronunciation ‘Cēcilius’ for Caecilius, and ‘prētor’ for praetor was derided as boorish; but by 71 A.D. ae was verging toward ē even in the court language: the coins of Vespasian have IVDEA as well as IVDAEA. In the 3d and 4th century A.D. ē became the prevalent sound.

97. Change of au. The diphthong au, which was preserved in educated speech, was changed to ō in rustic and colloquial pronunciation (see the anecdote related by Suetonius, Vesp. 22): as, cōpō, innkeeper, for caupō; plōstrum for plaustrum (barge), cart: Clōdius for Claudius. Some of these gained literary currency: as, cōdex, book, caudex, block; fōcāle, neckcloth, faucēs, throat. The form sōdēs (1572) for si̭ audēs = sī audēs (Cic. O. 154) is a colloquialism.

98. Change of ei. ei as a genuine diphthong is common in old inscriptions: as, SEI; SEIVE; ADEITVR; DEIXERVNT; FEIDA. In classical Latin it has passed into ī: thus, , if; sīve, either; adītur, is approached; dīxērunt, they said; fīda, faithful. An intermediate stage between the old diphthong ei and the classical ī was a very close (46) ē: as, PLOIRVME (465) for plūrimī; IOVRE (501, 507) for iūrī. For the orthographical use of ei as a spelling for the long ī-sound, see 29.

99. Change of oi. The development of oi was parallel to that of ai. It first passed into oe: as, COIRAVERVNT and COERAVERVNT, they cared; OITILE, useful, and OETI, to use; LOIDOS and LOEDOS, play,—all in old Latin. In classical Latin it has further been changed in accented syllables to ū: as, cūrāvērunt, ūtile, ūtī, lūdus. But oe was retained in classical Latin (1.) when a secondary diphthong (48), the result of contraction (120), and (2.) in a few words like foedus, treaty, perhaps as an archaizing, legal term; foedus, ugly; poena, penalty, perhaps through the influence of Greek ποινή (in the verb pūnīre, to punish, the regular ū appears); proelium, skirmish; foetor, stench; and moenia, walls, perhaps because there was a word mūnia, services. The connection of nōn, not, with noenum (455; 1444; 699) is difficult because of the unusual development of oe to o, for which the Praenestine form CORAVERONT is the only parallel.

100. Change of ou. ou, found in inscriptions down to about 90 B.C., passed, in classical Latin, into ū: as, POVBLICOM, NOVNTIATA, IOVDEX; later pūblicum, public, nūntiāta, notified, iūdex, judge.

101. Change of eu. Primitive (48) eu appears in classical Latin only in the interjections eu, heu, ē̆heu, heus. Every other original eu had, even in old Latin, passed into ou and developed like the latter: as, *neumen (Greek νεῦμα) became first *noumen, then (100) nūmen. With the exceptions noted above, the diphthong eu, as it appears in Latin, is always of secondary origin (48), the result of the two vowels e and u meeting in composition: as, neu, neither, from nē-ve; neutiquam, from and utiquam (124).

WEAKENING IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

102. The vowel of an unstressed (atonic) syllable is often weakened, changing its quantity or quality or both. This is especially the case in syllables immediately preceded by the chief accent (posttonic syllables). The following changes took place at an early period when Latin still possessed the old, recessive accent (89).

WEAKENING OF SIMPLE VOWELS IN MEDIAL SYLLABLES.

103. (a.) Atonic medial e before a single consonant was weakened (with the exceptions given under b.) to i: as, cólligō, collect, from legō; óbsideō, besiege, from sedeō; cértāminis, of the contest, from certāmen (224); flāminis, from flāmen (470). And so probably hic (664) arose from *hec or *hoc (105, g) when used as proclitic (92). Before the labials p, b, f, and m this weakened sound was intermediate between i and u (28), and both spellings occur: as, quadripēs and quadrupēs, four-footed; alimentum, nourishment; monumentum, monument. The choice of i or u was probably governed by the quality of the stressed vowel in the preceding syllable: viz., u after o and u, and i after a, e, and i. But such distinction is only imperfectly maintained in classical Latin.

(b.) But before two consonants, before r, before vowels, and after i, atonic e does not change: as, lévāmentum (224), but lévāminis, of consolation; óbsessus (but óbsideō), possessed; sócietās, society, from the stem socie- (but nóvitās from the stem nove-); géneris, of the kind; ádeunt, they approach.

104. (c.) Atonic medial a, except in the cases mentioned below under (d.), (e.), and (f.), was first weakened to e and then underwent the same changes as atonic medial e (103): as (before single consonants), cṓnficiō, accomplish, from faciō; ī́nsiliō, jump in, from saliō (1019); rédditus, restored, from datus; trícipitem, three-headed, from *trícapitem (caput), Cic. O. 159; occiput, back of the head, and sinciput, jole (478). In compounds of iaciō (940), -iaciō is weakened in early Latin to -ieciō (as, conieciō, 940), but later to -iciō (as, subiciō). This last form may be due to syncope (111, a) of the radical a. The spelling -iiciō (as, subiiciō) is late and faulty (52). It does not occur in republican inscriptions and owes its origin to a confusion of the two forms conieciō and coniciō. (On the quantity of the vowel of the prepositions in these compounds of iaciō, see 122 e); (before p, b, f, m) áccipiō, accept, and óccupō, occupy, from capiō; cóntubernālis, room-mate, from taberna; ábripiō, to snatch away, from rapiō; (before two consonants) pépercī, I have spared, from parcō; áccentus, accent, from cantus; (before r) péperī, I brought forth, from pariō.

(d.) But an a in the preceding syllable may protect the atonic a: as, ádagiō, ádagium, proverb, but prṓdigium, miracle (144).

(e.) Atonic medial a before the guttural nasal (62) n followed by g changed to i (138): as, áttingō, touch, from tangō.

(f.) Atonic medial a before l followed by any consonant save l changed to u (both l and u being guttural, 60, 44): as, éxsultāre, to leap up, from saltāre; but féfellī, I deceived, from fallō.

105. (g.) Atonic medial o, when followed by a single consonant, first changed to e and then underwent all further changes of medial atonic e: as, hóminis, from *homon-is (485); ímāginis, for *imāgonis, 226 (nominative imāgō, 485); cúpīdinis, for *cupīdonis, 225, (nominative cupīdō, 485); vírginis, for *virgonis (nominative virgō, 470); ī́licō, from *in-slocō, on the spot (169, 4).

(h.) Before two consonants or before guttural l (60) atonic medial o changed to u: as, éuntis, from *éontis (Greek ἴοντος); sēdulō, from sē dolō (1417). But a preceding v or u protects o (107, c).

(i.) Before r, atonic medial o was retained: as, témporis, of time; except when u in the preceding syllable induced a change to u: as, fúlguris, of lightning (for the -r in the nominative singular fulgur instead of -s, see 154).

106. (k.) Medial -av-, -ov-, and -iv- in posttonic syllables were weakened to u: as, dḗnuō from dḗnovō (94); ábluō from ablavō. The form puer, boy, arose from the older POVER in enclitic vocatives (93, 7) and was thence transferred to the nominative like piter in Iūpiter (94).

WEAKENING OF SIMPLE VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES.

107. (a.) In final syllables unaccented original e before s and t was weakened to i: as, salūtis, of safety, from older salūtes (507).

(b.) Final i became e: as, ante for *anti (Greek ἀντί and anti-cipāre); nominative singular mare, from the stem mari- (526).

(c.) In final syllables o before consonants changed to u except when preceded by u or v: as, fīlius, son, for old Latin fīlios (452); ferunt, they carry, for older feront; femur, thigh, nomin. sg. from the stem femor- (489); genus, kind, for *genos, Greek γένος; but vīvont, they live; salvom, safe. Not long before the beginning of our era o here also changed to u and appears to have coalesced with the preceding v (Quint. 1, 7, 26): as, in inscriptions: INGENVS (nomin.

sg.

) for ingenuos; SERVM, slave (acc. sg.), for servom; NOVM for novom, something new; so also boum, oxen (gen. pl.), for bovom (494). But inasmuch as the majority of forms in the paradigms of these words retained their v, it was restored in most cases, by analogy, to the forms which had lost it: as, servum for serum, because of servī, servō, etc.; vīvunt for vīunt, because of vīvō, vīvis, vīvit, etc.

(d.) When the stems fac- (facere, do), cap- (capere, take) appear as second members of compounds, their a changes in final syllables to e: as, artifex, artisan; auceps, bird-catcher. After the analogy of these words, compounds with dīcere and īre have e in the nom. sg.: as, iūdex, iūdicis, judge (from iūs and dīcere); comes, companion (from com, with, and īre); see 136, 2.

WEAKENING OF DIPHTHONGS IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

108. Diphthongs, whether medial or final, are treated alike in atonic syllables.

(a.) Atonic ei, oi, and ai (ae) became ī: as, lupī, wolves (nom. pl.), for *lupoi (Gr. λύκοι); bellī, in war (loc. sg., 460, 1338), for *bellei (Greek οἴκει) or *belloi (Greek οἴκοι); éxīstimō, I consider, from aestimō; cóncīdō, I strike down, from caedō; Cicero, O. 159, mentions inīcum, unfair, for *ínaecum, and concīsum for *cóncaesum; so also, probably, hīc, this, arose from hoic (662) when used as a proclitic (92).

(b.) Atonic ou and au became ū: as, ínclūdō, I include, from claudō; áccūsāre, to accuse, from causa.

109. There are not a few cases in which the atonic vowel does not conform to the rules given above (102-108). These are usually compounds which show the vowel of the simple verb. Some of these were formed at a time when the early recessive accent was no longer in force and consequently there was no cause for weakening; in others the vowel of the simple verb was by analogy substituted for the weakened vowel of the compound: as, appetō, I strive after, from petō, which ought to have i like colligō, collect, from legō; intermedius, intermediate, but dīmidius, half; dēfraudāre, to cheat, by the side of dēfrūdāre from fraudāre; instead of the common redarguō, I refute, Scipio Africanus minor Pauli filius (185-129 B.C.) said rederguō, and pertīsum for pertaesum, but both Cicero (O. 159) and Lucilius discountenance pertīsum as the sign of a pedantic prig. In a few cases the reverse process took place, and the weakened vowel which arose in the compound was transferred to the simple verb: as, clūdō, I close (958), for claudō, which owes its ū to compounds like occlūdō. For a case where the vowel of the preceding syllable acted as a stay to the expected change, see 104, d.

LOSS IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

110. Only vowels which are short and atonic may be lost. The loss of a medial vowel is called Syncope; of an initial vowel, Aphaeresis; of a final vowel Apocope.

111. Syncope. (a.) Loss of a posttonic vowel, entailing the loss of a syllable, occurs in ardus (Lucil.; for ă see 128) for the common āridus, dry; caldus by the side of calidus, warm (Quint. 1, 6, 19); reppulī, I pushed back, and rettulī, I carried back, stand for *répepulī and *rétetulī (861); pergō, I proceed, stands for *perregō from regō (cf. cor-rigō, ē-rigō, where the e is weakened, 103, and porrigō, porgō, where it is either weakened or lost), hence it forms its perfect perrēxī (953): pōnō, I place, is for *posnō (170, 2) from *po-sinō (112), hence it forms its past participle positus (972); for iūrgō, I blame. Plautus has iūrigō; *ūsūripō (from ūsus and rapere) yields ūsurpō, I utilize; *gāvideō, hence gāvīsus (801), gives gaudeo, I rejoice, converting āṷ to aṷ before the following d (128); in a similar way auceps, bird-catcher, is formed from *aviceps (avis, bird, and capere, catch); claudere, lock, from *clāvidere (clāvis, key); aetās, age, for áevitās (262); praecō, herald, for *práevicō (105, g) prae-vocō (211); also with change of ou to ū (100), prūdēns, prudent, for *proudēns from providēns, foreseeing; nūper, lately, from *noviper; nūntius, messenger, from *noventius (333); iūcundus, joyful, from iuvicundus (Cic. Fin. 2, 14). But forms like pōclum, cup, saeclum, age, do not belong here, as they are original and not derived by syncope from pōculum, saeculum; cf. 172.

(b.) Where, through the loss of a vowel, l or r would come to stand between two consonants, or where they would be final and preceded by a consonant, l and r become syllabic (83) and the syllable is thus maintained. Syllabic l is represented by ul, syllabic r by er (172, 3). The development of such intercalary vowels as u before l and e before r is called Anaptyxis (172). Thus, *sacri-dōts (cf. sacri-legium) became first *sacr̥dōts by syncope, then sacerdōs, priest, by anaptyxis; *ācribus (cf. ācri-mōnia, pungency) first became *ācr̥bus then ācerbus, pungent; *agrilos (267, cf. agri-cola, farmer) became first *agr̥los, then *agerlos, and finally, by assimilation of the r to l (166, 7), agellus, small field; from *dis-ficilter (adverb from dis- and facilis) arose *difficl̥ter and difficulter, with difficulty. The nominative sg. of the following words is to be explained thus. ager (451) was originally *agros (cf. Greek ἄγρος), which changed successively to *agr̥s, *agers, and ager (for the loss of -s see 171, 1 and 3). Similarly *ācris, passing through the stages of *ācr̥s, *ācers, became ācer (627), and *famlos by way of *faml̥s, *famuls, became famul (455), to which later the common ending of nouns of the o-declension was added, giving famulus.

112. Aphaeresis. Aphaeresis hardly occurs in literary Latin. In the pronoun iste the initial i is sometimes dropped (667); this loss implies an accented ultima (94). A trace of prehistoric aphaeresis is found in the prefix po- for *apo (Greek ἀπό) in pōnō, I place, for po-s(i)nō (111, a).

113. Apocope. Under the same conditions under which a medial vowel was syncopated, the final vowel of a word which stood in close union with the following word, as a preposition with its noun, was lost. In this way *peri (Greek περί) became per; *apo (Greek ἀπό) became ap, ab (164, 2); *eti (Greek ἔτι) became et. Similarly the final -e of the enclitics -ce, -ne, not, and -ne interrogative was lost: *sī-ce became sīc, so; *quī-ne, quīn, why not; habēsne, haben, hast thou; the imperatives dīc, say, dūc, lead, and fac, do, stand for earlier dīce, dūce, face (846); the shortened form em for eme (imperative of emere, take) has been turned into an interjection (1149). In the same way nec arose by the side of neque; ac by the side of atque (158). Final -e has also been dropped in the nominative sg. of a number of polysyllabic neuter stems in -āli and -āri (546): as, animal, animal, for *animāle, exemplar, pattern, for *exemplāre. See 536, 537. It must, however, be remembered that in most of the cases given the loss of a final vowel would also result from elision (119) before the initial vowel of the following word.

COMBINATION OF ADJACENT VOWELS.

114. Hiatus. A succession of two vowel sounds not making a diphthong is called Hiatus.

When in the formation of words by means of suffixes or prefixes or through the loss of an intervening consonant, two vowels come into contact within a word we speak of internal hiatus; the term external hiatus comprises those cases where, in connected discourse, the final vowel of one word comes into contact with the initial vowel of the following word. For the latter kind, see 2474.

115. The treatment of vowels in internal hiatus is four-fold: (1.) The hiatus may remain; (2.) the two vowels may be fused into one (Contraction); (3.) one of the two vowels may be dropped (Elision); and (4.) the two vowels may be combined into a diphthong.

116. Hiatus is maintained (a.) between two adjacent vowels the second of which is long and accented (according to the classical accentuation): as, coḗgi, I forced, and coā́ctus, forced (937); but cōgō (118, 3). For coepi, instead of coḗpī, I began, see 120.

(b.) In many prepositional compounds when the members were still felt to be independent: as, praeesse (the contracted form praesse is found in inscriptions); dēerunt, they will be wanting, by the side of dērunt; coalēscō, grow together (the contracted form cōlēscō appears in Varro); cooptāre, coöpt, cooperiō, I cover up (by the side of rare cōptāre, cōperīre); coïtus, meeting, by the side of coetus (120).

(c.) A comparatively large number of vowel combinations remain unchanged: as ea and in eam, her, and meā, by my (fem. sing.); ia and in māria, seas, viātōris, of the traveller; ua and in bēlua, monster, suā, through her (fem. sg.); in quiēs, quiet; in luēs, pestilence; in meī, of me; in tuī, of thee; in meō, by my (masc. sing.).

117. Synizesis. In these combinations the first vowel is sometimes made unsyllabic (83). This is called synizesis (2499) and is not rare in poets, being often the only means of adapting a word to the requirements of certain metres. Thus, fortuītus (- ⏑ - ⏓) must appear in a hexameter as fortvītus (fortṷītus). See 2499, 2503.

118. Contraction. (1.) Two like vowels may unite in one long vowel; rapidity of utterance was favourable to such fusion. In compounds, the desire to keep the members distinct often prevented it. So always nēmō, nobody, for *neemō from *ne-hemō, no man (for the loss of h, see 58, 150; for e in *hemō, see 144); and by the side of the open forms, nīl from nihil, nothing; vēmēns from vehemēns, rapid (connected with the verb vehō); rarely dērunt, they will be wanting, and dēsse, to be wanting, for dēerunt, dēesse; dēlēram, I had destroyed, from *dēlēeram for dēlēveram (for the loss of v, see 153), see 890; passūm, of paces, for passuum (591).

(2.) A diphthong absorbs the following vowel: as, praetor, older praitor, praetor, from *prai-itor, who goes before; inscriptions show praerunt for praeerunt, they will be before; for praebēre, to furnish, the open form praehibēre occurs in Plautus (1004).

(3.) If two unlike vowels are contracted at all, they usually unite in the long sound of the first vowel. Thus, o and a yield ō: as, cōgō, I force, from co-agō; cōgitō, I think, from co-agitō. Similarly Varro has cōlēscat, it may combine, for co-alēscat. o and e yield ō: as, prōmō, bring out, cōmō, put up, for pro-emō, co-emō (953). ē and a yield ē: as, dēgō, I pass away, from dē-agō (937). i and e in the termination of the vocative of -io- stems probably contracted to ; as fīlī from *fīlie, 459. But in denominative (365) and other verbs of the first conjugation ā and ō contract into ō: as, amō, I love, from *amā-ō (cf. Greek τιμά·ω); and ā and ē into ē: as, amēs, thou mayest love, for *amā-ēs.

119. Elision. Only rarely the first of two successive vowels is dropped: as, nūllus, no, for *ne-ūllus; likewise the final vowel of the first member of nominal compounds: as, multangulus, with many corners, for *multi-angulus (cf. multi-cavus, with many holes); flexanimus, heart-rending, for *flexi-animus (cf. flexi-pēs, with bent feet).

120. Combination into diphthongs. The union of two successive vowels into a diphthong is equally rare: o and i are combined to oi, oe, in coetus, meeting, by the side of the open form coïtus (116, b); the perfect coepī (812), I began, owes its diphthong oe to forms in which the e was short and unaccented, such as the rare present forms coepiō for có-ĕpiō (813); for coḗpi (813, 863) would have remained unchanged (116, a). neuter, with the accent on the e, was pronounced as three syllables, later eu became diphthongal; neutiquam with synizesis (117) of e. e and ī̆ sometimes contract to e͡i in rēi (601, 602) and in de͡inde, dēin in the classic poets.

LENGTHENING.

ACCENT.

THE CLASSICAL ACCENT.

175. A word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. The last syllable is called the Ultima; the last syllable but one is called the Penult; the last syllable but two is called the Antepenult.

177. A syllable is long if its vowel is long, or if its vowel is followed by two consonants or by x or z: as,

178. In prose or old dramatic verse a syllable with a short vowel before a mute or f followed by l or r is not long: as tenebrae. In other verse, however, such syllables are sometimes regarded as long. In compounds such syllables are long in any verse: as obruit.

456. Substantives ending in -ius or -ium (but never adjectives), have commonly a single in the genitive singular: as,

459. Latin proper names in -ius have the vocative in only: as,

394. (1.) A verb with a verb: faciō and fīō are added to present stems, mostly of intransitive verbs in -ēre; the -e- of the first verb is sometimes long, and sometimes short (130, 5): as, calē̆-facere, make warm (calēre); excandē̆-facere, make blaze (candēre); madē̆-facere, make wet (madēre). In these apparent compounds, the accent of faciō remains the same as in the simple verb: as, calē̆fácis.

113. Apocope. Under the same conditions under which a medial vowel was syncopated, the final vowel of a word which stood in close union with the following word, as a preposition with its noun, was lost. In this way *peri (Greek περί) became per; *apo (Greek ἀπό) became ap, ab (164, 2); *eti (Greek ἔτι) became et. Similarly the final -e of the enclitics -ce, -ne, not, and -ne interrogative was lost: *sī-ce became sīc, so; *quī-ne, quīn, why not; habēsne, haben, hast thou; the imperatives dīc, say, dūc, lead, and fac, do, stand for earlier dīce, dūce, face (846); the shortened form em for eme (imperative of emere, take) has been turned into an interjection (1149). In the same way nec arose by the side of neque; ac by the side of atque (158). Final -e has also been dropped in the nominative sg. of a number of polysyllabic neuter stems in -āli and -āri (546): as, animal, animal, for *animāle, exemplar, pattern, for *exemplāre. See 536, 537. It must, however, be remembered that in most of the cases given the loss of a final vowel would also result from elision (119) before the initial vowel of the following word.

129. Iambic shortening. The law of iambic shortening (2470) produced a number of important changes: thus,

154. In early Latin s between two vowels was voiced (75), and in the fourth century B.C. this voiced s changed into r. According to Cicero (Fam. 9, 21, 2) L. Papīrius Crassus, consul in 336 B.C., changed his family name Papīsius to Papīrius. Old inscriptions show frequently s for r: as, ASA, altar, AVSELII. This change of intervocalic s to r plays an important part in declension, conjugation, and derivation: as,

893. (b.) In tenses formed from perfect stems in -īv-, v is often dropped before -is-, -ēr-, or -er-; but contraction is common only in the forms which have -is-: as,

90. Musical element. The native Latin grammarians slight the stress accentuation and pay much attention instead to the variations in pitch. But they are so greatly dependent on their Greek models that they are unsafe guides in this matter. It is, however, probable that a stressed vowel was uttered on a higher key (acute) than an unstressed vowel (grave), and that in certain syllables the long, accented vowel showed a rise and fall (circumflex): as, illîc (88).

EARLIER RECESSIVE ACCENT.

2521. The feet in common use are the following:—

PROCLITICS AND ENCLITICS.

1526. Pronoun questions or exclamations are introduced by interrogative pronouns, or words of pronoun origin.

1831. Sentences are said to be correlative, when a relative pronoun or adverb has a corresponding determinative or demonstrative pronoun or adverb in the main sentence.

94. Two words expressing what is really one single idea are often bound together by one accent, one of them acting the part of either a proclitic or enclitic.

1402. Prepositions were originally adverbs which served to define more exactly the meaning of a verb.

752. possum is formed from pote, able, and sum, juxtaposed (166, 2; 396). The separate forms potis sum, &c., or pote sum, &c., are also used, and sometimes even potis or pote alone takes the place of a verb; in either case potis and pote are indeclinable, and are applied to gender words and neuters both.

2401. quīvīs and quīlibet, any you please, are used either in affirmative or negative sentences. When two are spoken of, utervīs or uterlibet is used.

712. Some adverbs are condensed sentences: as,

1903. quam vīs or quamvīs is used as an indefinite adverb (712), as much as you please, and is often joined with an adjective or other adverb to take the place of a superlative: as,

719. The perfect system has no passive; its place is supplied by the perfect participle with a form of sum, am, or less frequently of fuī, am become.

747. The indicative and imperative es is for older ess (171, 1), and is regularly used long by Plautus and Terence. The e of es and est is not pronounced after a vowel or -m, and is often omitted in writing: as experrēcta es, pronounced experrēctas; epistula est, pronounced epistulast; cōnsilium est, pronounced cōnsiliumst. In the dramatists, -s preceded by a vowel, which is usually short, unites with a following es or est: thus, tū servos es becomes tū servos; similis est, similist; virtūs est, virtūst; rēs est, rēst.

1435. Of monosyllables, ad and often follow a relative. Also cum often in Cicero and Sallust, and regularly in Caesar. With a personal or a reflexive pronoun, cum regularly follows, as mēcum, nōbīscum, sēcum.

131. A long final vowel is shortened when an enclitic is added to the word: as siquidem from ; quoque from quō.

650. Emphasis is given (1.) by reduplication (189): Ac. and Ab. mēmē, tētē, rare; sēsē, very common. (2.) by -te added to the N. of : tūte. (3.) by -met added to any case but the genitive plural: as, egomet; but has only tūtemet or tūtimet.

1573. In Plautus and Terence, the enclitic dum, a while, a minute, just, is often attached to the imperative: as, manedum, Pl. As. 585, wait a minute. In classical Latin, dum is retained with age and agite: as, agedum cōnferte cum illīus vītā P. Sūllae, Sull. 72, come now, compare Sulla’s life with that man’s (1075).

106. (k.) Medial -av-, -ov-, and -iv- in posttonic syllables were weakened to u: as, dḗnuō from dḗnovō (94); ábluō from ablavō. The form puer, boy, arose from the older POVER in enclitic vocatives (93, 7) and was thence transferred to the nominative like piter in Iūpiter (94).

133. (1.) In a few cases the length of the vowel has been transferred to the following consonant, the length of which is then indicated by doubling it (81): as, littera for lītera, LEITERAS; Iuppiter for Iūpiter; parricīda for pāri-cīda, murder of a member of the same clan (*pāro-, member of a clan, Doric πᾶός, a relative); cuppa for cūpa, barrel. The legal formula sī pāret, if it appear, was vulgarly pronounced sī parret (Festus).

389. (3.) By nouns, chiefly substantives, in the same case placed loosely side by side and making one idea. The two words may be used: (a.) Copulatively: as, ūsus-frūctus, use and enjoyment; pactum-conventum, bargain and covenant; duo-decim, two and ten, twelve; or (b.) Appositively: one word explaining the other (1045): as, Iuppiter, Jove the Father (94; 133); Mārspiter, Mars the Father, for Mārs pater.

104. (c.) Atonic medial a, except in the cases mentioned below under (d.), (e.), and (f.), was first weakened to e and then underwent the same changes as atonic medial e (103): as (before single consonants), cṓnficiō, accomplish, from faciō; ī́nsiliō, jump in, from saliō (1019); rédditus, restored, from datus; trícipitem, three-headed, from *trícapitem (caput), Cic. O. 159; occiput, back of the head, and sinciput, jole (478). In compounds of iaciō (940), -iaciō is weakened in early Latin to -ieciō (as, conieciō, 940), but later to -iciō (as, subiciō). This last form may be due to syncope (111, a) of the radical a. The spelling -iiciō (as, subiiciō) is late and faulty (52). It does not occur in republican inscriptions and owes its origin to a confusion of the two forms conieciō and coniciō. (On the quantity of the vowel of the prepositions in these compounds of iaciō, see 122 e); (before p, b, f, m) áccipiō, accept, and óccupō, occupy, from capiō; cóntubernālis, room-mate, from taberna; ábripiō, to snatch away, from rapiō; (before two consonants) pépercī, I have spared, from parcō; áccentus, accent, from cantus; (before r) péperī, I brought forth, from pariō.

112. Aphaeresis. Aphaeresis hardly occurs in literary Latin. In the pronoun iste the initial i is sometimes dropped (667); this loss implies an accented ultima (94). A trace of prehistoric aphaeresis is found in the prefix po- for *apo (Greek ἀπό) in pōnō, I place, for po-s(i)nō (111, a).

CHANGE OF DIPHTHONGS IN ACCENTED SYLLABLES.

1572. The imperative is often softened by the addition of amābō, obsecrō, quaesō, prithee, I beg, or sīs, sultis, sōdēs, please (97). It is sharpened by age, agedum or agidum, age sīs, mark me, or ī, go, come on, or by modo, only. The concessive imperative sometimes has sānē, for all me.

465. Other case forms are found in inscriptions as follows:

501. An old dative in is sometimes retained in set phrases (507): as, aerē, money; iūrē, right. See 98.

507. Other case forms are found in inscriptions, as follows:

120. Combination into diphthongs. The union of two successive vowels into a diphthong is equally rare: o and i are combined to oi, oe, in coetus, meeting, by the side of the open form coïtus (116, b); the perfect coepī (812), I began, owes its diphthong oe to forms in which the e was short and unaccented, such as the rare present forms coepiō for có-ĕpiō (813); for coḗpi (813, 863) would have remained unchanged (116, a). neuter, with the accent on the e, was pronounced as three syllables, later eu became diphthongal; neutiquam with synizesis (117) of e. e and ī̆ sometimes contract to e͡i in rēi (601, 602) and in de͡inde, dēin in the classic poets.

455. nihilum, nothing, usually drops -um in the nominative and accusative, becoming nihil or nīl, and similarly nōn, not, may be for noenum, naught (99

).

famul is used for famulus, slave, by Ennius and Lucretius, once each (111, b).

1444. nōn is a modification of noenum or noenu, compounded of ne, no, and the accusative oinom or oenum, the older form of ūnum, one thing. noenum occurs in Plautus twice, in Ennius, Lucilius, Afranius, and Varro, once each, and noenu occurs twice in Lucretius (99).

699. domum, homeward, home; rūs, afield; forās, out of doors (*forā-); vicem, instead; partim, in part; old noenum or noenu, common nōn, for ne-oenum, i.e. ūnum, not one, naught, not; admodum, to a degree, very; adamussim, examussim, to a T; adfatim, to satiety; invicem, in turn, each other.

124. A vowel originally long is regularly shortened in classical Latin before another vowel, even though an h intervene: as,

WEAKENING IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

WEAKENING OF SIMPLE VOWELS IN MEDIAL SYLLABLES.

224. -min-, N. -men (202), usually active, occasionally passive, is very common; it sometimes denotes the means, instrument, or effect.

470. Many consonant stems have a double form: one form used in the nominative singular (neuters have this form in the accusative also), another form in the other cases: as,

664. The nominative hic or hicine found in the dramatists and rarely later is probably for *ho-c, *he-c (103, a). A nominative plural feminine haec is found in writers of all ages. Other and rare forms are: Pl. N. M. hīsce (461), D. or Ab. hībus.

1019. (2.) The following verbs in -īre have the perfect stem in -u- (874), and the perfect participle, when used, in -tus:

478. vātēs, bard, has an -s- stem, namely -ēs (236), in the nominative, and vāt- in the other cases (401); G. Pl. vātum, but thrice vātium (Cic.). The only example of a neuter stem in -t-, with nominative -t, genitive -tis, is caput, head, capitis, and its compounds occiput, back of the head and sinciput, jole. lac, Ne., milk, lactis, has in old and late Latin nominative and accusative lacte, lact once in Varro (171, 2); acc. lactem occurs in Petronius once and later.

940. (d.) With the present stem in -io|e- (836).

122. Induced lengthening. Before certain groups of consonants short vowels have a tendency to become long: as,

144. In a few cases a vowel is influenced by the vowel of a neighbouring syllable: as,

138. e before the guttural nasal (62) followed by a guttural mute was changed to i: as, septingentī, from septem; singulī, from the stem sem- in semel (for the assimilation of m see 164, 3); obtingō (925), I attain, for *óbtengō (104, c) from *ob-tangō (104, e).

485. (c.) Examples of stems in -n-, with nominative , genitive -inis, are:

226. -ā-gin-, -ī-gin- (202): -ā-gin-, N. -ā-gō: vorā-gin-, N. vorā-gō, gulf (vorā-re); imā-gō, representation (*imā-, cf. imitārī). -ī-gin-, N. -ī-gō: orī-gin-, N. orī-gō, source (orī-rī); cāl-īgō, darkness (√cāl-, hide). A few denominatives have -ū-gin-, N. -ū-gō: aer-ūgin-, N. aer-ūgō, copper rust (aer-).

225. ē-din-, -ī-din- (202): -ē-din-, N. -ē-dō: grav-ēdin-, N. grav-ēdō, (heaviness), catarrh (√grav-, heavy), -ī-din-, N. -ī-dō: cup-īdin-, N. cup-īdō, desire (√cup-, desire); lib-idō, whim (√lib-, yearn).

1417. The ablative is accompanied by the following prepositions:

WEAKENING OF SIMPLE VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES.

526. (4.) Parisyllabic neuters in -i- with the nominative in -e are declined as follows:

452. -us and -um were originally -os and -om. But -us was used in the earliest times, -um somewhat later, and both became prevalent between 218 and 55 B.C. (107, c). After u or v, however, the -os and -om were retained till toward 50 A.D. (107, c); also after qu; but -cus and -cum often displaced -quos and -quom (157): as, equos, equom, or ecus, ecum, horse; antīquos, antīquom, or antīcus, antīcum, ancient. In the vocative -e was always used, and is retained by Plautus in puere, thou boy.

489. (a.) Examples of stems in -r-, with nominative -r, genitive -ris, are:

494. Four substantives with stems in -ū- or -v-, grūs, F., crane, gruis; sūs, M., F., sow, swine, suis; bōs, M., F., ox, cow, bovis; and nix, F., snow, nivis, follow the consonant declension; also the genitive Iovis, and the other oblique cases of Iuppiter (500). But sūs has in the plural dative and ablative suibus, sūbus, or subus; bōs has in the plural genitive boum or bovum, rarely bovom (107, c), and in the dative and ablative bōbus, or oftener būbus; nix has no genitive plural in good writers (430): nivium late, once nivum.

136. (1.) i before an r which goes back to an earlier voiced s (154) was changed to e: as, cineris, of ashes, for *cinisis, from the stem cinis (491); Faleriī, for *Falisiī, cf. Falis-cus; (formed like Etrūria, for *Etrūsia, cf. Etrūs-cī).

WEAKENING OF DIPHTHONGS IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

460. Town names and a few appellatives have a locative case in : as, Ephesī, in Ephesus; humī, on the ground; bellī, in war.

1338. The locatives bellī, older du͡ellī, and mīlitiae are sometimes used in contrast with domī: as, domī du͡ellīque, Pl. Cap. prol. 68, domī bellīque, L. 2, 50, 11, domī mīlitiaeque, TD. 5, 55, mīlitiae et domī, T. Ad. 495, at home and in the field. Rarely without domī: as, bellī, RP. 2, 56, mīlitiae, S. I. 84, 2.

662. The stem of hīc is ho-, hā-; to most of its cases a demonstrative -c for -ce is attached. The masculine and feminine nominative singular and nominative and accusative neuter plural take an -i-: hīc for *ho-i-ce (108, a); haec for ha-i-ce (96). hunc, hanc, are for *hom-ce, *ham-ce. For the quantity of the first syllable of huius, see 153, 2; of hoc, 171, 1.

958. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

LOSS IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES.

128. A long vowel preceding unsyllabic or followed by a consonant is shortened: as, gaudeō for *gāudeō (cf. gāvīsus, 111); claudo for clāudō (cf. clāṷis, 111).

861. Some compounds with re- drop only the vowel of the reduplication (111, a): as, reccidī, fell back; rettulī, brought back (see also 781); repperī, found; rettudī, beat back. Some perfects occur only in composition: as, percellō, knock down, perculī; cōntundō, smash to pieces, contudī; diffindō, split apart, diffidī; but fidī also occurs a couple of times as a simple verb.

953. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

972. (

a.

) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

801. A few verbs are deponent in the present system only: as, dēvortor, turn in, perfect dēvortī; revortor, turn back, perfect revortī, but with active perfect participle revorsus. Four are deponent in the perfect system only: fīdō, trust, fīdere, fīsus, and the compounds, cōnfīdō, diffīdō; and audeō, dare, audēre, ausus, gaudeō, feel glad, gaudēre, gāvīsus, and soleō, am used, solēre, solitus. Most impersonals in -ēre have both an active and a deponent form in the perfect system: see 815, 816.

262. -tāt-, N. -tā-s (202), is one of the very commonest suffixes.

211. -ōn-, N. -ō-: err-ōn-, N. err-ō, stroller (errā-re); especially in compounds: praed-ō, robber (praedā-rī); praec-ō for *praevocō, herald (prae-vocā-re); combib-ō, fellow-drinker (com-, √bib-, drink).

333. -to-, N. -tu-s: onus-to-, N. onus-tu-s, loaded (onus-); vetus-tu-s, full of years (*vetus-, year); iūs-tu-s, just (iūs-); hones-tu-s, honourable (*hones-); fūnes-tu-s, deadly (fūnes-). -ā-to-: barbā-tu-s, bearded (barbā-); dent-ātu-s, toothed (denti-); -ī-to-: aurī-tu-s, long-eared (auri-); -ū-to-: cornū-tu-s, horned (cornu-). -en-to-, N. -en-tu-s: cru-ento-, N. cru-entu-s, all gore (*cruenti-, *cruēre). As substantive, arg-entu-m (white metal), silver; flu-enta, plural, streams (fluenti-).

172. Certain consonant groups, notably those containing a liquid, are sometimes eased by the insertion of a vowel which develops between the consonants. This is called Anaptyxis (Greek ἀναπτύσσειν, unfold). It is the opposite of syncope of vowels (110, 111).

267. The suffixes -lo-, -lā-, or -cu-lo-, -cu-lā-, are used to form substantives with a Diminutive meaning. Diminutives may denote:

451. (2.) Stems in -o- with the nominative in -r or in -āius, -ēius, or -ōius are declined as follows:

627. A dozen adjectives with stems in -bri-, -cri-, or -tri-, have a distinctive form in -er for the masculine nominative singular; they are:

667. The first syllable of iste and ille is often short in the dramatists. Old forms of iste are: N. istus, G. istī, in istīmodī, D. F. istae. The initial i of iste and of istic (669), is sometimes not written: as, sta rēs (Cic.), stūc perīculum (Ter.). Old forms of ille are: N. olus (81); ollus or olle, &c.: as, D. S. or N. Pl. ollī, D. Pl. ollīs. G. illī, in illīmodī, D. F. illae. The dramatists have eccistam, eccilla, eccillud, eccillum, eccillam, for ecce istam, &c., and ellum, ellam, for em illum, &c.

846. The second person singular imperative active of dīcō, dūcō, and faciō, is usually dīc, dūc, and fac, respectively, though the full forms, dīce, &c., are also used, and are commoner in old Latin. Compounds of dūcō may have the short form: as, ēdūc. ingerō has once inger (Catull.). sciō has regularly the singular scī-tō, plural scī-tōte, rarely scī-te.

1149. The accusative is used in exclamations, sometimes merely to call attention to something, but generally with a predicate to express a judgment with emphasis.

158. qu before consonants or when final changed to c: as, relictus from the stem liqu-, leave (present, linquō, 938); ac, and, for *atc, by apocope from atque; nec, nor, by apocope from neque. See also *torctus (170, 3), quīnctus (170, 4).

546. (2) Neuter stems in -i- have no nominative suffix, and end in -e for -i- of the stem (107, b): as,

536. Examples of stems in -li-, with nominative -l, genitive -lis, are:

537. (a.) Examples of stems in -ri-, with nominative -r, genitive -ris, are:

119. Elision. Only rarely the first of two successive vowels is dropped: as, nūllus, no, for *ne-ūllus; likewise the final vowel of the first member of nominal compounds: as, multangulus, with many corners, for *multi-angulus (cf. multi-cavus, with many holes); flexanimus, heart-rending, for *flexi-animus (cf. flexi-pēs, with bent feet).

COMBINATION OF ADJACENT VOWELS.

2474. Hiatus between two words is much more common in old Latin than in writers of the classical period. The precise extent to which it is allowed by the early dramatists is matter of dispute. The following cases may be mentioned in which the Latin poets admit hiatus:

937. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

2499. Synizesis (Greek συνίζεσις, a settling together). Two vowels (or a vowel and a diphthong) which belong to different syllables sometimes coalesce so as to form one syllable. This is called Synizesis, and is especially common in the early dramatists. Examples are: me͡o, e͡adem, cu͡ius, aure͡i. See 117.

2503. Hardening. A vocalic i or u is sometimes made consonantal before another vowel: as, abi͡ete, ari͡ete (Verg.); cōnsili͡um (Hor.); omni͡a (Lucr.). See 117 and 83.

150. In a number of words f varies dialectically with h. In some of these f appears to have been original, in others h: as, old Latin fordeum, barley, for classical hordeum; old Latin haba, bean, for classical faba. The word fīlum, thread, appears as *hīlum in nihil, nothing, for *ne-hīlum.

153. (1.) v not infrequently disappeared between two like vowels: as, dītior, richer, for dīvitior; sīs (Cic. O. 154), for sī vīs (774); lātrīna, for lavatrīna; fīnīsse, for fīnīvisse; dēlēram, for dēlēveram; and later also in perfect forms in which the preceding and following vowel differed: as, amāsse, for amāvisse. The abbreviated forms of the perfects in -vī (890) were common in Cicero’s (O. 157) and Quintilian’s (1, 6, 17) time. v also disappeared before o in deorsum, seorsum.

890. (a.) In tenses formed from perfect stems in -āv-, -ēv-, and -ōv-, v is often dropped before -is-, -ēr-, or -er-, and the vowels thus brought together are contracted (153, 1): as,

591. In the genitive plural, a shorter form in -um is occasionally found: as, passum, steps (Plaut., Mart.); currum, chariots (Verg.); EXERCITVM. The quantity of the u and the origin of this ending are uncertain.

1004. (2 a.) Most verbs in -ēre have the perfect stem in -u- (874), and the perfect participle, when used, in -tus, which is usually preceded by a short i (910): as,

365. Denominative verb stems have present infinitives in -āre, -ēre, or -īre (-ārī, -ērī, or -īrī), and are formed from noun stems of all endings: as,

812. (3.) Some verbs have only the perfect system: so particularly coepī, have begun, began (120); and with a present meaning, ōdī, have come to hate, hate; and meminī, have called to mind, remember. The following is a synopsis of these three verbs:

813. A few forms of the present system of coepī occur in old writers: as, coepiō (Plaut.), coepiam (Caec., Cato), coepiat (Plaut.), coeperet (Ter.), and coepere (Plaut.); perfect once coēpit (Lucr.). ōsus sum or fuī (Plaut., C. Gracch., Gell.), exōsus sum (Verg., Sen., Curt., Gell.), and perōsus sum (Suet., Col., Quint.), are sometimes used as deponents. meminī is the only verb which has a perfect imperative active. ōdī and meminī have no passive.

863. The following verbs in -ere with a in the present stem, have long ē in the perfect stem (145):

601. Stems in -ē- of the first class are declined as follows:

602. fidēs is declined like rēs; it has once a genitive fidēs (Plaut.). For rēī, reī, or re͡i, and fidēī, fideī, or fide͡i, see 127, 4. diēs has rarely a genitive diēs (Enn.) or diī (Verg.). spēs has only the genitive and dative spe͡i in verse. A genitive or dative in is sometimes found: as, , diē, fidē.

121. Compensative lengthening. When certain groups of consonants are simplified by the dropping of a consonant, its time is absorbed by a preceding short vowel, which thereby becomes long. This is called Compensation. In many cases compensative lengthening is due to the loss of a preliterary sonant s (170, 2): as,

cānus, gray, from *casnus (cf. cas-cus, very old). See for other cases of this lengthening, 170, 5, quīnī, for *quincnī; 170, 6, īgnōscō, for *in-gnōscō.

122. Induced lengthening. Before certain groups of consonants short vowels have a tendency to become long: as,

(a.) The prefixes in- and con- before s or f lengthened their vowels in classical Latin (Cic. O. 159): as, īnsānus, mad; īnfēlīx, unhappy; cōnsuēvit, he grew used to; cōnfēcit, he accomplished. Elsewhere also the vowel before ns and nf appears to have been lengthened: as, fōns, fountain; pēnsus, weighty (Gell. 9, 6); forēnsis, forensic; cēnsor, censor; mēnsa, table; mēnsis, mouth; Valēns; Clēmēns; the o of īnsons, guiltless, however, is marked as short by the grammarian Probus.

(b.) A similar lengthening of the vowel before nc followed by t or s appears: as, ūnctus, anointed, from unguō (Gell. 9, 6); iūnctus, joined, from iungō (954), coniūnx, spouse, genit. coniugis (472); quīnctus, fifth, whence quīntus (170, 4) and quīnque, five, derive their ī; sānctus, hallowed.

(c.) Spellings like sIgnvm, sign (well supported in inscriptions), and dIgne, worthily (less well supported) show that i was at times lengthened before gn. The grammarian Priscian demands this lengthening for all vowels preceding the ending -gnus, -gna, -gnum.

(d.) A lengthened vowel before r followed by a consonant is also certain for some words like ōrdō, order; fōrma, shape.

(e.) Some speakers appear to have lengthened the vowel of prepositions like con-, sub-, ob-, in the compounds of iaciō (104, c); as ōbicit. This practice, which is disapproved by Gellius (4, 17), probably arose from the transfer by analogy of the quantity of the first syllable in forms like conieciant (940) to that of the shortened form. In the same way the occasional spelling CÓNIV́NX, spouse, for coniūnx, may owe its long ō to the analogy of cōiunx, CÓIVGI (170, 6).

(f.) Many verb stems ending in -g have a long vowel in the past participle before the suffix -to-: as, tēctus, covered, from tego (916); tāctus, touched, from tangō (925); pāctus, fixed, from pangō (925); fīctus, moulded, from fingō (954); pīctus, painted, from pingō. The evidence for ā in maximus is very scanty: one case of A with the apex (29, 3) in a faulty inscription.

(g.) Of the induced lengthenings enumerated above, only those given in (a.) (b.) (f.) seem to have been universal in classical Latin. The rest appear to have been local peculiarities, which, while making inroads upon the literary language, never gained full recognition.

123. (1.) Analogical lengthening. In noun stems in -o the stem vowel is lengthened in the genitive plural -ōrum (449, 462), by analogy to the stems in (435): as, servōrum, of slaves, like mēnsārum, of tables. For other cases see 122, e.

(2.) Metrical lengthening. On the lengthening of a vowel (or a syllable) under the influence of verse-ictus, see 2505.

SHORTENING.

124. A vowel originally long is regularly shortened in classical Latin before another vowel, even though an h intervene: as,

taceō, I am silent, from the stem tacē- (365); seorsum, apart, deorsum, downward, from sē(v)orsum, dē(v)orsum (153).

125. In simple words a diphthong occurs before a vowel only in one or two proper names: as, Gnaeus, Annaeus, in which it remains long, and in Greek words. But the diphthong ae of the prefix prae is sometimes shortened before a vowel: as, pra͝eacūtus; pra͝eeunt; pra͝ehibeō; hence prehendō for *prae-hendō. Sometimes it coalesces with a following vowel: as, pra͡e͡optāvīstī.

126. An increased tendency to shorten a long vowel before another vowel can be traced in the history of the language: thus, classical fuī, I was, for Plautus’s fūī (750); clueō, I am called, for Plautus’s clūeō; perfect pluit, it rained, for Varro’s plūit (cf. plūvit, 823, 947); pius, pious, for Ennius’s pīus; see also 765.

127. But even in classical Latin there are cases where a vowel before another vowel remains long: thus,

(1.) Regularly, the ī of fīō, I am made, except before -er-, as in fierem (788, 789).

(2.) In dīus, godly, for dīvus (153), and the old ablatives dīū, dīō, open sky (used only in the expression sub dīū, sub dīō, i.e. sub dīvō).

(3.) In the ending ēī of the genitive and dative sg. of stems in -ē- (601) when an i precedes: as, diēī, of a day, aciēī, of the battle line, but reī, of the thing, for older rēī.

(4.) It may be mentioned here that rēī is said to occur in verse 6 times (Plaut. G. 2, Lucr. G. 2, D. 2); reī 9 times (Plaut. G. 2, Ter. G. 4, D. 1, Juv. G. 1, Sulp. Apoll. G. 1); re͞i 27 times (Plaut. G. 2, D. 3, Enn. D. 1, Ter. G. 9, D. 8, Lucil. G. 1, D. 1, Lucr. G. 2). fidēī G. 3 times (Plaut., Enn., Lucr.); fideī 11 times (Enn. D. 1, Man. G. 2, D. 1, Sil. G. 4, D. 1, Juv. G. 2); fidēi 5 times (Ter. G. 1, D. 3, Hor. 1). ēī 35 times (Plaut. 18, Ter. 8, Lucr. 9); some 17 times (Plaut. 12, Ter. 2, German. 1, Ter. Maur. 2); ēi 23 times (Plaut. 11, Ter. 8, Lucil. 3, Cat. 1).

(5.) Gāius retains its ā before the vowel i: thus, Gāius (trisyllabic).

(6.) In the pronominal genitives in -ī̆us (618), the quantity of i varied. The older dramatists use ī; later, ī was shortened, but variations in its quantity seem to have continued until long after the end of the republic; Cicero, DO. 3, 183, measures illius; Quintilian 1, 5, 18 ūnīus; the grammarian Priscian prescribes -īus for all except alterius, which should always have i, and utrius, in which the i is common (30). In verse the i is often short, except in neutrīus; utriusque has always short i.

(7.) The penult is long in the endings -āī, -āīs, -ōī, -ōīs, and -ēī, -ēīs, from stems in -āio-, -ōio-, and -ēio- (458) or -iā- (437): as, Gāī, Bōī, Pōmpēī, plēbēī: Gāīs, Bōīs, Pompēīs, plēbēīs, Bāīs; aulāī, pictāī.

(8.) Dī̆ana has ĭ as often as ī. ohē has ŏ̄; ē̆heu has ĕ in comedy, otherwise ē.

(9.) In many Greek words a long vowel comes before another vowel; as, āēr, Aenēās, Mēdēa. But early importations from Greek followed the general rule and shortened the vowel: as, platĕa (πλατεῖα), balinĕum, balnĕum (βαλανεῖον).

128. A long vowel preceding unsyllabic or followed by a consonant is shortened: as, gaudeō for *gāudeō (cf. gāvīsus, 111); claudo for clāudō (cf. clāṷis, 111).

Similarly a long vowel (unless long by contraction: as, nūntius, 111, a, cōntiō) preceding a liquid or nasal followed by a consonant is shortened: as, syncopated ardus from āridus (111), habentem, from the stem habē-. For cases of induced lengthening of the vowel before n followed by certain consonants, see 122.

129. Iambic shortening. The law of iambic shortening (2470) produced a number of important changes: thus,

(1.) In old dramatic verse iambic words (⏑ –) often shorten the long vowel. The poets after Plautus and Terence preserve the long vowel.

(a.) Nouns; G. eri, boni, preti. D. cani, ero, malo. L. domi, heri. Ab. levi, manu, domo, bona, fide. Plural: N. fores, viri. D., Ab. bonis. Ac. foris, viros, bonas. (b.) Verbs: eo, volo, ago; ero, dabo; vides; loces; voles; dedi, dedin; roga, veni; later poets sometimes retain cave, vale, and vide. The vowel may also be shortened when -n (1503) is added and s is dropped before -n (170, 2): rogan, abin; viden is also retained by later poets.

(2.) In a few pyrrhic words (⏑ ⏑) in -i, which were originally iambic (⏑ –), the poets in all periods retained final at pleasure: these are,

mihī̆, tibī̆, sibī̆; ibī̆, ubī̆; also alicubī̆. The i of bi is always short in nēcubi and sīcubi, and usually in ubinam, ubivīs, and ubicumque; ibidem is used by the dramatists, ibīdem in hexameter. ubīque has always ī.

130. The following instances show that this law operated in prose speech also:

(1.) In iambic words of the ā- declension (432) the final of the nominative singular was shortened; hence *equā became equa, mare. From these iambic words short final -a spread so that all stems in -ā- shorten the final ā of the nom. sg. (434).

(2.) The final -a in the nominative plural of neuter nouns of the o- declension (446), which appears in trīgintā, thirty, was likewise shortened, first in iambic words like iuga, yokes, bona, goods, then everywhere (461).

(3.) This law explains the short final vowel in homo (2442) by the side of sermō (2437, c) and similar cases, like the adverbs modo, cito (2442), bene, male (2440). In the same way arose the short final o of the first person in conjugation (2443): as, volo, dabo, dīxero by the side of scrībō; so also viden for vidēn (129, 1; 170, 2).

(4.) Of imperatives only puta, used adverbially (2438, c), ave, have (805; Quint. i, 6, 21; but Martial scans havē) as a salutation and cave, used as an auxiliary (1711), show the short final vowel in classical Latin. Elsewhere the long vowel has been restored, as amā, monē (845).

(5.) According to this rule calēfaciō, malēdīcō changed to calefaciō, maledīcō.

131. A long final vowel is shortened when an enclitic is added to the word: as siquidem from ; quoque from quō.

132. A long vowel is regularly shortened, in the classical period, before final -t and -m and, in words of more than one syllable, also before final r and l.

Thus, soror, sister, for Plautus’s sorōr, from the stem sorōr- (487); ūtar, I may use, for Plautus’s ūtār (

cf.

ūtāris); bacchanal for Plautus’s bacchanāl; animal, exemplar from the stems animāl- (530) and exemplār- (537); but the long vowel is retained in the monosyllables fūr, thief, sōl, sun; pōnēbat, he placed, for Plautus’s pōnēbāt (cf. pōnēbās); iūbet, he commanded, for Plautus’s iūbēt; eram, I was, but erās; rēxerim, I may have ruled, but rēxerīs (877); -um in the genitive plural of -o- stems is for -ūm (462); mēnsam, table, for *mēnsām from the stem mensā-; rem, from rē- (rēs), spem from spē- (spēs).

TRANSFER OF QUANTITY.

133. (1.) In a few cases the length of the vowel has been transferred to the following consonant, the length of which is then indicated by doubling it (81): as, littera for lītera, LEITERAS; Iuppiter for Iūpiter; parricīda for pāri-cīda, murder of a member of the same clan (*pāro-, member of a clan, Doric πᾶός, a relative); cuppa for cūpa, barrel. The legal formula sī pāret, if it appear, was vulgarly pronounced sī parret (Festus).

(2.) Since the doubled unsyllabic i () between vowels (23; 166, 9; 153, 2) is commonly written single, the vowel preceding it is often erroneously marked long: as, āiō wrongly for aiō, i.e. ai̭i̭ō, I say; māior wrongly for maior, i.e. mai̭i̭or, greater; pēior wrongly for peior, i.e. pei̭i̭or, worse; ēius, of him, cūius, of whom, hūius, of him, all wrongly for eius, cuius, huius i.e. ei̭i̭us, cui̭i̭us, huii̭us (153, 2). In all these words the first syllable was long but not the vowel.

VARIATIONS OF QUANTITY.

134. (1.) In some foreign proper names and in a very few Latin words the quantity of a vowel varied. Vergil has Sȳchaeus and Sychaeus within six verses; also Āsia and Asia, Lavīnium and Lāvīnius; so also glōmus (Lucr.), glomus (

Hor.

); cōturnīx (Plaut., Lucr.), coturnīx (Ov.).

(2.) Sometimes such variations in vowel quantity are only apparent: thus, the occasional long final of the active infinitive (darē, prōmerē) has probably a different origin from the usual . For metrical lengthening, see 2505.

QUANTITATIVE VOWEL GRADATION.

135. The same stem often shows a long vowel in some of its forms and a short vowel in others. In most cases these variations of quantity were not developed on Latin soil but inherited from a much earlier period. Such old inherited differences in vowel quantity are called quantitative vowel gradation.

(1.) Instances of this are prō for *prōd (149; cf. prōdesse) and pro- (Greek πρό); and ne- in nescius; the couples regō, I rule, and rēxī; vehō, I draw, vēxī; veniō, I come, vēnī, where the long vowel is characteristic of the perfect stem (862); vocō, I call, and vōx, voice; regō, I rule, and rēx, ruler; legō, I read, and lēx, bill; sedeō, I sit, and sēdēs, seat; fidēs, confidence, and fīdō, I trust; dux (cf. ducis), leader, and dūcō, I lead, where verb and noun are differentiated by the quantity of the root vowel; and many others.

(2.) Sometimes the reduction of the vowel in certain forms amounts to complete loss, as in the adverbial ending -is- in magis (346, 363) compared with the comparative suffix -ios, -iōs (Nom. -ior, Genit. -iōris); in the oblique cases of the stem carōn- (nomin. sg. carō, 497), where the suffix becomes -n- (545), genitive car-n-is; in the suffix -ter, which becomes -tr- in all cases but the nom. sg. (pater, patris, etc., 470, 487); in the feminine -tr-ī-c- to the suffix -tor-; but the nom. sing. Caecīlis (465) for Caecīlios is probably due to syncope.

QUALITATIVE VOWEL CHANGES.

136. (1.) i before an r which goes back to an earlier voiced s (154) was changed to e: as, cineris, of ashes, for *cinisis, from the stem cinis (491); Faleriī, for *Falisiī, cf. Falis-cus; (formed like Etrūria, for *Etrūsia, cf. Etrūs-cī).

(2.) In the nominative singular of compounds like iūdex, judge (from iūs and dīcere), comes, companion (from com, with, and īre, go), the i of the second member of the compounds is changed to e (470) after the analogy of words like artifex, artisan, etc. (107, d).

137. e before -gn- became i: as, īlignus, from the stem īlec- (cf. īlex).

138. e before the guttural nasal (62) followed by a guttural mute was changed to i: as, septingentī, from septem; singulī, from the stem sem- in semel (for the assimilation of m see 164, 3); obtingō (925), I attain, for *óbtengō (104, c) from *ob-tangō (104, e).

139. A similar change took place in the group -enl- which became first -inl- and then -ill-: as, *signilum, diminutive of sīgnum (for ī, see 122, c), first changed by syncope (111) from *signilum to *sign̥lum, then to *sigenlum (172, 3), then to *siginlum, and finally to sigillum.

140. o before nc became u: as, homunculus, manikin for *homonculus, from the stem homon- (485); nūncupāre, name, for *nōn-cupāre (nōn- for nōm- (164, 3) = syncopated nōmen); hunc, him, for *honc, from hom-ce (662).

141. o before l followed by any consonant save l was changed to u: as, cultus, tilled, for *coltus, from colere; multa, fine, for old Latin molta. But o before ll is retained: as, collis, hill.

142. e before guttural l (60) was changed to o: as, solvō, I undo, from *seluō (se-, as in se-cordia, luō = Greek λύω); culmen, top, for *celmen, from *cellō in ex-cellō; volō, I wish, for *velō; but e is preserved before dental l (60): as in velle, velim (773). Before l followed by any consonant save l this o changes to u (141): as, vult.

143. In a number of words, notably in voster, your, vorsus, turned, vortex, eddy, and votāre, forbid, the forms with o were replaced, about the second century B.C. by forms with e: as, vester, versus, vertex, vetāre (Quint. 1, 7, 25).

ASSIMILATION.

144. In a few cases a vowel is influenced by the vowel of a neighbouring syllable: as,

nisi, unless, for *nesi; iīs, for eīs, to them (671, 674); diī, diīs, gods, for deī, deīs (450); nihil, nothing, for *nehil; homō, man, for *hemō (cf. nēmō, from ne-hemō, 118); see also 104, d; 105, i.

QUALITATIVE VOWEL GRADATION.

145. The same stem often shows different vowels in different forms. In most of these cases this difference was inherited from a very early period and continued in the Latin. Such old inherited variation of the quality of the stem-vowel is called qualitative vowel gradation. The qualitative variations may be accompanied by quantitative changes (135).

Often the verb and the noun are thus distinguished by different vowels: as, tegō, I cover, and toga, a garment, toga; precor, I beg, and procus, suitor, cf. English to sing and a song, to bind, and a bond. The different tenses of some verbs show a like gradation: as, capiō, I take, cēpī; faciō, I make, fēcī, cf. English I sing, I sang; I bring, I brought. The same occurs in derivation: as doceō, I teach, by the side of decet; noceō, I harm, by the side of nex (nec-s). The two vowels which occur most frequently in such gradation are e and o: as in stems in -o-, domine, dominus (for dominos); as variable vowel (824); genos (genus, 107, c) in the nom. sg. by the side of *genes- in the oblique cases (gen. generis for *genesis, 154); honōs by the side of hones- in hones-tus; modus, measure, for *modos (originally a neuter -s- stem like genus (487, 491), but transferred later to the -o- declension), by the side of modes- in modes-tus, seemly. See 187.

(B.) CONSONANT CHANGE.

146. In a number of words which belong more or less clearly to the stem of the pronoun quo- (681), cu- (157), the initial c has disappeared before u: as,

uter, which of the two, ubĭ, where, unde, whence (711). For the conjunction ut, utī, that, connection with this pronominal stem is much more doubtful. The c- appears in the compounds with and nē̆: as, sī-cubī (cf. sī-quidem, sī-quandō), sī-cunde, nē-cubi, ne-cunde, ne-cuter.

147. d varies in a few words with l: as old Latin dacruma, tear, for later lacrima; dingua, tongue, for later lingua; odor, smell, by the side of oleō, I smell.

148. Very rarely, before labials, final d of the preposition ad varies with r: as, old Latin arfuērunt, they were present, for later adfuērunt (2257); arvorsum, against, for advorsum. The only instances of this in classical Latin are arbiter, umpire, and arcēssō (970), I summon, which shows r before a guttural.

149. (1.) Final d after a long vowel disappeared in classical Latin: thus, in the ablative singular of -ā- and -o- stems (426), and in the ablative-accusative forms mēd, tēd, sēd (648). The prepositions prō and (1417) originally ended in -d which is still seen in prōdesse, be of advantage, prōd-īre, go forth; sēd-itiō, a going-apart, sedition. According to the grammarians, the negative haud preserved its d before vowels, but lost it before consonants (1450).

(2.) Late inscriptions confuse final -d and -t: as FECID (729), ALIVT for aliud. But in very old Latin -d in the third person singular seems to be the remnant of a secondary ending (cf. the Greek distinction of primary -ται and secondary -το).

150. In a number of words f varies dialectically with h. In some of these f appears to have been original, in others h: as, old Latin fordeum, barley, for classical hordeum; old Latin haba, bean, for classical faba. The word fīlum, thread, appears as *hīlum in nihil, nothing, for *ne-hīlum.

151. h being a weak sound (58) was often lost between two like vowels, especially in rapid utterance: as, nīl, nothing, prēndere, take, vēmēns, rapid, by the side of nihil, prehendere, vehemēns; and always nēmō, nobody, for *ne-hemō, no man.

152. In some words h between two vowels is not original, but goes back to a guttural aspirate gh. Before consonants this guttural appears: as, vehō, I draw, vectus (953) from a stem vegh-, trahō, I drag, tractus (953) from a stem tragh-.

153. (1.) v not infrequently disappeared between two like vowels: as, dītior, richer, for dīvitior; sīs (Cic. O. 154), for sī vīs (774); lātrīna, for lavatrīna; fīnīsse, for fīnīvisse; dēlēram, for dēlēveram; and later also in perfect forms in which the preceding and following vowel differed: as, amāsse, for amāvisse. The abbreviated forms of the perfects in -vī (890) were common in Cicero’s (O. 157) and Quintilian’s (1, 6, 17) time. v also disappeared before o in deorsum, seorsum.

(2.) Old and original unsyllabic i (82; 83) disappeared everywhere between vowels. Wherever unsyllabic i appears between vowels it represents double i̭i̭, and is the result of the assimilation of g to (166, 9), or d to (166, 9), or of the combination of two ’s: as in ei-i̭us, quoi̭-i̭us (eius, quoius = cuius, 688). See 23; 166, 9. In all these cases the first joined to the preceding vowel (83) formed with it a diphthong, and the syllable is thus long (133, 2).

(3.) The combinations of unsyllabic (83) with the vowel u and of unsyllabic with the vowel i were avoided in classical Latin; see 52.

(4.) In composition, unsyllabic (82) after a consonant became syllabic in quoniam, since, for quomi̭am (164, 5), and etiam, also, for eti̭am (both compounds with iam).

154. In early Latin s between two vowels was voiced (75), and in the fourth century B.C. this voiced s changed into r. According to Cicero (Fam. 9, 21, 2) L. Papīrius Crassus, consul in 336 B.C., changed his family name Papīsius to Papīrius. Old inscriptions show frequently s for r: as, ASA, altar, AVSELII. This change of intervocalic s to r plays an important part in declension, conjugation, and derivation: as,

Nominative iūs, right, genitive iūris; spērō, I hope, derived from spēs; nefārius, wicked, from nefās; gerō, I carry, from a stem ges- which appears in ges-sī, ges-tus (953); erō, I shall be, from the stem es- in esse; the subjunctive ending -sem in es-sem appears as -rem after vowels: as, stārem; the infinitive ending (894, 895) -se in es-se appears as -re after vowels: as, legere, for *legese, to read, stāre, for *stāse, to stand. Where all oblique cases show -r- and only the nominative singular -s, the latter is sometimes changed to -r by analogy: as, arbor, tree, honor, honour, for original arbōs, honōs, by analogy to the oblique cases arboris, arborī, honōris, honōrī, etc. (487, 488). The final -s of the prefix dis- follows this rule: as, dir-imō, I take apart, for *dis-emō; but an initial s- of the second member of a compound remains unchanged: as, dē-sinō, I stop.

155. Wherever intervocalic s is found in classical Latin it is not original, but the result (a.) of earlier -ns-: as, formōsus, handsome, for formōnsus (63); (b.) of earlier -ss- (170, 7): as, ūsus for *ūssus, use (159); causa, thing, for caussa (Quint. 1, 7, 20); or (c.) it occurs in borrowed words like asinus, ass. (d.) There are a few words in which an r in a neighbouring syllable seems to have prevented the change: as miser, miserable (173).

156. Before the o described in 142 qu changed to c: as, incola, inhabitant, for *inquola, from *inquela; the stem quel- appears in in-quil-īnus, lodger.

157. As v before u (107, c), so qu was not tolerated before u, but changed to c.

Hence when, about the beginning of our era, the o of quom, when, sequontur, they followed, changed to u (107, c), they became cum, secuntur; thus equos but ecus, horse (452); reliquom but RELICVM, the rest; loquor, I speak, but locūtus (978). Much later, in the second century of our era, the grammarians restored the qu before u by analogy to those forms in the paradigm in which qu came before other vowels: as, sequuntur for secuntur by analogy to sequor, sequeris, sequitur, sequimur, sequimini, etc.; equus, equum, for ecus, ecum, by analogy to equī, equō, eque, equōrum, equīs, equōs.

158. qu before consonants or when final changed to c: as, relictus from the stem liqu-, leave (present, linquō, 938); ac, and, for *atc, by apocope from atque; nec, nor, by apocope from neque. See also *torctus (170, 3), quīnctus (170, 4).

159. When in the process of early word formation a t was followed by another t, the combination tt, unless followed by r, changed to ss: as, obsessus, besieged, sat upon, for *obsettus, from *obsed-tus (cf. sedeō). After long vowels, nasals, and liquids this double ss was simplified to s (170, 7): as, ūsus from *ūt-tus, used (cf. ūtor); scānsus, climbed, from *scant-tus for *scandtus (cf. scandō).

In this way arose a suffix -sus (906, 912) for the past participle of verbs ending in a dental, and this spread to other verbs (912): as mānsus, stayed, from maneō (1000), pulsus, pushed, from pellō (932). The regular participles of these two verbs still appear in the derivative verbs mantāre and pultāre, which presuppose the past participles *mantus and *pultus (371). If the double tt was followed by r it changed to st: as, assestrīx from *assettrīx, while *assettor changed to assessor.

160. But wherever the combination tt arose in historical times it remained unchanged: as, attineō; cette, syncopated for cé-d(i)te, i.e. the particle ce (93, 3) which is here proclitic, and the imperative date, give.

161. Initial dv (dṷ) changed to b, unless the v () was converted into the corresponding vowel: as, bis, twice, for *dṷis (cf. duo); bidēns for *dṷidens, by the side of old Latin duidēns with vocalic u; bonus, good, for dṷonus, by the side of trisyllabic duonus; bellum, war, for *dṷellum, by the side of duellum with vocalic u; bēs, two thirds, for *dṷēs (2427). Cicero (O. 153) notes that the change of duellum to bellum affected even the proper name Duellius (name of the admiral who won the naval victory over the Carthaginians in 260

B.

C.) which was changed to Bellius. Plautus always scans dṷellum disyllabic with synizesis (2503).

CHANGES OF CONSONANT GROUPS.

162. Many groups of consonants undergo changes in order to facilitate their pronunciation in rapid speech. These changes involve (a.) Assimilation of consonants; (b.) the development of consonantal glides; (c.) the loss of one member of the group; and (d.) the development of a vowel between the consonants.

ASSIMILATION.

163. Of two successive consonants belonging to different syllables (175), the first is, as a rule, assimilated to the second (regressive assimilation), rarely the second to the first (progressive assimilation). A consonant may be assimilated, either entirely or partially, to another consonant.

Assimilation is very common in prepositions prefixed to a verb.

164. Partial assimilation. (1.) A voiced mute before an unvoiced consonant became unvoiced: as, rēx, king, for *rēgs (cf. rēgis); rēxī, I guided, for *rēgsī (cf. regō); rēctus, guided, for *rēgtus; scrīpsī, I wrote, for *scrībsī (cf. scribō); scrīptus,

written

, for *scribtus; trāxī, I dragged, for

*trāghsī;

tractus, dragged, for *traghtus (152). The spelling did not always conform to this pronunciation: as, urbs, city, pronounced urps (54) but spelled with b by analogy to the oblique cases urbis, urbem, etc.; obtineō, I get, pronounced optineō.

LENGTHENING.

954. (b.) With the present stem in a nasalized root followed by -o|e-

(831).

472. (a.) Examples of stems in -g-, with nominative -x, genitive -gis, are:

940. (d.) With the present stem in -io|e- (836).

916. (2.) Some perfect participles formed from consonant roots have a long root vowel, sometimes even when the vowel of the parallel present stem is short (135, 1; 122, f): as,

925. (b.) With the present stem in a nasalized root followed by -o|e- (831).

449. (1.) Stems in -o- with the nominative in -us or -um are declined as follows:

462. In the common genitive plural -ōrum, the -o- of the stem is lengthened (123). A genitive plural in -ū̆m (or, after v, in -ŏ̄m) is common from dīvos, dīvus, and deus, god; from dēnārius, denar, modius, peck, nummus, money, sēstertius, sesterce, and talentum, talent, with numerals; and from cardinals and distributives (641): as, dīvŏ̄m, divū̆m, deū̆m; mīlle sēstertiŭm; ducentū̆m; bīnŭm. The u was originally long (132); but it was shortened before 100 A.D.

435. Stems in -ā- are declined as follows:

2505. Diastolé (Greek διαστολή, a drawing asunder). A syllable which in verse of the classical period is generally short is sometimes used as long for metrical convenience. The syllable so employed generally falls under the verse-ictus, and in most cases is immediately followed by the principal caesura, or by a pause in the sense. Examples are:

SHORTENING.

365. Denominative verb stems have present infinitives in -āre, -ēre, or -īre (-ārī, -ērī, or -īrī), and are formed from noun stems of all endings: as,

153. (1.) v not infrequently disappeared between two like vowels: as, dītior, richer, for dīvitior; sīs (Cic. O. 154), for sī vīs (774); lātrīna, for lavatrīna; fīnīsse, for fīnīvisse; dēlēram, for dēlēveram; and later also in perfect forms in which the preceding and following vowel differed: as, amāsse, for amāvisse. The abbreviated forms of the perfects in -vī (890) were common in Cicero’s (O. 157) and Quintilian’s (1, 6, 17) time. v also disappeared before o in deorsum, seorsum.

750. A subjunctive present fuam, fuās, fuat, and fuant occurs in old Latin; and an imperfect forem, forēs, foret, and forent, in all periods. The present infinitive fore, to get to be, become, has a future meaning. Old forms in the perfect system are FVVEIT (29, 1), FVET; fūit, fūimus, fūerim, fūerit, fūerint, fūisset (Plaut., Enn.). fuī has no perfect participle or supine.

823. (2.) Some verbs have more than one form of the perfect stem: as,

947. (2 c.) The following verbs in -ere (367) with the present stem in -o|e- (837, 840), have the perfect stem in -u- or in -v- of the theme (865), and the perfect participle, when used, in -tus:

765. Old forms are: īerō (Plaut.), īī, īerant (Ter.), once each (126); in an inscription of 186 B.C., ADIESET, ADIESENT, ADIESE, and of 146 B.C., REDIEIT (29, 2; 132); INTERIEISTI. A future in -iet, as trānsiet (Sen.), is late and rare.

788. fīō, become, and factus sum supplement each other: in the present system, the passive of faciō, make, except the gerundive, faciendus, is not used, fīō, &c., taking its place; in the perfect system, only factus sum, &c., is used.

789. In fīō, &c., ī represents an older ei, seen in FEIENT (inscr. 45 B.C.). The infinitive fierī for fierei owes its passive ending to analogy; the active form fiere occurs twice (Enn., Laev.). The vowel before -er- in fierem, &c., and fierī, is sometimes long in the dramatists, where a cretic (- ⏑ -) is required, but otherwise always short.

601. Stems in -ē- of the first class are declined as follows:

618. Nine adjectives or adjective pronouns have the pronoun form -ī̆us in the genitive singular and in the dative singular, for masculine, feminine, and neuter alike; they are the following:

458. Proper names ending in -āius, -ēius, or -ōius have -āī, -ēī, or -ōī in the genitive and vocative singular and nominative plural, and -āīs, -ēīs, or -ōīs in the dative and ablative plural (127, 7): as,

437. The genitive sometimes ends (1.) in -āī in poetry: as, aulāī, of the hall; pīctāī, embroidered; (2.) in -ās: as, molās, of a mill. This genitive is rare, but was always kept up in the word familiās with pater or māter, sometimes with fīlius or fīlia: pater familiās, the goodman, māter familiās, the housewife. But pater familiae, or in the plural patrēs familiārum, is equally common.

2470. A long syllable, preceded by a short monosyllable or by a short initial syllable, and immediately preceded or followed by the verse-ictus, may be shortened: as, ét hŭnc, dómŏ mē, ad ŭxṓrem, volŭntā́te.

1503. (2.) Yes or No questions are usually introduced by one of the interrogative particles -ne or -n, nōnne, num, an, anne.

432. Stems in -ā- include substantives and adjectives; both substantives and adjectives are feminine.

434. The nominative of stems in -ā- ends in the shortened stem vowel -a.

446. Stems in -o- include substantives and adjectives, masculine or neuter.

461. In the nominative plural masculine, -ei sometimes occurs (465): as, nātei geminei, twins born (Plaut.); -eis or -īs is rare (465): as, Sardeis, Sardians; oculīs, eyes; not infrequently hīsce, these here (Plaut.); masculine stems in -io- have rarely a single : as, fīlī, sons. For -āī, -ēī, or -ōī, see 458. The nominative and accusative plural of neuters ended anciently in (130, 2). But was shortened at an early period.

2442. (a.) Final o is short in the nominatives ego, duo. It is sometimes shortened in homo (130, 3) and in the nominative of other stems in -n- (484, 485): as, mentio, Nāso, virgo. o is regularly short in endo, in the ablatives cito and modo, used as adverbs, and in many other words in late poetry: as, īlico, immo, ergo, quando, octo, &c.; very rarely in the ablative of the gerund.

2440. (a.) Final e is long in cases of nouns with stems in -ē- (596), in adverbs from stems in -o-, and in the imperative singular active of verbs in -ēre: as,

2443. (b.) Before Ovid, o of the present indicative is regularly long. It is shortened only in the following words (130, 3): in

805. (1.) Some verbs have only a few forms: as,

1711. (5.) The subjunctive is often coordinated with the imperative cavē̆, cavētō, cavēte, beware, used in the sense of (1585): as,

845. The imperative stem of verbs in -ere, and of verbs in -āre, -ēre, and -īre, is the same as that of the indicative: as,

487. (2.) Stems in -r- and -s- are declined as follows:

530. Imparisyllabic stems in -i- are declined as follows:

537. (a.) Examples of stems in -ri-, with nominative -r, genitive -ris, are:

877. In the perfect subjunctive, long ī is found before the person endings -s, -mus, and -tis, some 25 times, as follows: -īs, 18 times (Plaut. 3, Pac., Enn., Ter., Hor., Tib., Sen., inscr., once each, Ov. 8), -īmus, 4 times (Plaut. 3, Ter. 1), -ītis, 3 times (Plaut. 2, Enn. 1).

TRANSFER OF QUANTITY.

VARIATIONS OF QUANTITY.

QUANTITATIVE VOWEL GRADATION.

149. (1.) Final d after a long vowel disappeared in classical Latin: thus, in the ablative singular of -ā- and -o- stems (426), and in the ablative-accusative forms mēd, tēd, sēd (648). The prepositions prō and (1417) originally ended in -d which is still seen in prōdesse, be of advantage, prōd-īre, go forth; sēd-itiō, a going-apart, sedition. According to the grammarians, the negative haud preserved its d before vowels, but lost it before consonants (1450).

862. (2.) Some verbs in -ere have a perfect stem consisting of a consonant root with a long vowel (135, 1): as,

346. The comparative suffix is -iōs-, which becomes in the singular, nominative masculine and feminine, -ior (154; 132), neuter nominative and accusative, -ius (107, c); in all other cases -iōr- (154).

363. If the comparison of the adjective has peculiarities, they are retained in the adverb likewise: as, bene, well, melius, optimē; male, ill, peius, pessimē; multum, much, plūs, plūrimum; mātūrē, betimes, mātūrius, mātūrissimē (Cic., Plin.), or mātūrrimē (Cic., Caes., Sall., Tac.). ōcius, swifter, no

positive,

ōcissimē. minus, less, is formed by the nominal suffix -es- (236), from √min- (minuō); for magis, more, see 135, 2. In poetry magis sometimes becomes mage, as if neuter of an adjective in -i-.

497. (a.) Stems in -ōn- drop -n- in the nominative; stems in -in- for -on- drop -n-, and end in : as,

545. For carō, F., flesh, carnis (Ab. , usually -e, no G. Pl.) see 135, 2. supellēx, F., furniture, supellēctilis (Ab.  or -e, no Pl.), has the nominative formed from a different stem from that of the other cases (401).

470. Many consonant stems have a double form: one form used in the nominative singular (neuters have this form in the accusative also), another form in the other cases: as,

465. Other case forms are found in inscriptions as follows:

QUALITATIVE VOWEL CHANGES.

154. In early Latin s between two vowels was voiced (75), and in the fourth century B.C. this voiced s changed into r. According to Cicero (Fam. 9, 21, 2) L. Papīrius Crassus, consul in 336 B.C., changed his family name Papīsius to Papīrius. Old inscriptions show frequently s for r: as, ASA, altar, AVSELII. This change of intervocalic s to r plays an important part in declension, conjugation, and derivation: as,

491. (b.) Examples of stems in -s-, or -r- for -s-, with nominative -s, genitive -ris, are:

164. Partial assimilation. (1.) A voiced mute before an unvoiced consonant became unvoiced: as, rēx, king, for *rēgs (cf. rēgis); rēxī, I guided, for *rēgsī (cf. regō); rēctus, guided, for *rēgtus; scrīpsī, I wrote, for *scrībsī (cf. scribō); scrīptus,

written

, for *scribtus; trāxī, I dragged, for

*trāghsī;

tractus, dragged, for *traghtus (152). The spelling did not always conform to this pronunciation: as, urbs, city, pronounced urps (54) but spelled with b by analogy to the oblique cases urbis, urbem, etc.; obtineō, I get, pronounced optineō.

485. (c.) Examples of stems in -n-, with nominative , genitive -inis, are:

662. The stem of hīc is ho-, hā-; to most of its cases a demonstrative -c for -ce is attached. The masculine and feminine nominative singular and nominative and accusative neuter plural take an -i-: hīc for *ho-i-ce (108, a); haec for ha-i-ce (96). hunc, hanc, are for *hom-ce, *ham-ce. For the quantity of the first syllable of huius, see 153, 2; of hoc, 171, 1.

773.

ASSIMILATION.

671. The determinative pronoun is, that, the aforesaid, the one, is declined as follows:

674. Other case forms of is are found in inscriptions, as follows:

450. deus, god, is declined as follows: N. deus, G. deī, D. and Ab. deō, Ac. deum. Plural: N. deī, di͡i, commonly , G. deōrum or deŭm, D. and Ab. deīs, di͡is, commonly dīs, Ac. deōs.

QUALITATIVE VOWEL GRADATION.

824. The final vowel of a tense stem is said to be variable when it is -o- in some of the forms, and -u-, -e-, or -i- in others.

187. A root sometimes has two or more forms: as, fīd- (for feid-), foed-, fid-, trust; gen-, gn-, sire; tol, tl, bear; see 135, 145.

(B.) CONSONANT CHANGE.

681. The stem qui-, or quo-, quā-, is used in three ways: as a relative, who, which; as an interrogative, who? which? what? as an indefinite, any.

157. As v before u (107, c), so qu was not tolerated before u, but changed to c.

711. Adverbs derived from pronoun stems often correspond with each other in meaning and form; some of the commonest correlatives are the following:

2257. The dative of the gerund is used chiefly by old and late writers, and is confined in the best prose to a few special phrases.

970. (d.) With the present stem in -sso|e- (375).

426. The ablative singular of -ā- and -o- stems ended anciently in -ād and -ōd respectively: as, PRAIDAD, PREIVATOD; that of consonant stems in -īd: as, AIRID, COVENTIONID. But -d is almost entirely confined to inscriptions and disappeared early (149).

648. In old Latin, the ablative is mēd, tēd, sēd (426), which forms are also used irrationally for the accusative. But by Terence’s time the -d was no longer used (143).

1417. The ablative is accompanied by the following prepositions:

1450. A shorter form, hau, occurs often in old Latin, and a few times in the classical period: as, heic est sepulcrum hau pulcrum pulcrai fēminae, CIL. I, 1007, 2, on the burial site of a woman, here is the site not sightly of a sightly dame. In Plautus it is juxtaposed with sciō, making hausciō, i.e. nesciō.

729. In inscriptions, -d sometimes stands for -t (149, 2) in the third person singular, and sometimes -t is not used: as, FECID, made, for fēcit; DEDE, gave, for dedēt or dedit. And other forms of the third person plural of the indicative active are sometimes used: as, Pisaurian DEDROT, DEDRO (with syncope, 111) for dederunt, gave; EMERV, bought, for ēmērunt; once DEDERI, probably for dedēre (856).

953. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

774. volo for volō is rare (2443). volt and voltis became vult and vultis about the time of Augustus (141). For volumus, see 142; velim, &c., 841; vellem, &c., velle, 166, 8. sīs, an thou wilt, is common for sī vīs

(Plaut.,

Ter., Cic., Liv.). sultis, an ‘t please you, is used by Plautus for sī voltis.

890. (a.) In tenses formed from perfect stems in -āv-, -ēv-, and -ōv-, v is often dropped before -is-, -ēr-, or -er-, and the vowels thus brought together are contracted (153, 1): as,

688. Old forms of the genitive singular are quoius, and of the dative quoiei, quoiī, or quoi, also in derivatives of quī or quis. A genitive plural quōiūm is old and rare. The dative and ablative plural is sometimes quīs from quo-, quā-. A nominative plural interrogative and indefinite quēs is rare (Pacuv.).

894. The active infinitive has the ending -re in the present, and -isse in the perfect: as,

895. For -rē in old Latin, see 134, 2. The infinitive of fīō, become, ends in -rī, fī̆erī, with a passive ending (789); twice fīere (Enn. Laev.). An older form for -re is -se, found in esse, to be, ēsse, to eat, and their compounds. For velle, to wish (mālle, nōlle), see 166, 8. In the perfect, , go, sometimes has -iisse in compounds (766), and in poetry, petō, go to, has rarely petiisse.

488. Many stems in -r- ended originally in -s-, which became -r- between two vowels, and in some words in the nominative also (154): as, flōs, M., flower, G. *flōsis, flōris; honōs, M., honour, G. honōris, N. honor.

159. When in the process of early word formation a t was followed by another t, the combination tt, unless followed by r, changed to ss: as, obsessus, besieged, sat upon, for *obsettus, from *obsed-tus (cf. sedeō). After long vowels, nasals, and liquids this double ss was simplified to s (170, 7): as, ūsus from *ūt-tus, used (cf. ūtor); scānsus, climbed, from *scant-tus for *scandtus (cf. scandō).

173. (1.) To avoid the repetition of the same liquid in successive syllables l is sometimes changed to r: as, caeruleus, sky-blue, for *caeluleus, from caelum; Parīlia, by the side of Palīlia, from Palēs; the suffix -clo- appears as -cro- after an l: as, lavācrum, bath, simulācrum, image (241); the suffix -āli- under like conditions changes to -āri-; as, molāre, of a mill (313), but augurāle, of an augur.

452. -us and -um were originally -os and -om. But -us was used in the earliest times, -um somewhat later, and both became prevalent between 218 and 55 B.C. (107, c). After u or v, however, the -os and -om were retained till toward 50 A.D. (107, c); also after qu; but -cus and -cum often displaced -quos and -quom (157): as, equos, equom, or ecus, ecum, horse; antīquos, antīquom, or antīcus, antīcum, ancient. In the vocative -e was always used, and is retained by Plautus in puere, thou boy.

978. (a

.)

With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

938. (b.) With the present stem in a nasalized root followed by -o|e- (831).

906. The perfect participle suffix is -to-, nominative -tus, -ta, -tum, which is often changed to -so-, nominative -sus, -sa, -sum (912).

912. Roots in -d- and -t- change -to- to -so-, before which the dentals change to s (159). After long vowels, nasals, and liquids the double ss is simplified to s: as, fossus, dug, but dīvīsus, divided; vorsus or versus, turned. The suffix -so- is also found with some roots in -l-, -m-, or -r- and a few others: as, pulsus (159).

1000. (1 b.) The following verbs in -ēre have the perfect stem in -s- (868), and the perfect participle, when used, in -sus (912):

932. (c.) With the present stem in -ro|e-, or -lo|e- (833).

371. Many verbs in -tāre (-sāre), or -tārī (-sārī), express frequent, intense, or sometimes attempted action. These are called Frequentatives or Intensives; they are formed from perfect participle stems; but stems in -ā-to- become -i-to-: as,

2427. (2.) Fractions with 12 or its multiples as a denominator are expressed in business language by the parts of an ās: thus,

2503. Hardening. A vocalic i or u is sometimes made consonantal before another vowel: as, abi͡ete, ari͡ete (Verg.); cōnsili͡um (Hor.); omni͡a (Lucr.). See 117 and 83.

CHANGES OF CONSONANT GROUPS.

ASSIMILATION.

175. A word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. The last syllable is called the Ultima; the last syllable but one is called the Penult; the last syllable but two is called the Antepenult.

(2.) An unvoiced mute before a voiced consonant became voiced. The prepositions ob, ab, sub, for *op, *ap, *sup, owe their final b to their frequent position before voiced mutes: as, obdūcō, abdīcō, sub dīvō. The forms *op (still preserved in op-eriō, I close, 1019) *ap (preserved in ap-erio, I open, 1019; cf. Greek ἀπό) and *sup (preserved in the adjective supīnus, supine) were then crowded out by ob, ab, and sub.

(3.) Nasals changed their place of articulation to that of the following consonant. Thus, dental n before the labials p and b became labial m: as, imbibō, I drink in, impendeō, I hang over. Labial m before the gutturals c and g became guttural n (62): as, prīnceps, leader, singulī, severally (the original labials appear in prīmus, semel (138)); hunc for *homce (662). Labial m before the dentals t, d, s became dental n: as, cōnsecrō, I consecrate, from com (cum) and sacrō; tantus, so great, from tam; quondam, once, from quom; tandem, at length, from tam. But sometimes the etymological spelling was retained: as, quamdiū, as long as. But m does not change to n before t or s in the inflection of verbs and nouns, where mt, ms develop into mpt, mps (167): as, sūmptus, sūmpsī, from sūmō.

(4.) p and b before n changed to m: as, somnus, sleep, for *sop-nus (cf. sopor); omnis, all, for *op-nis (cf. opēs); Samnium, for *Sabnium (cf. Sabīnī).

(5.) m before unsyllabic i () became n: as, quoniam (with vocalic i; 153, 4), since, for *quoni̭am from quom iam (1882); coniungō, I join together, for *comiungō.

(6.) c between n and l, and before m, changed to g: as, angulus, corner, with anaptyctical (172) vowel u for *anglus, from *anclus (cf. ancus); segmentum, section, from the stem sec- in secāre.

165. It appears that at a very early period the neighbourhood of a nasal changed an unvoiced mute into a voiced one: as, ē-mungō, I clean out, by the side of mūcus; pangō, I fix, by the side of pāc- in pāx, peace (gen. pāc-is).

166. Entire assimilation. (1.) One mute is assimilated to another: thus p or b to c: as, suc-currō, I assist; t or d to c: as, sic-cus, dry (cf. sit-is, thirst), accipiō, I accept; d to g: as, agglūtinō, I glue on; t or d to qu: as, quicquam, anything; t or d to p: as, appellō, I call; quippe, why? (1690).

(2.) A mute is assimilated to a spirant: thus, p to f in officīna, workshop, for *opficīna, syncopated form of *opificīna; d to f: as, afferō, I bring hither; when t is thus assimilated to s the result is ss after a short vowel, and s after a long vowel (170, 7) or when final (171); as, in the -s- perfects, concussī, I shook, for *concutsī (concutiō, 961); messuī, I mowed, for *metsuī (metō, 835); suāsī, I advised, for *suātsī (suādeō, 1000); clausī, I shut, for *clautsī (claudō, 958); haesī, I stuck, for haes-sī (868) from haerēre, stem haes- (154); in the same way possum, I can, for *potsum (cf. pot-est, 752); prōsum, I am of advantage, for *prōtsum (cf. prōd-esse); legēns, reading, for *legents (from the stem legent-, cf. genitive legent-is). An s is never assimilated to a following t: as, haustus, drained (1014), from the stem haus-, present hauriō (154). Forms like the rare hausūrus (Verg.) are made after the analogy of dental stems.

(3.) One spirant, s, is assimilated to another, f: as, difficilis, difficult, differō, I am unlike, from dis and facilis, ferō.

(4.) A mute is assimilated to a nasal: thus d to m in mamma, woman’s breast, from the stem mad- (cf. madeō, 1006); rāmus, branch, rāmentum, splinter, from the stem rād- (cf. rādō, 958) with simplification of the double m after the long vowel. d to n in mercēnārius, hireling, from the stem mercēd-, reward, (for mercennarius, see 133, 1); p to m in summus, highest, from the stem sup- (cf. super). A progressive assimilation of nd to nn belongs to the Oscan dialect, and occurs only very rarely in Latin: as, tennitur (Ter.), distennite (

Plaut.

) See 924; 950.

(5.) One nasal, n, is assimilated to another, m: as immōtus, unmoved. But an m before n is never assimilated: as, amnis, river.

(6.)

Mutes or nasals are assimilated to liquids; thus n to l: as, homullus, manikin, for *homon-lus (cf. homun-culus); ūllus (274); d to l: as, sella, seat, for *sed-la from the stem sed- (cf. sedeō); caelum, chisel, from the stem caed- (cf. caedō) with simplification of the double l after the diphthong (170, 7); n to r: as, irruō, I rush in; and with progressive assimilation n to a preceding l: as, tollō, I lift, for *tolnō (833); fallō, I cheat (932); pellō, I push (932). But no assimilation is to be assumed for parricīda, which does not stand for patricīda (133, 1).

(7.) One liquid, r, is assimilated to another, l: as, pelliciō, I lead astray (956), for *per-liciō; agellus, small field, for *agerlos; pūllus, clean, from *pūrlos (cf. pūrus, clean).

(8.) A spirant, s, is assimilated to a preceding liquid in velle, wish, for *velse, ferre, carry, for *ferse (the infinitive ending -se appears in es-se, 895); facillimus, easiest, for *facilsimus (345); sacerrimus, holiest, for *sacersimus (344). But where ls and rs are not original but the result of lightening (170, 3; 10) they remain unchanged: as, arsī, I burnt, for *artsī from the stem ard- (cf. ardeō, 1000); alsī, I felt cold, for *alcsī from the stem alg- (cf. algeō, 1000).

(9.) g and d were assimilated to a following unsyllabic i () the result being (153, 2) ii (i̭i̭); thus peiior, worse, for *ped-i̭or, from the stem ped- (532), whence also the superlative pessimus for *petsimus (166, 2); maiior, greater, for *mag-i̭or (the stem mag- appears in magis); aiiō, I say, for *ag-i̭ō (the stem ag- appears in ad-ag-ium, prōd-ig-ium, 219). These forms were pronounced by Cicero with doubled (23), and traces of the spelling with double ii are still found (23), though in common practice only one i is written (153, 2). On the confusion of syllabic quantity with vowel quantity in these words, see 133, 2.

CONSONANTAL GLIDES.

167. Pronunciation of two successive consonants is sometimes facilitated by the insertion of a consonant which serves as a glide. Such insertion is not frequent.

In inflection a p was thus developed between m and s, between m and l, and between m and t (elsewhere mt changed to nt, see 164, 3): as, sūmpsī, I took, sūmptus, taken, from sūmere for *sūmsī, *sūmtus; and in the corresponding forms of cōmō, dēmō, prōmō (953); exemplum, pattern, for *exemlum from the stem em-, take (cf. eximere, 103, a).

DISAPPEARANCE.

168. A word may be lightened by the disappearance of an initial, a medial, or a final consonant.

Disappearance of an initial consonant is sometimes called Aphaeresis, of a medial, Syncope, of a final, Apocope.

169. Initial disappearance. (1.) Initial tl changed to l: as, lātus, borne, for *tlātus from tollō (187, 917).

(2.) Initial gn changed to n: as, nātus, born, for earlier GNATVS from the stem gen-, gnā (187); nōscō, I find out, for gnōscō, GNOSCIER (897); nārus, knowing, for the more frequent gnārus, nāvus, active, for gnāvus. Cf. the compounds cō-gnātus, cō-gnōscō, ī-gnārus, ī-gnāvus (170, 6) which preserve the g. But Gnaeus retained its G.

(3.) Initial d when followed by consonant i (), disappeared: as, Iovis, Iūpiter, for *Di̭ovis, *Di̭ūpiter. Where the i was vocalic, d was retained: as, dīus.

(4.) Initial stl- first changed to sl and then to l: as, Old Latin stlocus, place, stlīs, law-suit (Quint. 1, 4, 16), STLOC, SLIS, classical locus, līs; also lātus, wide, for *stlātus. That a form *slocus existed is proved by īlicō (698, 703) from *in-slocō, on the spot (170, 2).

170. Medial Disappearance. (1.) c, g, p, and b disappear before s followed by an unvoiced consonant: as, sescentī, six hundred, for *sexcentī from sex; illūstris, resplendent, for *illūcstris from lūceō; discō, I learn, from *dicscō for *di-tc-scō (834), a reduplicated present from the root dec- (cf. decet) like gignō (from the root gen-), and sīdō (for *si-sd-ō, 170, 2, from the root sed-, 829). Sometimes prepositions follow this rule: as, asportō, I carry off, for *absportō, suscipiō, I undertake, for *subscipiō (subs formed from sub like abs from ab; sub-cipiō gives succipiō); occasionally also ecferō, for exferō, I carry out. But more frequently prepositional compounds remain unchanged: as, obscūrus, dark; abscēdō, I withdraw. In some words the lost consonant has been restored by analogy: as, sextus, sixth, for *sestus (cf. Sēstius) after sex; textor, weaver, for *testor after texō.

(2.) s before voiced consonants was voiced (75) and is dropped. If a consonant precedes the s this is dropped also. In either case the preceding vowel is lengthened. Voiced s alone is dropped: as, prīmus, first, for *prīs-mus (cf. prīs-cus); cānus, gray, for *casnus (cf. cas-cus); adverb pōne, behind, for *posne (cf. pos, 1410); dīlābī, glide apart, for *dislābi; īdem, the same, for ISDEM (678); iūdex, judge, for

iūsdex;

trēdecim, thirteen, for *trēsdecim. And with subsequent shortening of the final syllable (130, 3) abin, goest thou? for

abisn(e);

viden, seest thou? for vidēsn(e). Voiced s with the preceding consonant is dropped: as, trādūcō, I lead across, trānō, I swim across, for trānsdūcō, trānsnō; but in these prepositional compounds the -ns was often retained: as, trānsmittō, I send across; sēnī, six each, for *secsnī; sēmēnstris, every six months, for secsmēnstris; sēvirī, the Board of Six, for secsvirī; āla, wing, for *acsla (cf. ax-illa, Cic. O. 153); māvolō (779) for magsvolō from magisvolō, 396; tōles (plural), goiter, for *tōnsles (cf. tōnsillae, tonsils); pīlum, pestle, for *pīnslum from pīnsere, crush; two consonants and voiced s are dropped in scāla, stair, for *scand-sla (cf. scandō).

(3.) c falls away when it stands between a liquid and t, s, m, or n: as, ultus, avenged, for *ulctus from ulc-iscor (980); mulsī for *mulcsī from both mulgeō, I milk, and mulceō, I stroke; similarly other stems in -c and -g (1000, 1014); quernus, oaken, for *quercnus from quercus; tortus, turned, for *torctus from torqueō (for the change of qu to c, see 158); for fortis, brave, forctis is found in old Latin.

(4.) c drops out when it stands between n and t: as, quīntus, fifth, for older quīnctus (2412), from quīnque (for the change of qu to c, see 158; for the long ī in quīnque, see 122, b). But verbs having stems in -nc or -ng retain the c in their past participles: as, vīnctus, bound, from vincīre (1014); iūnctus, joined, from iungere (954). In pāstus (965) c has dropped out between s and t.

(5.) The group -ncn- was simplified to simple -n-, and the preceding vowel was lengthened: as, quīnī, five each, for *quīnc-nī (317); cō-nīveō, wink and blink, for con-cnīveō.

(6.) n before gn was dropped and the preceding vowel lengthened: as, ī-gnōscō, I forgive, for *in-gnōscō, cō-gnōscō, I know, for *con-gnōscō. In this manner (170, 5; 6) arises a form cō- by the side of con- (122, e): as, cō-nectō, cō-nubium, cō-ligātus (Gell. 2, 17, 8).

(7.) In the imperial age, ss after long vowels and diphthongs was regularly changed to s: as, clausī, I closed; ūsus, used (166, 2); but always ēsse, to eat (769); ll changed to l after diphthongs: as, caelum, chisel (166, 6); also when preceded by ī and followed by i: as, vīlla, country-place, but vīlicus (adject.); mille, thousand, but mīlia (642). Elsewhere ll was retained after long vowels: as, pūllus (166, 7), clean; rāllum, ploughshare, from rādō with suffix -lo- (209). In Cicero’s time (Quint. 1, 7, 20) the spelling was still caussa (155, b), matter; cāssus (930), fallen; divīssiō (cf. 912), division. Vergil also, according to Quintilian, retained the doubled consonants, and the best manuscripts of both Vergil and Plautus frequently show ll and ss for later l and s, as do inscriptions: as, PROMEISSERIT, he might have promised (49 B.C.); ACCVSSASSE, to have accused.

(8.) After a long vowel d was dropped before consonant u (v): as, svāvis, sweet, for *svādvis from svād- (cf. svādeō).

(9.) r before st was dropped: as, tostus, roasted (1004) for *torstus from the stem tors- (cf. torreo with assimilated -rs-, 166, 8).

(10.) -rts- changed to -rs: as, arsī, I burnt, for *artsī (1000). -rcsc- changed to -sc-: as, poscō, I demand, for *porcscō (834).

(11.) In ipse, self, for *is-pse, an s has disappeared before -ps-

(12.) (12.) d (t) disappears between r and c: as, cor-culum for cord(i)-culum (275).

171. Final Disappearance. (1.) A word never ends in a doubled consonant: as, es for *es-s, thou art, which Plautus and Terence still scan as a long syllable; and the following cases of assimilation: ter for *terr from *ters (cf. terr-uncius, a quarter of an ās, a farthing, 1272, for *ters-uncius, 166, 8); fār, spelt, for *farr, from *fars (489); fel, gall, for *fell, from *fels (482); in mīles, soldier, for *mīless from *mīlets (cf. Gen. mīlitis, 477) the final syllable is still long in Plautus. hoc, this, for *hocc from *hod-c(e)(the neuter *hod from the stem ho-, as istud, illud (107, c) from isto-, illo-) counts as a long syllable even in classical poetry.

(2.) No Latin word can end in two explosives: thus, final t is dropped in lac, milk (478); final d in cor, heart (476).

(3.) When final s was preceded by r or l, it was assimilated to these liquids, and final rr and ll were then simplified to r and l. See the examples under (1). Wherever final -rs and -ls appear they are not original but the result of the disappearance of an intervening consonant: as, puls, pottage, for *pults (533); pars, part, for *parts (533); all with syncope (111) of the vowel i in the nominative sg.

(4.) Original final ns was changed to s and the preceding vowel was lengthened: as, sanguīs, blood (2452), for *sanguins from the stem sanguin- (486). Wherever final -ns appears it is not original but the result of the disappearance of an intervening consonant: as, ferēns, carrying, for *ferents, from the stem ferent-; frōns, foliage, for *fronds, from the stem frond-.

(5.) A dental mute before final s is dropped: as, hērēs, heir, for *hērēds (475); virtūs, virtue, for *virtūts (477); nox, night, for *nocts (533); a labial or guttural mute is retained: as, fornāx (x = cs), furnace, from the stem fornāc- (531); lēx, law, from the stem leg- (472); urbs, city, from the stem urb- (480); ops from the stem op-, help (480).

DEVELOPMENT OF AN ANAPTYCTICAL VOWEL.

172. Certain consonant groups, notably those containing a liquid, are sometimes eased by the insertion of a vowel which develops between the consonants. This is called Anaptyxis (Greek ἀναπτύσσειν, unfold). It is the opposite of syncope of vowels (110, 111).

(1.) The suffix -clo- (242), changed to -culo-, being thus no longer distinguishable from the diminutive suffix -culo- (267): as, pōculum, cup, for pōclum (Plaut.); vehiculum, carriage, for vehiclum (Plaut.). But -clo- is more common in Plautus than -culo-, especially after long vowels. The suffixes -blo- (245), and -bli- (294) always show the anaptyctical vowel. Its colour depends on the nature of the l (60): as, stabulum, resting-place; stabilis, steady. The group -ngl- also changes to -ngul-: as, angulus (164, 6).

(2.) In words borrowed from the Greek an unfamiliar sequence of consonants was so lightened; as, mina, mina, for *mna (μνᾶ); and in Old Latin drachuma (Plaut.) for later drachma, drachma (δραχμή); techina, trick, from Greek τέχνη; Tecumēssa for Tecmēssa (Τέκμησσα).

(3.) Before syllabic (83) l and r a vowel is developed (111, b): as, íncertus, uncertain, for *íncr̥tus; fácultās, capability, for fácl̥tās. Likewise before syllabic n (139).

DISSIMILATION.

173. (1.) To avoid the repetition of the same liquid in successive syllables l is sometimes changed to r: as, caeruleus, sky-blue, for *caeluleus, from caelum; Parīlia, by the side of Palīlia, from Palēs; the suffix -clo- appears as -cro- after an l: as, lavācrum, bath, simulācrum, image (241); the suffix -āli- under like conditions changes to -āri-; as, molāre, of a mill (313), but augurāle, of an augur.

(2.) In a few cases repetition is avoided by dropping the sound once: as, praestīgiae, jugglery, for praestrīgiae. This also applies to the spirant s followed by a consonant, a combination which is not tolerated in successive syllables: as in the reduplicated perfects stetī, for *stestī; spopondī, for *spospondī (859), where the second syllable, and in quisquiliae, sweepings, for *squisquiliae, where the first syllable was lightened.

CHANGES WITHIN COMPOUNDS.

174. The final syllable of the first member of compounds (181) sometimes undergoes certain changes by analogy to other compounds:

(1.) The final of ā-stems, by analogy to the more frequent -o-stems, usually changed to -o, which in atonic syllables became -i (105): as, āli-ger, winged, for *ālo-ger from ālā-.

(2.) Stems in -on- substitute -o- for -on- by analogy to the -o-stems: as, homi-cída, murderer, for *homo-cīda (105) from homon- (Nom. homō).

(3.) Some stems in -s substitute -o- by analogy to the -o-stems: as, foedi-fragus, treaty-breaking, for *foedo-fragus from the stem foedos- (Nom. foedus, Gen. foederis; 154).

SYLLABLES.

175. A word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. The last syllable is called the Ultima; the last syllable but one is called the Penult; the last syllable but two is called the Antepenult.

176. The quantity of single sounds (e.g. the quantity of a vowel) must be carefully distinguished from the quantity of the group of sounds or the syllable of which the single sound forms a part.

LENGTH OF SYLLABLES.

177. A syllable is long if its vowel is long, or if its vowel is followed by two consonants or by x or z: as,

dūcēbās; volvunt. In dūcēbās both the vowels and the syllables are long; in volvunt the vowels are short, but the syllables are long; in cases like the last the syllables (not the vowels) are said to be long by position. h does not count as a consonant (58) and qu (or qv, 27) has the value of a single consonant only: thus, in adhūc and aqua the first syllable is short.

178. In prose or old dramatic verse a syllable with a short vowel before a mute or f followed by l or r is not long: as tenebrae. In other verse, however, such syllables are sometimes regarded as long. In compounds such syllables are long in any verse: as obruit.

LOSS OF SYLLABLES.

179. The first of two successive syllables which begin with the same sound is sometimes lost. This is called Haplology.

Thus, sēmodius for sēmimodius, half a bushel; calamitōsus for *calamitātōsus, from the stem calamitāt- (262) and suffix -oso- (336); voluntārius, for voluntātārius (262, 309); cōnsuētūdō, for cōnsuētitūdō (264). See also 255; 379.

B. FORMATION.

180. Formation is the process by which stems are formed from roots or from other stems.

181. A word containing a single stem is called a Simple word: as, magnus, great, stem magno-; animus, soul, stem animo-. A word containing two or more stems is called a Compound word: as, magnanimus, great-souled, stem magnanimo-.

182. Most inflected words consist of two parts: a stem, which is usually a modified root (195), and an inflection ending: thus, in ductōrī, for a leader, the root is duc-, lead, the stem is ductōr-, leader, and is the inflection ending, meaning for.

ROOTS.

183. A Root is a monosyllable which gives the fundamental meaning to a word or group of words.

184. A root is not a real word; it is neither a noun, naming something, nor a verb, denoting action. Thus iug-, yoke, does not mean a yoke nor I yoke; it merely suggests something about yoking. The root becomes a real word only when an inflection ending is added, or, more commonly, both a formative suffix and an inflection ending: as, iug-u-m, a yoke.

185. Roots are common to Latin and its cognate languages, such as the Sanskrit and the Greek. When a root is named in this book, the specific Latin form of the root is meant. This often differs somewhat from the form of the root which is assumed as applicable to all the cognate languages.

186. Almost all roots are noun and verb roots; that is, roots with a meaning which may be embodied either in a noun or in a verb, or in both. Besides these there is a small class, less than a dozen in number, of pronoun roots. There are many words which cannot be traced back to their roots.

187. A root sometimes has two or more forms: as, fīd- (for feid-), foed-, fid-, trust; gen-, gn-, sire; tol, tl, bear; see 135, 145.

Thus, fīd- is found in fīd-us, trusty, fīd-ūcia, confidence, fīd-ūciō, I pledge, fīd-ūciārius, in trust, fīd-ere, put trust in, fīd-ēns, courageous, fīd-entia, courage; foed- in foed-us, pledge of faith, foed-erātus, bound by a pledge of faith; fid- in fid-ēs, faith, fid-ēlis, faithful, fid-ēliter, faithfully, fid-ēlitās, faithfulness, per-fid-us, faithless, per-fid-ia, faithlessness, per-fid-iōsus, full of faithlessness, per-fid-iōsē, faithlessly. gen- in gen-itor, sire, gn- in gi-gn-ere, beget, gn-ā- in gnā-tus, son.

188. A root ending in a vowel is called a Vowel Root: as, da-, give; a root ending in a consonant is called a Consonant Root: as, rup-, break. Roots are conveniently indicated by the sign √: as, √teg-, to be read ‘root teg-.’

189. A root or a part of a root is sometimes doubled in forming a word; this is called Reduplication: as, mur-mur, murmur; tur-tur, turtle-dove; po-pul-us, people; ul-ul-āre, yell.

PRESENT STEMS AS ROOTS.

190. Many nouns are formed from the present stems of verbs, which take the place of roots. Stems thus used are mostly those of verbs in -āre and -īre.

Thus, from ōrā-, stem of ōrāre, speak, are formed ōrā-tor, speaker, and ōrā-tiō, speech; from audī-, stem of audīre, hear, are formed audī-tor, hearer, and audī-tiō, hearing.

191. Verbs in -ēre, and those in -āre and -īre in which the ā or ī is confined to the present system (868, 874) usually have parallel nouns formed directly from a root: as,

doc-tor, teacher, doc-umentum, lesson, doc-ilis, teachable (√doc-, docēre); sec-tor, cutter (√sec-, secāre); dom-itor, tamer, dom-inus, master, dom-itus, tamed (√dom-, domāre); sarc-ina, package (√sarc-, sarcīre).

192. But a noun is sometimes exceptionally formed from the present stem of a verb in -ēre: as, monē-ta, mint (monēre); acē-tum, vinegar (acēre); virē-tum, a green (virēre); suādē-la, persuasion (suādēre); habē-na, rein (habēre); egē-nus, needy (egēre); verē-cundus, shamefast (verērī); valē-tūdō, health (valēre).

193. Verbs in -ere, and particularly such as have a present in -nō, -scō, -tō or -iō (832), usually have their parallel nouns formed directly from a root: as,

vic-tor, conqueror (√vic-, vincere); incrē-mentum, growth (√crē-, crēscere); pul-sus, a push (√pol-, pellere).

194. Sometimes, however, nouns are formed from such verb stems, and not from roots: as, lecti-stern-ium, a couch-spreading (sternere, √ster-, strā-); vinc-ibilis, conquerable (vincere, √vīc-); pāsc-uum, pasture (pāscere, √pā-); pect-en, comb (pectere, √pec-); fall-āx, deceitful (fallere, √fal-).

STEMS.

195. A Stem is that part of a word which contains its meaning, and is either a root alone or more commonly a root with an addition called a Formative Suffix.

Thus, in the word ducis, leader’s, the stem, which is identical with the root duc-, means leader; a root thus serving as a stem is called a Root Stem; in ductōris, leader’s, the stem is formed by the formative suffix -tōr-, denoting the agent, attached to the √duc-.

196. New stems are formed by adding a suffix to a stem. Thus, from ōrātōr-, speaker, is formed by the addition of the suffix -io-, a new stem ōrātōr-io-, N. ōrātōrius, speaker’s.

197. The noun has usually only one form of the stem. The verb has different stems to indicate mood and tense; these stems are all based on two principal tense stems, the present and the perfect active.

PRIMITIVES AND DENOMINATIVES.

198. I. A stem or word formed directly from a root or a verb stem is called a Primitive. II. A stem or word formed from a noun stem is called a Denominative.

(a.) Primitives: from √rēg-, reg-, guide: rēx, stem rēg-, king; rēgnum, stem rēg-no-, kingdom; rēctus, stem rēc-to-, guided; regere, stem reg-e-, guide. From ōrā-, stem of ōrāre, speak: ōrātor, stem

ōrā-

tōr-, speaker; ōrātiō, stem ōrā-tiōn-, speech.

(b.) Denominatives: from noun stem rēg-, king: rēgīna, stem rēg-īnā, queen; rēgius, stem rēg-io-, rēgālis, stem rēg-āli-, royal. From ōrātiōn-, speech: ōrātiūncula, stem ōrātiūn-culā-, little speech. From rēg-no-, kingdom: rēgnāre, stem rēgnā-, to rule. From iūs, law: iūrāre, swear,

stem

iūrā (154).
(A.) FORMATION OF THE NOUN.

WITHOUT A FORMATIVE SUFFIX.

199. Some roots are used as noun stems: as, duc-, N. dux, leader (√duc-, lead); rēg-, N. rēx, king (√rēg-, guide); particularly at the end of a compound: as, con-iug-, N. coniūnx, yoke-fellow, spouse (com-, √jug-, yoke); tubi-cin-, N. tubicen, trumpeter (tubā-, √can-, play).

WITH A FORMATIVE SUFFIX.

200. Simple formative suffixes are vowels: as, -ā-, -o-, -i-, -u-; also -io-, -uo-, (-vo-); or such little syllables as -mo-, -min-; -ro-, -lo-; -ōn-; -no-, -ni-, -nu-; -to-, -ti-, -tu-; -ter-, -tōr-; -unt- (-nt-); -es- (-er-), -ōr-; these syllables sometimes have slight modifications of form. Compound suffixes consist of one or more simple suffixes attached to a simple suffix: as, -tōr-io-, -ti-mo-, &c., &c.

201. The following are examples of noun stems formed from roots or verb stems by simple suffixes added:

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

fug-ā-

fuga

,

flight fug-

,

fly

fīd-o-

fīdus

,

trusty fīd-

,

trust

ac-u-

acus

,

pin ac-

,

point

od-io-

odium

,

hate od-

,

hate

pluv-iā-

pluvia

,

rain plov-

,

wet

ar-vo-

arvom

,

tilth ar-

,

till

al-vo-

alvos

,

belly al-

,

nurture

sal-vo-

salvos

,

safe sal-

,

safe

fā-mā-

fāma

,

tale fā-

,

tell

teg-min-

tegmen

,

cover teg-

,

cover

sel-lā-

sella

,

seat sed-

,

sit

err-ōn-

errō

,

stroller errā-

,

stroll

som-no-

somnus

,

sleep sop-

,

sleep

plē-no-

plēnus

,

full plē-

,

fill

rēg-no-

rēgnum

,

realm rēg-

,

guide

da-to-

datus

,

given da-

,

give

lec-to-

lectus

,

bed leg-

,

lie

gen-ti-

gēns

,

race gen-

,

beget

sta-tu-

status

,

stand sta-

,

stand

rēc-tōr-

rēctor

,

ruler rēg-

,

guide

e-unt-,

iēns

,

going i-

,

go

rege-nt-

regēns

,

guiding rege-

,

guide

gen-er-

genus

,

race gen-

,

beget

fur-ōr-

furor

,

madness fur-

,

rave

1019. (2.) The following verbs in -īre have the perfect stem in -u- (874), and the perfect participle, when used, in -tus:

662. The stem of hīc is ho-, hā-; to most of its cases a demonstrative -c for -ce is attached. The masculine and feminine nominative singular and nominative and accusative neuter plural take an -i-: hīc for *ho-i-ce (108, a); haec for ha-i-ce (96). hunc, hanc, are for *hom-ce, *ham-ce. For the quantity of the first syllable of huius, see 153, 2; of hoc, 171, 1.

167. Pronunciation of two successive consonants is sometimes facilitated by the insertion of a consonant which serves as a glide. Such insertion is not frequent.

1882. quoniam, compounded of quom and iam, when now, refers primarily to time, but is seldom so used and only by early writers. The temporal meaning passed early into an exclusively causal meaning, since. In both meanings it regularly introduces the indicative (1721). For special reasons, however, the subjunctive is used, as in indirect discourse (1725), or by attraction (1728).

172. Certain consonant groups, notably those containing a liquid, are sometimes eased by the insertion of a vowel which develops between the consonants. This is called Anaptyxis (Greek ἀναπτύσσειν, unfold). It is the opposite of syncope of vowels (110, 111).

ASSIMILATION.

1690. The interrogative quippe, why? losing its interrogative meaning, is also used as a coordinating word, why, or for: as, hōc genus omne maestum ac sollicitum est cantōris morte Tigellī: quippe benignus erat, H. S. 1, 2, 2, such worthies all are sad, are woebegone over Tigellius the minstrel’s death; why he was generosity itself.

171. Final Disappearance. (1.) A word never ends in a doubled consonant: as, es for *es-s, thou art, which Plautus and Terence still scan as a long syllable; and the following cases of assimilation: ter for *terr from *ters (cf. terr-uncius, a quarter of an ās, a farthing, 1272, for *ters-uncius, 166, 8); fār, spelt, for *farr, from *fars (489); fel, gall, for *fell, from *fels (482); in mīles, soldier, for *mīless from *mīlets (cf. Gen. mīlitis, 477) the final syllable is still long in Plautus. hoc, this, for *hocc from *hod-c(e)(the neuter *hod from the stem ho-, as istud, illud (107, c) from isto-, illo-) counts as a long syllable even in classical poetry.

961. (d.) With the present stem in -io|e- (836).

835. (c.) -tō occurs in the following presents from guttural roots: flectō, turn, nectō, string,

pectō,

comb, plector, am struck, amplector, hug, complector, clasp. From a lingual root vid-, comes vīsō, go to see, call on (153). From vowel roots: bētō or bītō, go, and metō, mow.

1000. (1 b.) The following verbs in -ēre have the perfect stem in -s- (868), and the perfect participle, when used, in -sus (912):

958. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

868. Some verbs in -ēre also have a perfect in -s-: as algeō, am cold, alsī (170, 3); haereō, stick, haesī (166, 2): see 999, 1000. Also some in -īre: as, sarciō, patch, sarsī (170, 3): see 1014, 1015.

752. possum is formed from pote, able, and sum, juxtaposed (166, 2; 396). The separate forms potis sum, &c., or pote sum, &c., are also used, and sometimes even potis or pote alone takes the place of a verb; in either case potis and pote are indeclinable, and are applied to gender words and neuters both.

1014. (1.) The following verbs in -īre have the perfect stem in -s- (868), and the perfect participle in -tus:

1006. (3.) The following verbs in -ēre have the perfect stem in -u- (874), and no perfect participle (907):

924. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

950. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829); most have a nasal (831).

274. Another vowel than e (172, 3) appears in: Hispāl-lu-s (Hispāno-), Messāl-la (Messānā-), proper names; corōl-la, chaplet (corōnā-); ūl-lu-s, the least one, any at all (ūno-); Sūl-la (Sūrā-), proper name; lapil-lu-s, for *lapid-lu-s, pebble (lapid-). Also homul-lu-s, son of the dust (homon-).

833. (a.) -nō is added to roots in a vowel, or in a continuous sound, -m-, -r-, or -l-.

932. (c.) With the present stem in -ro|e-, or -lo|e- (833).

956. (d.) With the present stem in -io|e- (836).

895. For -rē in old Latin, see 134, 2. The infinitive of fīō, become, ends in -rī, fī̆erī, with a passive ending (789); twice fīere (Enn. Laev.). An older form for -re is -se, found in esse, to be, ēsse, to eat, and their compounds. For velle, to wish (mālle, nōlle), see 166, 8. In the perfect, , go, sometimes has -iisse in compounds (766), and in poetry, petō, go to, has rarely petiisse.

345.

344. Adjectives with the nominative in -er have the nominative of the superlative like the nominative of the positive with -rimus added (350): as,

532. (a.) Examples of stems in -di-, with nominative -s, genitive -dis, are:

219. (b.) Most primitives in -io- are compounds: as, adag-iu-m, proverb (ad, √ag-, speak); ingen-iu-m, disposition (in, √gen-, beget); dīscid-iu-m, separation, exscid-iu-m, destruction (dī-, ex, √scid-, cleave); incend-iu-m, conflagration (in, √cand-, light); obsequ-iu-m, compliance (ob-, √sequ-, follow); conloqu-iu-m, parley (com-, √loqu-, talk); obsid-iu-m, siege (ob, √sed-, sit).

CONSONANTAL GLIDES.

953. (a.) With the present stem in -o|e- (829).

DISAPPEARANCE.

187. A root sometimes has two or more forms: as, fīd- (for feid-), foed-, fid-, trust; gen-, gn-, sire; tol, tl, bear; see 135, 145.

917. (1.) Most perfect participles formed from vowel roots have a long root vowel: as,

897. A longer form in -ier for , and -rier for -rī, is common in old laws and dramatic verse, and occurs sometimes in other poetry: as, FIGIER, to be posted, GNOSCIER, to be read (inscr. 186 B.C.); dīcier, to be said, cūrārier, to be looked after (Plaut.); dominārier, to be lord paramount (Verg.).

698. The rather indeterminate meaning of the accusative and the ablative is sometimes more exactly defined by a preposition. The preposition may either accompany its usual case: as, adamussim, admodum, īlicō; or it may be loosely prefixed, with more of the nature of an adverb than of a preposition, to a case with which it is not ordinarily used: as, examussim, intereā. Sometimes it stands after the noun: as, parumper, a little while. Besides the three cases named above, other forms occur, some of which are undoubtedly old case endings, though they can no longer be recognized as such: see 710.

703. domō, from home, rūre, from the country; hodiē, to-day (ho-, diē-), volgō, publicly, vespere, by twilight, noctū, by nights, nights, lūce, by light, tempore, in times, betimes; sponte, voluntarily, forte, by chance; quotannīs, yearly; grātiīs or grātīs, for nothing, ingrātiīs or ingrātīs, against one’s will; īlicō, on the spot (169, 4; 170, 2), forīs, out of doors (*forā-).

834. (b.) -scō, usually meaning ‘begin to,’ forms presents called Inceptives or Inchoatives.

829. (1.) The present stem of many verbs in -ere is formed by adding a variable vowel -o|e-, which appears in the first person singular active as , to a root ending in a consonant or in two consonants: as,

1410. The accusative is accompanied by the following prepositions:

678. Other case forms of īdem are found in inscriptions, as follows:

779. Old forms are māvolō, māvolunt; māvolet; māvelim, māvelīs, māvelit; māvellem. The perfect system, māluī, &c., is like that of volō (772).

396. (

3.

) An adverb with a verb: as, circum-dare, put round; satis-facere, satis-dare, give satisfaction; intro-īre, go inside; mālle, prefer, for magis velle (170, 2); nōlō, be unwilling, for ne volō; ne-scīre, hau-scīre, not know.

980. (c.) With the present stem in -sco|e- (834).

2412. quīnctus, the older form of quīntus (170, 4) is sometimes found in old and even in classical writers. Instead of septimus and decimus, the older septumus and decumus are not uncommon (28).

954. (b.) With the present stem in a nasalized root followed by -o|e-

(831).

965. (c.) With the present stem in -sco|e- (834).

317. -no-, N. -nu-s, is added to stems formed with the comparative suffix -ero- or -tero- (347), denoting place: super-no-, N. super-nu-s, above; inter-nu-s, internal (inter); exter-nu-s, outside; so, also, alter-nu-s, every other (altero-); and to a very few substantives: as, pater-nu-s, fatherly (patr-); frāter-nu-s, brotherly (frātr-); vēr-nu-s, of spring (vēr-). Also to cardinals, making distributives: as, bī-nī, two by two (for *dṷīnī, duo-, 161).

769. edō, eat, has a present system with a formative vowel like regō throughout (782); but in some parts of the present, and of the imperfect subjunctive, parallel root forms are usually found, with d of the root changed to s, and the vowel lengthened (135), as may be seen in the following:

642. The adjective mīlle, thousand, is not declined. The substantive has in the singular only N. Ac. Ab. mīlle, or Ab. mīllī; plural: N. and Ac. mīllia (mīlia), G. mīllium (mīlium), D. and Ab. mīllibus (mīlibus).

209. -o- and -ā- stems may denote vocation or class; many are compounds. -o-, N. -u-s: coqu-o-, N. coqu-o-s or coc-u-s, cook (√coqu-, cook); causidic-u-s, pleader (causā-, √dic-, speak). -ā-, N. -a: scrīb-ā-, N. scrīb-a, clerk (√scrīb-, write); agricol-a, husbandman (agro-, √col-, till).

930. (a.) With the present stem in

-o

|e- (829

). 

912. Roots in -d- and -t- change -to- to -so-, before which the dentals change to s (159). After long vowels, nasals, and liquids the double ss is simplified to s: as, fossus, dug, but dīvīsus, divided; vorsus or versus, turned. The suffix -so- is also found with some roots in -l-, -m-, or -r- and a few others: as, pulsus (159).

1004. (2 a.) Most verbs in -ēre have the perfect stem in -u- (874), and the perfect participle, when used, in -tus, which is usually preceded by a short i (910): as,

275. Stems in a continuous sound (-l-, -n-, -r-, or -s-), or in -i-, -u-, or -ē-, usually take -cu-lo- or -cu-lā-.

1272. In expressions of worthlessness, other genitives are also used thus; such are nihilī, or, usually with a negative, āssis, floccī, naucī, pilī, teruncī: as, nōn āssis facis? Cat. 43, 13, car’st not a doit? So also huius: as, huius nōn faciam, T. Ad. 163, I shall not care a snap.

489. (a.) Examples of stems in -r-, with nominative -r, genitive -ris, are:

482. Examples of stems in -l-, with nominative -l, genitive -lis, are:

477. (b.) Examples of stems in -t-, with nominative -s, genitive -tis, are:

478. vātēs, bard, has an -s- stem, namely -ēs (236), in the nominative, and vāt- in the other cases (401); G. Pl. vātum, but thrice vātium (Cic.). The only example of a neuter stem in -t-, with nominative -t, genitive -tis, is caput, head, capitis, and its compounds occiput, back of the head and sinciput, jole. lac, Ne., milk, lactis, has in old and late Latin nominative and accusative lacte, lact once in Varro (171, 2); acc. lactem occurs in Petronius once and later.

476. sēdēs, F., seat, has an -s- stem, namely -ēs (236), in the nominative, and sēd- in the other cases (401); G. Pl. sēdum, once sēdium (Vell. Pat.). The only example of a neuter stem in -d-, with nominative -r, genitive -dis, is cor (171, 2), heart, cordis, no G. Pl. (430).

533. (b.) Examples of stems in -ti-, with nominative -s (-x), genitive -tis, are:

2452. (a.) Final is has ī in all plural cases: as,

486. sanguī̆s, M., blood, stem sanguin-, takes -s in the nominative (171, 4). canis, M., F., dog, stem can-, and īuvenis, M., F., young person, stem iuven-, have the nominative formed like that of -i- stems. For senex, old man, see 500.

475. (a.) Examples of stems in -d-, with nominative -s, genitive -dis, are:

531. Examples of stems in -ci-, with nominative -x, genitive -cis, are:

472. (a.) Examples of stems in -g-, with nominative -x, genitive -gis, are:

480. Examples of stems in -b- or -p-, with nominative -s, genitive -bis or -pis, are:

DEVELOPMENT OF AN ANAPTYCTICAL VOWEL.

242. -culo-, N. -culu-m (202): pō-culo-, N. pō-culu-m, cup (√pō-, drink); fer-culu-m, tray (√fer-, bear). -culo- sometimes denotes the place where: cub-iculu-m, sleeping-room (√cub-, lie); cēnā-culu-m, originally dining-room, usually garret (cēnā-re).

267. The suffixes -lo-, -lā-, or -cu-lo-, -cu-lā-, are used to form substantives with a Diminutive meaning. Diminutives may denote:

245. -bulo-, N. -bulu-m (202): pā-bulo-, N. pā-bulu-m, fodder (√pā-, keep); vēnā-bulu-m, hunting-spear (vēnā-rī); pat-ibulu-m, pillory (√pat-, stretch). -bulo- sometimes denotes the place where: sta-bulu-m, standing-place, stall (√sta-, stand). -bulā-, N. -bula, F., rare: sū-bula, awl (√su-, sew); ta-bula, board (√ta-, stretch); fā-bula, talk (√fā-, talk).

294. -bili-, N. -bili-s (202), denotes passive capability like -i-li-, but is far more common: horr-ibili-s, exciting a shudder (cf. horrē-re); amā-bili-s, lovable (amā-re); flē-bili-s, lamentable (√flē-, weep). Rarely active: as, sta-bili-s, that can stand (√sta-, stand); penetrā-bili-s, piercing (penetrā-re). -ti-bili- (159), passive, rare: flexibili-s, flexible (√flec-, bend, 960).

DISSIMILATION.

241. -cro-, N. -cru-m, used when an l precedes: ful-cro-, N. ful-cru-m, couch-leg (√fulc-, prop). -cro- sometimes denotes the place where: ambulā-cru-m, promenade (ambulā-re); sometimes the effect: simulā-cru-m, likeness (simulā-re).

313. -ā-li-, N. -ā-li-s: rēg-āli-, N. rēg-āli-s, kingly (rēg-); decemvir-āli-s, of a decemvir (decemviro-); fāt-āli-s, fated (fāto-); t-āli-s, such (stem to-, that); qu-āli-s, as (quo-), -ā-ri-, N. -ā-ri-s, is used for -āli- if an l precedes (173): as, mol-āri-, N. mol-āri-s, of a mill (molā-); mīlit-āri-s, of a soldier (mīlit-). Neuters in -āli- and -āri- often become substantives (600): fōc-āle, neckcloth (fauci-); anim-al, breathing thing (animā-); calc-ar, spur (calci-).

859. Four verbs with vowel roots also have a reduplicated perfect stem: , give, put, dare, dedī; bibō, drink, bibere, bibī; stō, stand, stāre, stetī, and sistō, set, sistere, -stitī, rarely stitī. Also four verbs in -ēre: mordeō, bite, momordī, pendeō, hang, pependī, spondeō, promise, spopondī, tondeō, clip, -totondī. In the root syllable of spopondī, promised, stetī, stood, stitī, set, and the old scicidī, clove, an s is dropped (173, 2).

181. A word containing a single stem is called a Simple word: as, magnus, great, stem magno-; animus, soul, stem animo-. A word containing two or more stems is called a Compound word: as, magnanimus, great-souled, stem magnanimo-.

SYLLABLES.

LENGTH OF SYLLABLES.

LOSS OF SYLLABLES.

262. -tāt-, N. -tā-s (202), is one of the very commonest suffixes.

336. -ōso- (sometimes -ōnso-, -ōsso-), N. -ōsu-s, full of, is very common indeed, -ōso- is sometimes attached to other suffixes, thus: -c-ōso-, -ul-ōso-, -ūc-ul-ōso-.

309. -ār-io-, N. -ār-iu-s, very common, is chiefly added to substantives: as, agr-ārio-, N. agr-āriu-s, of land (agro-). Often as substantive: not-āriu-s (265), stenographer (notā-); aer-āriu-m (266), treastury (aer-); sēmin-āriu-m, nursery (sēmin-); bell-āria, plural, goodies, bonbons (bello-).

264. -tū-din-, N. -tū-dō, suffixed to adjective stems: magni-tūdin-, N. magni-tūdō, greatness (magno-); forti-túdō, courage (forti-); and to a few participles: cōnsuē-tūdō, custom (cōnsuēto-, 179); sollici-tūdō, anxiety (sollicito-); analogously valē-tūdō, health (*valēto-, valēre).

255. -cin-io-, N. -cin-iu-m, rare: latrō-cinio-, N. latrō-ciniu-m, robbery (latrōn-); patrō-ciniu-m, protection (patrōno-).

379. If the first part is a noun, its stem is taken: as, Ahēno-barbus, Redbeard, Barbarossa; usually with weakening of a stem vowel (103-105): as, aurifex, jeweller (auro-). On other changes of the final vowel in the first member of compounds, see 174. Sometimes with disappearance of a syllable (179); as, *venēni-ficus, venē-ficus, poisoner (venēno-); or of a vowel (111): as, man-ceps, contractor (manu-); particularly before a vowel (119): as, magn-animus, great-souled (magno-). Consonant stems are often extended by i before a consonant: as, mōri-gerus, complaisant (mōr-).

B. FORMATION.

195. A Stem is that part of a word which contains its meaning, and is either a root alone or more commonly a root with an addition called a Formative Suffix.

ROOTS.

PRESENT STEMS AS ROOTS.

874. Some verbs in -āre also have a perfect stem in -u-: as, crepō, rattle, crepāre, crepuī (993); and many in -ēre: as, moneō, warn, monēre, monuī: see 1004-1006; also four in -īre: as, saliō, leap, salīre, saluī (1019).

832. (2.) The present stem of many verbs in -ere is formed by adding a suffix ending in a variable vowel -o|e-, which appears in the first person singular active as , to a root: thus, -nō, -scō, -tō, -iō: as,

STEMS.

PRIMITIVES AND DENOMINATIVES.

WITHOUT A FORMATIVE SUFFIX.

WITH A FORMATIVE SUFFIX.

202. Formative suffixes are often preceded by a vowel, which in many instances is a stem vowel, real or presumed; in others, the vowel has come to be regarded as a part of the suffix itself.

Thus, -lo-: fīlio-lo-, N. fīlio-lu-s, little son (fīlio-); hortu-lu-s, little garden (horto-, 105, h); but -ulo-: rēg-ulu-s, petty king (rēg-); ger-ulu-s, porter (√ges-, bear), -ci-: pugnā-ci-, N. pugnā-x, full of fight (pugnā-re); but -āci-: fer-āx, productive (√fer-, bear), -to-: laudā-to-, N. laudā-tu-s, praised (laudā-re); but -āto-: dent-ātus, toothed (denti-). -tu-: equitā-tu-, N. equitā-tu-s, cavalry (equitā-re); but -ātu-: sen-ātu-s, senate (sen-). -lā-: suādē-lā-, N. suādē-la, persuasion (suādē-re, 192); but -ēlā-: loqu-ēla, talk (√loqu-, speak). -tāt-: cīvi-tāt-, N. cīvi-tā-s, citizenship (cīvi-); but -itāt-: auctōr-itā-s, authority (auctōr-). -cio-: aedīli-cio-, N. aedīli-ciu-s, of an aedile (aedīli-); but -icio-: patr-iciu-s, patrician (patr-). -timo-: fīni-timo-, N. fīni-timu-s, bordering (fīni-); but -itimo-: lēg-itimu-s, of the law (lēg-).

203. There are many formative suffixes of nouns. The commonest only can be named, and these may be conveniently grouped as below, by their meanings. Compound suffixes are arranged with reference to the last element of the suffix: thus, under the adjective suffix -io- (304) will be found -c-io-, -īc-io-, -tōr-io-, and -ār-io-. In many instances it is difficult to distinguish between simple and compound suffixes.

I. THE SUBSTANTIVE.

(A.) PRIMITIVES.

I. THE AGENT.

204. The suffixes -tōr-, -o-, -ā-, -lo-, and -ōn-, are used to denote the Agent: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

lēc-tōr-

lēctor

,

reader

lēg-

,

read

scrīb-ā-

scrība

,

writer

scrīb-

,

write

fig-ulo-

figulus

,

potter

fig-

,

mould

err-ōn-

errō

,

stroller errā-re

,

stroll

(1.) -tōr- (N. -tor).

205. -tōr-, N. -tor, or -sōr-, N. -sor (159, 202), is the commonest suffix of the agent; the feminine is -trī-ci-, N. -trī-x. -tōr- is sometimes used in a present sense, of action repeated or occurring at any time, and sometimes in a past sense.

206. (a.) -tōr- (-sōr-), in the present sense, often denotes one who makes a regular business of the action of the root or verb.

ōrā-tōr-, N. ōrā-tor, spokesman, speaker (ōrā-re); lēc-tor, reader (√leg-, read). Workmen and tradesmen: arā-tor, ploughman, pās-tor, shepherd, pīc-tor, painter, sū-tor, shoemaker. Semi-professional: captā-tor, legacy-hunter, dēlā-tor, professional informer. Government officials: cēn-sor, appraiser, censor, imperā-tor, commander, prae-tor, (leader), praetor, dictā-tor, līc-tor. Of the law: āc-tor, manager, accūsā-tor, accuser, spōn-sor, bondsman, tū-tor, guardian. From presumed verb stems (202): sen-ātor, senator (sen-); viā-tor, wayfarer (viā-); fundi-tor, slinger (fundā-). -tro-, N. -ter, has the meaning of -tōr-: as, aus-tro-, N. aus-ter (scorcher), south-wester (√aus-, burn).

207. In the present sense -tōr- (-sōr-) is also used to indicate permanent character, quality, capability, tendency, likelihood: as, bellā-tor, a man of war, warlike; dēlīberā-tor, a man of caution; cessā-tor, a loiterer; dērī-sor, a mocker, ironical; cōnsūmp-tor, apt to destroy, destructive; aedificā-tor, building-mad.

208. (b.) -tōr- (-sōr-), in a perfect sense, is used particularly in old Latin, or to denote an agent who has acquired a permanent name by a single conspicuous action. In this sense it usually has a genitive of the object, or a possessive pronoun: thus,

castīgā-tor meus, my mentor, or the man who has upbraided me; olīvae inven-tor, the deviser of the olive (Aristaeus); reper-tor vītis, the author of the vine (Bacchus); patriae līberā-tōrēs, the emancipators of the nation.

(2.) -o- (N. -u-s), -ā- (N. -a); -lo- (N. -lu-s); -ōn- (N. ).

209. -o- and -ā- stems may denote vocation or class; many are compounds. -o-, N. -u-s: coqu-o-, N. coqu-o-s or coc-u-s, cook (√coqu-, cook); causidic-u-s, pleader (causā-, √dic-, speak). -ā-, N. -a: scrīb-ā-, N. scrīb-a, clerk (√scrīb-, write); agricol-a, husbandman (agro-, √col-, till).

210. -u-lo-, N. -u-lu-s (202): ger-ulo-, N. ger-ulu-s, bearer (√ges-, bear); fig-ulu-s, potter (√fig-, shape, mould).

211. -ōn-, N. -ō-: err-ōn-, N. err-ō, stroller (errā-re); especially in compounds: praed-ō, robber (praedā-rī); praec-ō for *praevocō, herald (prae-vocā-re); combib-ō, fellow-drinker (com-, √bib-, drink).

II. THE ACTION.

212. The suffixes -ā-, -io-, -iā-; -min-; -i-ōn-, -ti-ōn-; -lā-; -mā-, -nā-; -tā-, -tu-; -er-, -or-, -ōr-, are used to denote the Action: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

od-io-

odium

,

hate

od-

,

hate

āc-tiōn-

āctiō

,

action

āg-

,

do

ques-tu-

questus

,

complaint

ques-

,

complain

fur-ōr-

furor

,

rage

fur-

,

rave

213. Words denoting action (1470) in a substantive form have a wide range of meaning; they may denote, according to the connection, action intransitive, transitive, or passive, complete or incomplete; if the verb denotes condition or state, the word of action often comes very near to denominatives of quality; furthermore the idea of action is often lost, and passes over to result, concrete effect, means or instrument, or place.

(1.) -ā- (N. -a); -io- (N. -iu-m); -iā- (N. -ia), -iē- (N. -iē-s).

214. -ā-, N. -a, is rare in words of action: fug-ā-, N. fug-a, flight (√fug-, fly); most words are concrete: mol-a, mill (√mol-, grind); tog-a, covering (√teg-, cover).

215. -ūr-ā-, N. -ūr-a, is rare: fig-ūrā-, N. fig-ūra, shape (√fig-, shape).

216. -tūr-ā-, N. -tūr-a, or -sūr-ā-, N. -sūr-a (159, 202), akin to the agent in -tōr- (-sōr-): armā-tūrā-, N. armā-tūra, equipment (armā-re); pīc-tūra, painting, i.e., act of painting or picture (√pig-, paint). Words parallel with official personal names (206) denote office: cēn-sūra, taxing, censor’s office (cf. cēnsōr-); prae-tūra, praetorship (cf. praetōr-).

217. -io-, N. -iu-m, sometimes denotes the effect or the object. The line cannot always be drawn very sharply between these stems in -io- (many of which may be formed through a presumed noun stem), and denominatives in -io- (249).

218. (a.) -io- is rarely suffixed to simple roots or verb stems: od-io-, N. od-iu-m, hate, hateful thing, hateful conduct (√od-, hate); some words become concrete: lab-iu-m, lip (√lab-, lick).

219. (b.) Most primitives in -io- are compounds: as, adag-iu-m, proverb (ad, √ag-, speak); ingen-iu-m, disposition (in, √gen-, beget); dīscid-iu-m, separation, exscid-iu-m, destruction (dī-, ex, √scid-, cleave); incend-iu-m, conflagration (in, √cand-, light); obsequ-iu-m, compliance (ob-, √sequ-, follow); conloqu-iu-m, parley (com-, √loqu-, talk); obsid-iu-m, siege (ob, √sed-, sit).

220. -t-io-, N. -t-iu-m: spa-tio-, N. spa-tiu-m, stretch (√spa-, span, stretch); sōlsti-tiu-m, sun-stand, solstice (sōl-, √sta-, stand); ini-tiu-m, a beginning (in, √i-, go).

221. -iā-, N. -ia: fur-iā-, N. fur-iae, plural, ravings, madness (√fur-, rave); pluvia, rain (√pluv-, rain). Most stems in -iā- are compounds, used in the plural only, often with concrete or passive meaning: dēlic-iae, allurements, pet (, √lac-, allure); excub-iae, patrol (ex, √cub-, lie).

222. -iē-, N. -iē-s, a variation of -iā-, usually denotes result (604): ser-iē-, N. ser-iē-s, row (√ser-, string); spec-iē-s, sight, looks (√spec-, spy, see); pernic-iē-s, destruction (per, √nec-, murder).

223. -t-iē-, N. -t-iē-s: permi-tiē-, N. permi-tiē-s, wasting away (per, √mi-, less).

(2.) -min- (103) (N. -men); -din-, -gin- (105, g) (N. -dō, -gō).

224. -min-, N. -men (202), usually active, occasionally passive, is very common; it sometimes denotes the means, instrument, or effect.

certā-min-, N. certā-men, contest (certā-re); crī-men, charge (√cer-, crī-, sift); spec-imen, what is inspected, sample (√spec-, spy, see); lū-men, light (√lūc-, light); flū-men, flood, stream (√flugṷ-, flow); ag-men, what is led, train (√ag-, lead). Words in -min- often mean nearly the same as those in -mento- (239): as, levā-men, levā-mentu-m, lightening; teg-umen, teg-umentu-m, covering.

225. ē-din-, -ī-din- (202): -ē-din-, N. -ē-dō: grav-ēdin-, N. grav-ēdō, (heaviness), catarrh (√grav-, heavy), -ī-din-, N. -ī-dō: cup-īdin-, N. cup-īdō, desire (√cup-, desire); lib-idō, whim (√lib-, yearn).

226. -ā-gin-, -ī-gin- (202): -ā-gin-, N. -ā-gō: vorā-gin-, N. vorā-gō, gulf (vorā-re); imā-gō, representation (*imā-, cf. imitārī). -ī-gin-, N. -ī-gō: orī-gin-, N. orī-gō, source (orī-rī); cāl-īgō, darkness (√cāl-, hide). A few denominatives have -ū-gin-, N. -ū-gō: aer-ūgin-, N. aer-ūgō, copper rust (aer-).

(3.) -i-ōn- (N. -i-ō); -ti-ōn- or -si-ōn- (N. -ti-ō or -si-ō).

227. -i-ōn-, N. -i-ō: opīn-iōn-, N. opīn-iō, notion (opīnā-rī); condic-iō, agreement (com-, √dic-, say); contāg-iō, touch (com-, √tag-, touch). Some words are concrete: leg-iō, pick, legion (√leg-, pick). A few are denominatives: commūn-iō, mutual participation (commūni-).

228. -ti-ōn-, N. -ti-ō, or -si-ōn-, N. -si-ō (159, 202), is very common, and may denote action either intransitive, transitive, or passive, or the manner or possibility of action.

cōgitā-tiōn-, N. cōgitā-tiō, a thinking, a thought (cōgitā-re); exīstimā-tiō, judging, reputation (exīstimā-re); coven-tiō, commonly cōn-tiō, meeting, speech (com-, √ven-, come); dēpul-siō, warding off (dē-, √pol-, push); oppugnā-tiō, besieging, method of besieging (oppugnā-re); occultā-tiō, hiding, chance to hide, possibility of hiding (occultā-re). Some words denote the place where: sta-tiō, a stand (√sta-, stand); some become collectives or concretes: salūtā-tiō, greeting, levee, guests at a levee (salūtā-re); mūnī-tiō, fortification, i.e., act of fortifying or works (mūnī-re).

(4.) -ē-lā- (N. -ē-la), -tē-lā- (N. -tē-la).

229. -ē-lā-, N. -ē-la (202): suādē-lā-, N. suādē-la, persuasion (suādē-rē): loqu-ēla, talk (√loqu-, talk); quer-ēla or quer-ēlla, complaint (√ques-, complain). Some words are concrete: candē-la, candle (candē-re).

230. -tē-lā-, N. -tē-la-: conrup-tēlā-, N. conrup-tēla, a seduction (com-, √rup-, spoil, ruin); tū-tēla, protection (√tū-, watch, protect).

(5.) -mā- (N. -ma), -nā- (N. -na); -trī-nā- (N. -trī-na).

231. -mā- and -nā- are rare, and denote result or something concrete. -mā-, N. -ma: fā-mā-, N. fā-ma, tale (√fā-, tell); -nā, N. -na: ur-na, pitcher (√urc- in urc-eus, pitcher, 170, 3); with original suffix -sna (170, 2): lū-na, moon (√lūc-, light); scāla, stairs (√scand-, mount).

232. -inā-, N. -ina: ang-inā-, N. ang-ina, choking (√ang-, choke); pāg-ina, page (√pāg-, fasten); sarc-ina, package (√sarc-, patch). -īnā-, N. -īna (202): ru-īnā-, N. ru-īna, downfall (√ru-, tumble); -īnā- is very common in denominatives: pisc-īna, fish-pond (pisci-).

233. -trī-nā-, N. -trī-na, akin to the agent in -tōr-: doc-trīnā-, N. doc-trīna, teaching, either the act of teaching or what is taught (√doc-, teach); sū-trīna, shoemaking, shoemaker’s trade, shoemaker’s shop (√sū-, sew).

(6.) -tā- or -sā- (N. -ta or -sa); -tu- or -su- (N. -tu-s or -su-s).

234. -tā-, N. -ta, or -sā-, N. -sa (159), is rare, and sometimes denotes result, or something concrete: as,

no-

tā-, N. no-ta, mark (√gno-, know); por-ta (passage), gate (√por-, fare); fos-sa, ditch (√fod-, dig); repul-sa, repulse (re-, √pol-, push); offēn-sa, offence (ob, √fend-, strike).

235. -tu-, N. -tu-s, or -su-, N. -su-s (159, 202), denotes the action and its results: ques-tu-, N. ques-tu-s, complaint (√ques-, complain); gem-itus, groan (√gem-, groan). Stems in -ā-tu-, N. -ā-tu-s, sometimes denote office or officials: cōnsul-ātu-, N. cōnsul-ātu-s, being consul, consulship (cōnsul-); sen-ātu-s, senate (sen-). -tu- is seldom passive: vī-su-s, active, sight, passive, looks (√vīd-, see); apparā-tu-s, preparation, either a getting ready, or what is got ready (apparā-re). The supine (2269) is the accusative or ablative of substantives in -tu- (-su-). Most words in -tu- (-su-) are defective in case, and are chiefly used in the ablative (430).

(7.) -er- for -es- (N. -us); -ōr- (N. -or).

236. Neuter stems in -er- (for -es-), or in -or- (for -os-), N. -us, denote result, or have a concrete meaning: gen-er-, N. gen-us, birth, race (√gen-, beget); op-er-, N. op-us, work (√op-, work); frīg-or-, N. frīg-us, cold (√frīg-, cold). -ēs with lengthened ē is sometimes used in the nominative of gender words: as, nūb-ēs, cloud (√nūb-, veil); sēd-ēs, seat (√sēd-); vāt-ēs, bard. -n-er-, -n-or-, N. -n-us: vol-ner-, N. vol-nus, wound (√vol-, tear); fac-inor-, N. fac-inus, deed (√fac-, do, 202).

237. -ōr- (for an older form -ōs-, 154), N. -ōs, commonly -or, masculine, denotes a state. Many substantives in -ōr- have a parallel verb, usually in -ēre (368), and an adjective in -ido- (287).

od-ōr-, N. od-ōs or

od-or,

smell (√od-, smell, cf. olē-re); pall-or, paleness (cf. pallē-re); cal-or, warmth (cf. calē-re); ūm-or, moisture (cf. ūmē-re); am-or, love (cf. amā-re); ang-or, choking, anguish (√ang-, choke).

III. THE INSTRUMENT OR MEANS.

238. The suffixes -men-to-, -tro-, -cro- or -culo-, -lo-, -bro- or -bulo-, are used to denote the Instrument or Means: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

ōrnā-mento-

ōrnāmentum

,

embellishment ōrnā-re

,

embellish

arā-tro-

arātrum

,

plough arā-re

,

plough

pō-culo-

pōculum

,

drinking-cup

pō-

,

drink

pā-bulo-

pābulum

,

fodder

pā-

,

feed

239. -men-to-, N. -men-tu-m (202), is one of the commonest suffixes; it sometimes denotes result of action, rarely action itself.

pig-mento-, N. pig-mentu-m, paint (√pīg-, paint); experī-mentu-m, test (experī-rī); ōrnā-mentu-m, ornament (ōrnā-re); frag-mentu-m, fragment (√frag-, break); cae-mentu-m, quarried stone (√caed-, cut); incrē-mentu-m, growth (in, √crē-, grow); al-imentu-m, nourishment (√al-, nurture); doc-umentu-m, lesson (√doc-, teach). See also -min- (224). -men-tā-, N. -men-ta, F., is rare: ful-menta, prop (√fulc-, prop); rā-menta, scraping (√rād-, scrape).

240. -tro-, N. -tru-m (202): arā-tro-, N. arā-tru-m, plough (arā-re); fer-etru-m, bier (√fer-, bear); rōs-tru-m, beak (√rōd-, peck). Sometimes -stro-: mōn-stru-m, warning (√mon-, mind); lu-stra, plural, fen, jungle (√lu-, wash); lū-stru-m, purification (√lou-, wash). -trā-, N. -tra, F.: mulc-trā-, N. mulc-tra (also mulc-tru-m, Ne.), milking-pail (√mulg-, milk). -es-trā-: fen-estra, window.

241. -cro-, N. -cru-m, used when an l precedes: ful-cro-, N. ful-cru-m, couch-leg (√fulc-, prop). -cro- sometimes denotes the place where: ambulā-cru-m, promenade (ambulā-re); sometimes the effect: simulā-cru-m, likeness (simulā-re).

242. -culo-, N. -culu-m (202): pō-culo-, N. pō-culu-m, cup (√pō-, drink); fer-culu-m, tray (√fer-, bear). -culo- sometimes denotes the place where: cub-iculu-m, sleeping-room (√cub-, lie); cēnā-culu-m, originally dining-room, usually garret (cēnā-re).

243. -u-lo-, N. -u-lu-m- (202): chiefly after c or g: vinc-ulo-, N. vinc-ulu-m, bond (√vinc-, bind); cing-ulu-m, girdle (√cing-, gird). -u-lā-, N. -u-la, F., rēg-ula, rule (√rēg-, guide).

244. -bro-, N. -bru-m (202): crī-bro-, N. crī-bru-m, sieve (√cer-, crī-, sift); lā-bru-m, wash-basin (√lav-, wash). -brā-, N. -bra, F.: dolā-bra, chisel, mattock (dolā-re); late-bra, hiding-place (√lat-, hide).

245. -bulo-, N. -bulu-m (202): pā-bulo-, N. pā-bulu-m, fodder (√pā-, keep); vēnā-bulu-m, hunting-spear (vēnā-rī); pat-ibulu-m, pillory (√pat-, stretch). -bulo- sometimes denotes the place where: sta-bulu-m, standing-place, stall (√sta-, stand). -bulā-, N. -bula, F., rare: sū-bula, awl (√su-, sew); ta-bula, board (√ta-, stretch); fā-bula, talk (√fā-, talk).

(B.) DENOMINATIVES.

I. THE QUALITY.

246. The suffixes -io-, -iā-; -tā-, -tāt-, -tūt-, -tū-din-, are used to denote the Quality: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

conlēg-io-

conlēgium

,

colleagueship conlēgā-

, N.

conlēga

,

colleague

audāc-iā-

audācia

,

boldness audāci-

, N.

audāx

,

bold

cīvi-tāt-

cīvitās

,

citizenship cīvi-

, N.

cīvis

,

citizen

magni-tūdin-

magnitūdō

,

greatness magno-

, N.

magnus

,

great

247. These abstracts are feminine, and come chiefly from adjectives or participles, except those in -io-, which are neuters, and come mostly from substantives. Sometimes the same stem takes two or more of these suffixes: as, clāri-tāt- or clāri-tūdin-, brightness (clāro-); iuven-tūt-, in poetry iuven-tāt- or iuven-tā-, youth (iuven-).

(1.) -io- (N. -iu-m), -iā- (N. -ia), -iē- (N. -iēs).

248. -iē- sometimes occurs as collateral form to -iā- (604); -io- or -iā- is sometimes attached to other suffixes: thus, -t-io-, -t-iā- (-t-iē-); -mōn-io-, -mōn-iā-; -cin-io-.

249. -io-, N. -iu-m, chiefly used in compounds, denotes belonging to, with a very wide range of meaning; many of these words are clearly neuter adjectives in -io- (305). Suffixed to personal names -io- often denotes the condition, action, or employment, which gives rise to the name; this meaning sometimes passes over to that of result, relation of persons, collection of persons, or place.

250. (a.) From simple noun stems: sen-io-, N. sen-iu-m, feeble old age (sen-); somn-iu-m, dream (somno-); sāv-iu-m, love-kiss (suāvi-); silent-iu-m, silence (silenti-); crepund-ia, plural, rattle (*crepundo-); mendāc-iu-m, lie (mendāci-); sōlāc-iu-m, comfort (*sōlāci-, comforting).

251. (b.) Direct compounds (377): aequinoct-iu-m, equinox (aequo-, nocti-); contubern-iu-m, companionship (com-, tabernā-); prīvilēg-iu-m, special enactment (prīvo-, lēg-).

252. (c.) Indirect compounds (377), chiefly from personal names: cōnsil-iu-m, deliberating together, faculty of deliberation, conclusion, advice, deliberative body (cōnsul-); auspic-iu-m, taking auspices, auspices taken (auspic-); rēmig-iu-m, rowing, oars, oarsmen (rēmig-); conlēg-iu-m, colleagueship, corporation (conlēgā-); aedific-iu-m, building (*aedific-, builder); perfug-iu-m, asylum (perfugā-).

253. -t-io- N. -t-iu-m, rare: servi-tio-, N. servi-tiu-m, slavery, slaves (servo-); calvi-tiu-m, baldness (calvo-).

254. -mōn-io-, N. -mōn-iu-m (202): testi-mōnio-, N. testi-mōniu-m, evidence (testi-); mātr-imōniu-m, marriage (mātr-); patr-imōniu-m, patrimony (patr-).

255. -cin-io-, N. -cin-iu-m, rare: latrō-cinio-, N. latrō-ciniu-m, robbery (latrōn-); patrō-ciniu-m, protection (patrōno-).

256. -iā-, N. -ia, is very common indeed, forming abstracts from nouns, mostly adjectives or present participles.

audāc-iā-, N. audāc-ia, boldness (audāci-); miser-ia, wretchedness (misero-); abundant-ia, plenty (abundanti-); scient-ia, knowledge (scienti-); mīlit-ia, warfare (mīlit-); victōr-ia, victory (victōr-); māter-ia, timber (māter-); custōd-ia, guard (custōd-).

257. -iē-, N. -iē-s: pauper-iē-, N. pauper-iē-s, moderate means (pauper-). Most stems in -iē- are primitive (222).

258. -t-iā-, N. -t-ia, is suffixed to a few adjective stems, chiefly in -o-: iūsti-tiā-, N. iūsti-tia, justice (iūsto-); mali-tia, wickedness (malo-); pudīci-tia, shamefastness (pudīco-); trīsti-tia, sadness (trīsti-).

259. -t-iē-, N. -t-iē-s, particularly as a collateral form of -t-iā- in the N., Ac., and Ab. singular (604): molli-tiē-, N. molli-tiē-s, softness (molli-).

260. -mōn-iā-, N. -mōn-ia (202): ācri-mōniā-, N. ācri-mōnia, sharpness (ācri-); parsi-mōnia, economy (parso-). Analogously from roots, quer-imōnia, complaint (√ques-, complain); al-imōnia, nurture (√al-, nurture).

(2.) -tā- (N. -ta), -tāt- (N. -tā-s), -tūt- (N. -tū-s), -tū-din- (N. -tū-dō).

261. -tā-, N. -ta: chiefly poetic: iuven-tā-, N. iuven-ta, youth (iuven-); senec-ta, age (sen-ec-).

262. -tāt-, N. -tā-s (202), is one of the very commonest suffixes.

pie-tāt-, N. pie-tā-s, dutifulness (pio-, 105); fēlīci-tā-s, happiness (fēlīci-); cīvi-tā-s, citizenship, the community (cīvi-); facili-tā-s, easiness, facul-tā-s, ability (facili-); cāri-tā-s, dearness (cāro-); auctōr-itā-s, authority (auctōr-); līber-tā-s, freedom (lībro-, 111, b); maies-tā-s, grandeur (maiōs-); volun-tā-s, wish (*volunti-, 179); venus-tā-s, grace (venusto-, 179); ae-tā-s, age (aevo-, 111, a); tempes-tā-s, kind of time, weather (tempes-).

263. -tūt-, N. -tū-s, only in iuven-tūt-, N. iuven-tū-s, youth (iuven-), senec-tū-s, age (senec-), servi-tū-s, slavery (servo-), and vir-tū-s, manhood (viro-, 111).

264. -tū-din-, N. -tū-dō, suffixed to adjective stems: magni-tūdin-, N. magni-tūdō, greatness (magno-); forti-túdō, courage (forti-); and to a few participles: cōnsuē-tūdō, custom (cōnsuēto-, 179); sollici-tūdō, anxiety (sollicito-); analogously valē-tūdō, health (*valēto-, valēre).

II. THE PERSON CONCERNED.

265. The suffixes -ārio-, -ōn-, -iōn-, -li-, -no-, and some others, are used to denote the Person concerned or occupied with a thing: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

sīc-ārio-

sīcārius

,

assassin sīcā-

, N.

sīca

,

dagger

āle-ōn-

āleō

,

gambler āleā-

, N.

ālea

,

die

lūd-iōn-

lūdiō

,

player lūdo-

, N.

lūdus

,

play

aedī-li-

aedīlis

,

aedile aedi-

, N.

aedis

,

house

tribū-no-

tribūnus

,

tribune tribu-

, N

tribus

,

tribe

III. THE PLACE.

266. Neuters with the suffixes -tōrio-, -ārio-, -īli-, -to-, or -ēto- are often used to denote the Place: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

audī-tōrio-

audī-tōrium

,

lecture-room audītōr-

, N.

audītor

,

hearer

aer-ārio-

aerārium

,

treasury aer-

, N.

aes

,

money

ov-īli-

ovīle

,

sheepfold ovi-

, N.

ovis

,

sheep

murt-ēto-

murtēta

,

myrtlegroves murto-

, N.

murtus

,

myrtle

IV. DIMINUTIVES.

267. The suffixes -lo-, -lā-, or -cu-lo-, -cu-lā-, are used to form substantives with a Diminutive meaning. Diminutives may denote:

268. (1.) Actual smallness: as, secūricula, a little hatchet; ventulus, a bit of wind; spēcula, a ray of hope.

269. (2.) Imputed smallness: implying, (a.) admiration, affection, or compassion; (b.) contempt or irony. This diminutive, which usually serves to add point to sentences themselves of a playful, patronizing, or slurring character, is very hard to translate; little and small are often inadequate; old or poor will sometimes do; but usually recourse must be had to free translations adapted to the particular context: as,

ōrātiuncula, a gem of a speech, an attempt at a speech; mātercula, an anxious mother, poor mamma, dear mamma; lectulus, one’s own little bed; ānellus aureolus, a gay gold ring; Graeculī, our Greek cousins, the good people in Greece; Graeculus, a regular Greek, your gentleman from Greece; muliercula, a pretty girl, a lady gay, one of the gentler sex, a mere woman, an unprotected female, a maiden all forlorn; lacrimula, a wee tear, a crocodile tear; volpēcula, Master Reynard, dan Russel; tōnstrīcula, a common barber girl; popellus, rabble; nummulī, filthy lucre; mercēdula, an apology for pay; ratiuncula, a first rate reason; caupōnula, a low tavern.

270. Some diminutives have entirely lost the diminutive meaning: as, puella, girl, not necessarily little girl; others have changed their original meaning: as, avunculus, uncle, originally grandpapa; anguīlla, eel, originally little snake. Some words are only found in the diminutive form: as, stēlla, star (*ster-). Diminutives usually have the gender of their primitives; exceptions are rare: as, rāna, frog, F., rānunculus, tadpole, M.

(1.) -lo- (N., M. -lu-s, Ne. -lu-m), -lā- (N. -la).

271. Stems in -o-, -ā-, or a mute (-g-, -c-, -d-, or -t-), take -lo- or -lā-, which is usually preceded by -u- (202).

hortu-lo-, N. hortu-lu-s, little garden (horto-); oppidu-lu-m, hamlet (oppido-); serru-lā-, N. serru-la, little saw (serrā-); rēg-ulu-s, chieftain (rēg-); vōc-ula, a bit of a voice (vōc-); calc-ulu-s, pebble (calci-); nepōt-ulu-s, a grandson dear (nepōt-); aetāt-ula, tender age (aetāt-).

272. Stems in -eo-, -io-, or -vo-, retain -o- before -lo-; stems in -eā-, -iā-, or -vā-, also have -o- before -lā-.

alveo-lo-, N. alveo-lu-s, little tray (alveo-); gladio-lu-s, little sword (gladio-); servo-lu-s, little slave (servo-); nauseo-lā-, N. nauseo-la, a slight squeamishness (nauseā-); bēstio-la, little animal (bēstiā-); fīlio-la, little daughter (fīliā-).

273. Stems in -lo-, -ro-, -no-, and -lā-, -rā-, -nā-, commonly drop the stem vowel and assimilate -r- or -n- to -l-: thus: -el-lo-, -el-lā- (111, b; 166, 6, 7).

catel-lo-, for *catululo-, N. catel-lu-s, puppy (catulo-); agel-lu-s, little field (agro-); asel-lu-s, donkey (asino-); fābel-lā-, N. fābel-la, short story (fābulā-); umbel-la, sunshade (umbrā-); pāgel-la, short page (pāginā-). A few words are not thus changed: pueru-lo-, N. pueru-lu-s, poor boy (puero-), as well as puel-lu-s.

274. Another vowel than e (172, 3) appears in: Hispāl-lu-s (Hispāno-), Messāl-la (Messānā-), proper names; corōl-la, chaplet (corōnā-); ūl-lu-s, the least one, any at all (ūno-); Sūl-la (Sūrā-), proper name; lapil-lu-s, for *lapid-lu-s, pebble (lapid-). Also homul-lu-s, son of the dust (homon-).

(2.) -cu-lo- (N., M. -cu-lu-s, Ne. -cu-lu-m), -cu-lā- (N. -cu-la).

275. Stems in a continuous sound (-l-, -n-, -r-, or -s-), or in -i-, -u-, or -ē-, usually take -cu-lo- or -cu-lā-.

sermūn-culo-, N. sermūn-culu-s, small-talk (sermōn-); virgun-culā-, N. virgun-cula, little maid (virgon-); homun-culu-s, son of earth (homon-); arbus-cula, tiny tree (arbos-); cor-culu-m, heart of hearts (cord-, 170, 12); igni-culu-s, spark (igni-); ani-cula, grandam (anu-); diē-cula, brief day (diē-); analogously, volpē-cula (vixen), little fox (*volpē-). Rarely with ī: canī-cula, little dog (can-).

276. -un-culo-, N. -un-culu-s: av-unculo-, N. av-unculu-s, uncle (avo-); rān-unculu-s, tadpole (rānā-). -un-culā-, N. -un-cula: dom-unculā-, N. dom-uncula, little house (domo-).

277. Diminutives are sometimes formed from other diminutives: cistel-lu-la, casket (cistel-la, cistu-la, cistā-).

WITH A FORMATIVE SUFFIX.

304. -io- is one of the commonest suffixes, and is often added to other suffixes; thus: -c-io-, -īc-io-; -tōr-io- (-sōr-io-); -ār-io-.

I. THE AGENT.

II. THE ACTION.

1470. By action is meant the operation of any verb, whether active or passive, and whether used intransitively or transitively.

249. -io-, N. -iu-m, chiefly used in compounds, denotes belonging to, with a very wide range of meaning; many of these words are clearly neuter adjectives in -io- (305). Suffixed to personal names -io- often denotes the condition, action, or employment, which gives rise to the name; this meaning sometimes passes over to that of result, relation of persons, collection of persons, or place.

604. (2.) Stems of the second class are formed by the suffix -iē- or -tiē-, and have three or more syllables.

239. -men-to-, N. -men-tu-m (202), is one of the commonest suffixes; it sometimes denotes result of action, rarely action itself.

2269. The supine is a verbal substantive. The form in -um is an accusative. The form in is used sometimes as a dative, sometimes as an ablative.

430. Many nouns are defective in case.

368. Verbs in -āre are by far the most numerous class of denominatives; they are usually transitive; but deponents often express condition, sometimes occupation: as, dominārī, lord it, play the lord; aquārī, get oneself water. Most verbs in -īre also are transitive; those in -ēre usually denote a state: as, calēre, be warm; but some are causative: as, monēre, remind.

287. -do-, N. -du-s (202), denotes a state, and usually has a parallel verb in -ēre (368): cali-do-, N. cali-du-s warm (cf. calē-re); calli-du-s, knowing (cf. callē-re); niti-du-s, shining (cf. nitē-re); rarely in -ere: cup-idu-s, desirous (cf. cupe-re); flui-du-s, liquid (cf. flue-re); rapi-du-s, hurried (cf. rape-re). -i-do- becomes -i-di- in viri-di-s, green (cf. virē-re). -do- sometimes occurs in denominatives: herbi-du-s, grassy (herbā-).

III. THE INSTRUMENT OR MEANS.

I. THE QUALITY.

305. -io-, N. -iu-s: rēg-io-, N. rēg-iu-s, of or like a king (rēg-); patr-iu-s, of a father (patr-). Here belong many gentile names: as, Sēst-iu-s (Sexto-). These are used with substantives as adjectives: as, lēx Cornēl-ia, lēx Iūl-ia. Furthermore patrial adjectives: as, Corinth-iu-s, Corinthian (Corintho-). In some, consonant -io- is used: plēbē-iu-s, of the commons (plēbē-). -io- is rare in primitives: exim-iu-s, select (ex, √em-, take).

377. A Direct Compound is one formed directly from two parts: as, con-iug-, N. coniūnx, yoke-fellow (com-, together, √iug-, yoke); con-iungere, join together (com-, iungere); an Indirect Compound is one formed by the addition of a suffix to a direct compound: as, iūdic-io-, N. iūudicium, trial (iūdic-): iūdicā-re, judge (iūdic-).

II. THE PERSON CONCERNED.

III. THE PLACE.

IV. DIMINUTIVES.

278. A few other suffixes have a diminutive meaning: as, -ciōn-, -leo-, -astro-, -ttā-: homun-ciō, manikin, child of dust (homon-); acu-leu-s, sting (acu-); Antōni-aster, regular little Antony; pīn-aster, bastard pine; Iūli-tta, Juliet (Iūliā-); Pōlli-tta, little Polla (Pōllā-).

V. PATRONYMICS.

279. Patronymics, or proper names which denote descent from a father or ancestor, have stems in -dā- (N. -dē-s), F. -d- (N. -s). These are chiefly Greek names used in poetry.

Prīami-dā-, N. Prīami-dē-s, scion of Priam’s house; Tantali-d-, N. Tantali-s, daughter of Tantalus. Pēlī-dē-s (Pēleu-s); Aenea-dē-s (Aenēā-); Thestia-dē-s (Thestio-); Lāertia-dē-s (Lāertā-); Scīpia-dā-s (Scīpiōn-). F. sometimes -īnē or -ōnē: Neptūnīnē (Neptūno-); Acrisiōnē (Acrisio-).

II. THE ADJECTIVE.

(A.) PRIMITIVES.

280. Primitive adjectives may usually be divided into active and passive; but the same suffix often has either an active or a passive meaning. Under primitive adjectives belong the participles; but these will be mentioned in connection with the verb.

I. WITH AN ACTIVE MEANING.

281. The suffixes -o-, -uo-, -ci-, -lo-, and -do-, are used to form adjectives with an Active meaning: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

vag-o-

vagus

,

wandering

vag-

,

wander

contig-uo-

contiguus

,

touching com-

, √

tag-

,

touch

minā-ci-

mināx

,

threatening minā-rī

,

threaten

cali-do-

calidus

,

warm

cal-

,

warm

(1.) -o- (N. -u-s); -uo- (N. -uu-s).

282. -o- (N. -u-s): such words express nature or capacity: vag-o-, N. vag-u-s, roaming (√vag-, roam); vīv-u-s, living (√vīv-, live); many are compounds: as, male-dic-u-s, abusive (male, √dic-, say); pro-fug-u-s, flying on (prō-, √fug-, fly). Passive: fīd-u-s, trustworthy (√fīd-, trust).

283. -uo-, N. -uu-s: adsid-uo-, N. adsid-uu-s, unremitting (ad, √sed-, sit); contig-uu-s, touching (com-, √tag-, touch); perpet-uu-s, uninterrupted (per, √pet-, go). Some words are passive: as, sal-vu-s, safe (√sal-, save); vac-uu-s, empty (√vac-, empty); relic-uo-s, left behind (re-, √liqu-, leave), later reliquos, relicus, reliquus (157).

(2.) -ci- (N. -x); -lo- (N. -lu-s); -do- (N. -du-s).

284. -ā-ci-, N. -ā-x (202), denotes capacity, habit, or inclination, often implying censure: pugnā-ci-, N. pugnā-x, full of fight (pugnā-re); minā-x, threatening (minā-ri); fer-āx, productive (√fer-, bear); dic-āx, full of mother-wit, quick at a joke (√dic-, say); rap-āx, apt to snatch (√rap-, snatch).

285. -u-lo-, N. -u-lu-s (202), denotes simple action: as, pat-ulo-, N. pat-ulu-s, spreading (√pat-, spread); or inclination: as, bib-ulu-s, apt to drink (√bib-, drink).

286. The suffixes -undo- (-endo-), -bundo-, and -cundo- form a group and are possibly related to the suffix in -do-.

287. -do-, N. -du-s (202), denotes a state, and usually has a parallel verb in -ēre (368): cali-do-, N. cali-du-s warm (cf. calē-re); calli-du-s, knowing (cf. callē-re); niti-du-s, shining (cf. nitē-re); rarely in -ere: cup-idu-s, desirous (cf. cupe-re); flui-du-s, liquid (cf. flue-re); rapi-du-s, hurried (cf. rape-re). -i-do- becomes -i-di- in viri-di-s, green (cf. virē-re). -do- sometimes occurs in denominatives: herbi-du-s, grassy (herbā-).

288. -undo- (-endo-), N. -undu-s, (-endu-s) is the suffix of the gerundive, which was originally neither active nor passive (2238). In a few words from reflexives, which have become adjectives, it has a reflexive or active meaning: lāb-undo-, N. lāb-undu-s, gliding, slipping (lābī); ori-undu-s, arising (orīrī); sec-undu-s, following (sequī); volv-endu-s, rolling (volvī). See 899.

289. -bundo-, N. -bundu-s (202), has the meaning of an exaggerated present participle: freme-bundo-, N. freme-bundu-s, muttering away (√frem-, roar); treme-bundu-s, all in a flutter (√trem-, quiver); fur-ibundu-s, hot with rage (√fur-, rave); cōntiōnā-bundu-s, speaking a speech (cōntiōnā-rī); minitā-bundu-s, breathing out threatenings (minitā-rī); vītā-bundu-s, forever dodging (vītā-re).

290. -cundo-, N. -cundu-s, denotes permanent quality: fā-cundo-, N. fā-cundu-s, eloquent (√fā-, speak); īrā-cundu-s, choleric (īrā-scī); iū-cundu-s, pleasant, interesting (√iuv-, help).

II. WITH A PASSIVE MEANING.

291. The suffixes -li-, -ti-li-, -bili-, -tīvo-, -no-, and -mino-, are used to form adjectives with a Passive meaning: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

fac-ili-

facilis

,

easy to do

fac-

,

do

duc-tili-

ductilis

,

ductile

duc-

,

draw

amā-bili-

amābilis

,

lovable amā-re

,

love

mag-no-

magnus

,

great

mag-

,

increase

(1.) -li-, (N. -li-s); -ti-li-, -bili- (N. -ti-li-s, -bili-s).

292. -i-li-, N. -i-li-s (202), denotes passive capability: fac-ili-, N. fac-ili-s, easy to do (√fac-, do); frag-ili-s, breakable, frail (√frag-, break); hab-ili-s, manageable, handy (√hab-, hold); nūb-ili-s, marriageable (√nūb-, veil).

293. -ti-li-, N. -ti-li-s, or -si-li-, N. -si-li-s (159), denotes capability or quality: as, duc-tili, N. duc-tili-s, capable of being drawn out, ductile (√duc-, draw); fis-sili-s, cleavable (√fid-, split); rā-sili-s, scraped (√rād-, scrape). Rarely active: as, fer-tili-s, productive (√fer-, bear).

294. -bili-, N. -bili-s (202), denotes passive capability like -i-li-, but is far more common: horr-ibili-s, exciting a shudder (cf. horrē-re); amā-bili-s, lovable (amā-re); flē-bili-s, lamentable (√flē-, weep). Rarely active: as, sta-bili-s, that can stand (√sta-, stand); penetrā-bili-s, piercing (penetrā-re). -ti-bili- (159), passive, rare: flexibili-s, flexible (√flec-, bend, 960).

295. -tīvo-, N. -tīvu-s, denotes the way a thing originated: as, cap-tīvu-s, captive (√cap-, take); sta-tīvu-s, set (√sta-, set).

(2.) -no- (N. -nu-s); -mino- (N. -minu-s).

296. -no-, N. -nu-s, an old passive participle suffix, denotes result: mag-nu-s (enlarged), great (√mag-, great); plē-nus, full (√plē-, fill). Neuter as substantive: dō-nu-m, gift (√dō-, give). Sometimes active: egē-nu-s, needy (egē-re, 192).

297. The suffix -mino- (for -meno-, 103, a) in its weakest form (135, 2) is found in a few substantives: as, alu-mnu-s, nursling (√al-, nurse). The endings -minī (730) and -minō (731) are apparently case forms of the same suffix. -minō would seem to be an ablative; -minī may be a nominative plural.

(B.) DENOMINATIVES.

298. Denominative adjectives may be divided into such as denote: I. Material or Resemblance. II. Appurtenance: implying sometimes possession, often fitness, conformity, character, or origin. III. Supply. IV. Diminutives. V. Comparatives and Superlatives; a few of these are primitive.

I. MATERIAL OR RESEMBLANCE.

299. The suffixes -eo- and -n-eo- are used to form adjectives denoting Material or Resemblance: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

aur-eo-

aureus

,

golden auro-

, N.

aurum

,

gold

ahē-neo-

ahēneus

,

bronze

(

58

)

aes-

, N.

aes

,

bronze

300. -eo-, N. -eu-s: aur-eo-, N. aur-eu-s, golden, all gold, as good as gold (auro-); ferr-eu-s, iron (ferro-); pulver-eu-s, all dust (pulver-); virgin-eu-s, girlish (virgin-).

301. -n-eo-, N. -n-eu-s: ahē-neu-s, bronze (ahē-, 58; aes-); quer-neu-s, oaken (quercu-). -no- is usually poetical: as, ebur-nu-s, ivory (ebur-); quer-nu-s, oaken (quercu-). -ā-neo-, N. -ā-neu-s: miscell-āneu-s, mixed (miscello-).

II. APPURTENANCE.

302. The suffixes -o-, -io-, -vo-; -timo-, -li-, -no-; -bri-, -cri-, -tri-; -co-, -ti-, -si-, are used to form adjectives denoting Belonging to: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

rēg-io-

rēgius

,

kingly rēg-

, N.

rēx

,

king

mari-timo-

maritimus

,

of the sea mari-

, N.

mare

,

sea

rēg-āli-

rēgālis

,

of a king rēg-

, N.

rēx

,

king

can-īno-

canīnus

,

of a dog can-

, N.

canis

,

dog

mulie-bri-

muliebris

,

womanly mulier-

, N.

mulier

,

woman

cīvi-co-

cīvicus

,

citizen’s cīvi-

, N.

cīvis

,

citizen

(1.) -o- (N. -u-s), -io- (N. -iu-s), -vo- (N. -vu-s).

303. -o-, N. -u-s: decōr-o-, N. decōr-u-s, becoming (decōr-); canōr-u-s, melodious (canōr-); pervius, passable (via-).

304. -io- is one of the commonest suffixes, and is often added to other suffixes; thus: -c-io-, -īc-io-; -tōr-io- (-sōr-io-); -ār-io-.

305. -io-, N. -iu-s: rēg-io-, N. rēg-iu-s, of or like a king (rēg-); patr-iu-s, of a father (patr-). Here belong many gentile names: as, Sēst-iu-s (Sexto-). These are used with substantives as adjectives: as, lēx Cornēl-ia, lēx Iūl-ia. Furthermore patrial adjectives: as, Corinth-iu-s, Corinthian (Corintho-). In some, consonant -io- is used: plēbē-iu-s, of the commons (plēbē-). -io- is rare in primitives: exim-iu-s, select (ex, √em-, take).

306. -c-io-, N. -c-iu-s (202): aedīli-cio, N. aedīli-ciu-s, of an aedile (aedīli-); patr-iciu-s, of the fathers (patr-); later-iciu-s, of brick (later-).

307. -īc-io-, N. -īc-iu-s: nov-īcio-, N. nov-īciu-s, new, new-comer (novo-); nātāl-īciu-s, birthday’s (nātāli-); caement-īciu-s, rubble (caemento-). Usually suffixed to perfect participles to denote the quality derived from the past act: conduct-īciu-s, hired (conducto-); trālāt-īciu-s, transferred (trālāto-).

308. -tōr-io-, N. -tōr-iu-s, or -sōr-io-, N. -sōr-iu-s, from the agent (205) in -tōr- (-sōr-), is the commonest ending with -io-: imperā-tōrio-, N. imperā-tōriu-s, of a commander (imperātōr-). The neuter, as substantive, denotes the place where (266): audī-tōriu-m, lecture-room (audītōr-); dēvor-sōriu-m, inn (dēvorsōr-).

309. -ār-io-, N. -ār-iu-s, very common, is chiefly added to substantives: as, agr-ārio-, N. agr-āriu-s, of land (agro-). Often as substantive: not-āriu-s (265), stenographer (notā-); aer-āriu-m (266), treastury (aer-); sēmin-āriu-m, nursery (sēmin-); bell-āria, plural, goodies, bonbons (bello-).

310. -ī-vo-, N. -ī-vu-s (202): tempest-īvu-s, seasonable (tempestāt-, 126); aest-īvu-s, summer’s (aestāt-). See 179.

(2.) -timo- (N. -timu-s); -li- (N. -li-s); -no- (N. -nu-s).

311. -timo-, N. -timu-s (202), for an older -tumo- (28): mari-timo-, N. mari-timu-s, of the sea (mari-); fīni-timu-s, of the border (fīni-); lēg-itimu-s, lawful (lēg-).

312. -li- N. -li-s: humi-li-, N. humi-li-s, lowly (humo-); but almost always in denominatives -li- is preceded by a long vowel (202), usually -ā- or -ī-, thus: -ā-li- (-ā-ri-), -ī-li; -ē-li-, -ū-li-.

313. -ā-li-, N. -ā-li-s: rēg-āli-, N. rēg-āli-s, kingly (rēg-); decemvir-āli-s, of a decemvir (decemviro-); fāt-āli-s, fated (fāto-); t-āli-s, such (stem to-, that); qu-āli-s, as (quo-), -ā-ri-, N. -ā-ri-s, is used for -āli- if an l precedes (173): as, mol-āri-, N. mol-āri-s, of a mill (molā-); mīlit-āri-s, of a soldier (mīlit-). Neuters in -āli- and -āri- often become substantives (600): fōc-āle, neckcloth (fauci-); anim-al, breathing thing (animā-); calc-ar, spur (calci-).

314. -ī-li-, N. -ī-li-s: cīv-īli-, N. cīv-īli-s, of a citizen (cīvi-); puer-ili-s, boyish (puero-). The neuter, as substantive, sometimes denotes the place where (266): ov-īle, sheepfold (ovi-).

315. -ē-li, N. -ē-li-s: fidē-li-, N. fidē-li-s, faithful (fidē-); crūd-ēli-s, cruel (crūdo-); patru-ēli-s, cousin (patruo-). -ū-li-, N. -ū-li-s: tribū-li-, N. tribū-li-s, tribesman (tribu-).

316. The old participle suffix -no- (296) is sometimes added at once to noun stems, sometimes to other suffixes: thus, -ā-no-, -ī-no-; -ti-no-, -tī-no-; -er-no-, -ur-no-.

317. -no-, N. -nu-s, is added to stems formed with the comparative suffix -ero- or -tero- (347), denoting place: super-no-, N. super-nu-s, above; inter-nu-s, internal (inter); exter-nu-s, outside; so, also, alter-nu-s, every other (altero-); and to a very few substantives: as, pater-nu-s, fatherly (patr-); frāter-nu-s, brotherly (frātr-); vēr-nu-s, of spring (vēr-). Also to cardinals, making distributives: as, bī-nī, two by two (for *dṷīnī, duo-, 161).

318. -ā-no-, N. -ā-nu-s (202): arcā-no-, N. arc-ānu-s, secret (arcā-); Rōma-nu-s, of Rome (Rōmā-); mont-ānu-s, of a mountain (monti-); oppid-ānu-s, of a town (oppido-). -i-āno-: Cicerōn-iāno-, N. Cicerōn-iānu-s, Cicero’s. Rarely -ā-neo-: mediterrā-neu-s, midland (medio-, terrā-).

319. -ī-no-, N. -ī-nu-s (202): mar-īno-, N. mar-īnu-s, of the sea; repent-īnu-s, sudden (repenti-); oftenest added to names of living beings: as, can-īnu-s, of a dog (can-); dīv-īnu-s, of a god (dīvo-); -ē-no-: lani-ēnu-s, ali-ēnu-s. Also to proper names: as, Plaut-īno-, N. Plaut-īnu-s, of Plautus (Plauto-); Alp-īnu-s, Alpine (Alpi-).

320. -ti-no-, N. -ti-nu-s, is used in some adjectives of time: crās-tinu-s, to-morrow’s (crās-); diū-tinu-s, lasting (diū); prīs-tinu-s, of aforetime (prī-, prae).

321. -tī-no-, N. -tī-nu-s, is used in a few words of place and time: intes-tīno-, N. intes-tinu-s, inward (intus); vesper-tīnu-s, at eventide (vespero-).

322. From words like frāter-nus (from *fratr(i)-nus, 111, b), pater-nus, exter-nus, inter-nus, arose a new suffix -terno-: as, hes-ternus, from the stem hes- (cf. her-ī, 154), and -erno- in hodiernus. From the adverb *noctur (νυκτωρ) was derived noctur-nus, by analogy to which diurnus was formed. Elsewhere the -ur of -urnus and the -tur- of -turnus belong to the stem: as, ebur-nus; tacitur-nus, from the agent *taci-tor (205).

(3.) -bri-, -cri-, -tri- (N. -ber or -bri-s, &c.).

323. -bri-, N. -ber or -bri-s: salū-bri-, N. salū-ber, healthy (salūt-); mulie-bri-s, womanly (mulier-).

324. -cri-, N. -cer or -cri-s (202): volu-cri-, N. volu-cer, winged (*volo-, flying); medio-cri-s, middling (medio-).

325. -tri-, N. -ter or -tri-s: eques-tri-, N. eques-ter, of horsemen (equit-, 152); sēmēs-tri-s, of six months (sex, mēns-). -es-tri- is used in a few words: camp-ester, of fields (campo-); silv-estri-s, of woods (silvā-).

(4.) -co- (N. -cu-s); -ti-, -si- (N. -s, -si-s).

326. -co- is often suffixed to -ti-, sometimes to -es-ti-; thus: -ti-co-, -es-ti-co-.

327. -co-, N. -cu-s: cīvi-co-, N. cīvi-cu-s, of a citizen (cīvi-); belli-cu-s, of war (bello-); vīli-cu-s, bailiff (vīllā-). -ā-co-, -ī-co-, -ū-co- (202): merā-cu-s, amī-cu-s, antī-cu-s, aprī-cu-s, postī-cu-s, pudī-cu-s, cadū-cu-s. -ti-co-, N. -ti-cu-s: rūs-tico-, N. rūs-ticu-s, of the country (rūs-). -es-ti-co-, N. -es-ti-cu-s: dom-esticu-s, of a house (domo-, domu-).

328. -ti- or -si- denotes belonging to a place; usually -ā-ti-, -ī-ti-, -es-ti-, -en-ti-; -ēn-si-, or -i-ēn-si-.

329. -ti-, N. -s: Tībur-ti-, N. Tībur-s, Tiburtine (Tībur-). -ā-ti-: quoi-āti-, N. quoi-ā-s, what countryman? (quoio-); Anti-ā-s, of Antium (Antio-); optim-ātēs, good men and true (optimo-). -ī-ti-: Samn-īti-, N. Samn-ī-s, Samnian (Samnio-). -en-ti-: Vēi-enti-, N. Vēi-ēn-s, of Vei (Vēio-). -es-ti-, N. -es-ti-s: agr-esti-, N. agr-esti-s, of the fields (agro-); cael-esti-s, heavenly (caelo-).

330. -ēn-si-, N. -ēn-si-s (202), from appellatives of place or proper names of place: castr-ēnsi-, N. castr-ēnsi-s, of a camp (castro-); circ-ēnsi-s, of the circus (circo-); Hispāni-ēnsi-s (temporarily) of Spain. -i-ēnsi-: Karthāgin-iēnsi-s, of Carthage (Karthāgin-).

III. SUPPLY.

331. The suffixes -to- or -ōso- are used to form adjectives denoting Supplied or Furnished with: as,

Stem.

Nominative.

From.

barbā-to-

barbātus

,

bearded barbā-

, N.

barba

,

beard

ann-ōso-

annōsus

,

full of years anno-

, N.

annus

,

year

(1.) -to- (N. -tu-s); -len-to- (N. -len-tu-s).

332. -to-, the perfect participle suffix, is sometimes added at once to a noun stem, sometimes to other suffixes, thus: -āto-, -īto-, -ēto-, -ūto-, -ento-, -lento-.

333. -to-, N. -tu-s: onus-to-, N. onus-tu-s, loaded (onus-); vetus-tu-s, full of years (*vetus-, year); iūs-tu-s, just (iūs-); hones-tu-s, honourable (*hones-); fūnes-tu-s, deadly (fūnes-). -ā-to-: barbā-tu-s, bearded (barbā-); dent-ātu-s, toothed (denti-); -ī-to-: aurī-tu-s, long-eared (auri-); -ū-to-: cornū-tu-s, horned (cornu-). -en-to-, N. -en-tu-s: cru-ento-, N. cru-entu-s, all gore (*cruenti-, *cruēre). As substantive, arg-entu-m (white metal), silver; flu-enta, plural, streams (fluenti-).

334. The neuter of stems in -to-, as a substantive, denotes the place where something, generally a plant, is found (266): arbus-tu-m, vineyard (arbos-); commonly preceded by -ē-, forming -ē-to- (202), usually plural: dūm-ēta, thorn-thickets (dūmo-); murt-ēta, myrtle-groves (murto-).

335. -len-to-, N. -len-tu-s (202): vīno-lento-, N. vīno-lentu-s, drunken (vīno-); sanguin-olentu-s, all blood (sanguin-); lūcu-lentu-s, bright (lūci-, 28); pulver-ulentu-s, dusty (pulver-). A shorter form -lenti- is rare: vi-olenti-, N. vi-olēn-s, violent (vi-); op-ulēn-s, rich (op-).

(2.) -ōso- (N. -ōsu-s).

336. -ōso- (sometimes -ōnso-, -ōsso-), N. -ōsu-s, full of, is very common indeed, -ōso- is sometimes attached to other suffixes, thus: -c-ōso-, -ul-ōso-, -ūc-ul-ōso-.

337. -ōso-, N. -ōsu-s: ann-ōso-, N. ann-ōsu-s, full of years; fōrm-ōnsu-s, fōrm-ōssu-s or fōrm-ōsu-s, shapely (fōrmā-); perīcul-ōsu-s, with danger fraught (perīculo-); mōr-ōsu-s, priggish, cross (mōr-); calamit-ōsu-s, full of damage (calamitāt-, 179); superstiti-ōsu-s, superstitious (superstitiōn-, 179); frūctu-ōsu-s, fruitful (frūctu-, 116, c); mont-uōsu-s, full of mountains (monti-, 202); cūri-ōsu-s, full of care (cūrā-); labōr-iōsu-s, toilsome (labōr-, 202).

338. -c-ōso-, N. -c-ōsu-s: belli-cōso-, N. belli-cōsu-s, warlike (bello-, bellico-). -ul-ōso-, N. -ul-ōsu-s: formīd-ulōso-, N. formid-ulōsu-s, terrible (formīdin-, 179). -ūc-ul-ōso-, N. -ūc-ul-ōsu-s:

met-ū-culoso-

, N. met-ū-culōsu-s, skittish (metu-).

IV. DIMINUTIVES.

339. Diminutives are formed from adjectives, as from substantives (267).

-lo-, N. -lu-s: aureo-lo-, N. aureo-lu-s, all gold, of precious gold, of

red red

gold, good as gold (aureo-); ebrio-lu-s, tipsy (ebrio-); parvo-lu-s, or parvu-lu-s, smallish (parvo-); frīgidu-lu-s, chilly (frigido-); vet-ulus, little old (vet-); tenellu-lu-s, soft and sweet (tenello-, tenero-); pulchel-lus, sweet pretty (pulchro-); bel-lu-s, bonny (bono-); novel-lu-s, newborn (*novolo-, novo-). -culo-, N. -culu-s: pauper-culo-, N. pauper-culu-s, poorish (pauper-); levi-culu-s, somewhat vain (levi-).

340. A peculiar class of diminutives is formed by adding -culo- to the comparative stem -ius- (346): as, nitidius-culo-, N. nitidius-culu-s, a trifle sleeker (nitidius-); longius-culu-s, a bit longer (longius-).

341. Adverbs sometimes have a diminutive form: as, bellē, charmingly; paullulum, a little bit; meliusculē, a bit better (340).

V. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

342. Comparatives and superlatives are usually formed from the stem of the positive: as, dignior, worthier, dignissimus, worthiest, from digno-, stem of dignus. A few are formed directly from roots: thus, maior, greater, and maximus, greatest, are formed from the √mag-, and not from magno-, stem of magnus.

(1.) COMPARATIVE -ior, SUPERLATIVE -issimus.

343. The nominative of comparative adjectives ends usually in -ior, and that of superlatives in -issimus: thus,

Comparative.

Superlative.

Masc.

Fem.

Neut.

Masc.

Fem.

Neut.

-ior

-ior

-ius

-issimus

-issima

-issimum

Positive.

Comparative.

Superlative.

altus

,

high

,

altior

,

higher

,

altissimus

,

highest

.

trīstis

,

sad

,

trīstior

,

sadder

,

trīstissimus

,

saddest

.

(2.) SUPERLATIVE -rimus.

344. Adjectives with the nominative in -er have the nominative of the superlative like the nominative of the positive with -rimus added (350): as,

Positive.

Comparative.

Superlative.

pauper

,

poor

,

pauperior

,

poorer

,

pauperrimus

,

poorest

.

ācer

,

sharp

,

ācrior

,

sharper

,

ācerrimus

,

sharpest

.

mātūrrimus occurs once (Tac.), for mātūrissimus, positive mātūrus, ripe.

(3.) SUPERLATIVE -limus.

345.

IV. DIMINUTIVES.

V. PATRONYMICS.

(A.) PRIMITIVES.

I. WITH AN ACTIVE MEANING.

368. Verbs in -āre are by far the most numerous class of denominatives; they are usually transitive; but deponents often express condition, sometimes occupation: as, dominārī, lord it, play the lord; aquārī, get oneself water. Most verbs in -īre also are transitive; those in -ēre usually denote a state: as, calēre, be warm; but some are causative: as, monēre, remind.

2238. Gerundives and gerunds, like the English verbal in -ing, were originally neither active nor passive (288), but might stand for either an active or a passive. In time a prevailing passive meaning grew up in the gerundive, and a prevailing active meaning in the gerund.

899. The gerundive stem is formed by adding -ndo-, nominative -ndus, -nda, -ndum, to the present stem: as,

II. WITH A PASSIVE MEANING.

960. (c.) With the present stem in -to|e- (835).

730. In the passive second person singular, Terence has always, Plautus commonly -re; later it is unusual in the present indicative, except in deponents; but in other tenses -re is preferred, especially in the future -bere, by Cicero, -ris by Livy and Tacitus. The second person plural passive is wanting; its place is supplied by a single participial form in -minī, which is used without reference to gender, for gender words and neuters alike (297).

731. Deponents have rarely -mino, in the imperative singular: as, second person, prōgredimino, step forward thou (Plaut.); in laws, as third person: FRVIMINO, let him enjoy; or -tō and -ntō for -tor and -ntor: as, ūtitō, let him use; ūtuntō, let them use. In a real passive, -ntō is rare: as, CENSENTO, let them be rated.

(B.) DENOMINATIVES.

I. MATERIAL OR RESEMBLANCE.

II. APPURTENANCE.

600. (1.) Stems of the first class have one or two syllables; there are four of them: rēs, thing, spēs, hope, diēs, day, and fidēs, faith.

347. Other comparative suffixes are -ro- or -ero-, and -tro- or -tero-, used in a few words, principally designating place: as, sup-erī, the upper ones, īnferī, the nether ones; ex-terī, outsiders, posterī, after-generations; alter, the other; uter, whether? which of the two? (for *quo-ter, 146); dexter, right.

III. SUPPLY.

IV. DIMINUTIVES.

346. The comparative suffix is -iōs-, which becomes in the singular, nominative masculine and feminine, -ior (154; 132), neuter nominative and accusative, -ius (107, c); in all other cases -iōr- (154).

V. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

350. Stems which end in -ro-, -ri-, or -li- (344, 345) take the suffix -issimo- (cf. -simo-, 351) with syncope of its initial i (111) and assimilation of the final l or r (166, 8).

humilis, difficilis, and facilis,

similis, dissimilis, and gracilis,

have the nominative of the superlative in -limus, following l of the stem (350): as,

Positive.

Comparative.

Superlative.

humilis

,

lowly

,

humilior

,

lowlier

,

humillimus

,

lowliest

.

THE COMPARATIVE SUFFIX.

346. The comparative suffix is -iōs-, which becomes in the singular, nominative masculine and feminine, -ior (154; 132), neuter nominative and accusative, -ius (107, c); in all other cases -iōr- (154).

347. Other comparative suffixes are -ro- or -ero-, and -tro- or -tero-, used in a few words, principally designating place: as, sup-erī, the upper ones, īnferī, the nether ones; ex-terī, outsiders, posterī, after-generations; alter, the other; uter, whether? which of the two? (for *quo-ter, 146); dexter, right.

348. Some words designating place have a doubled comparative suffix, -er-iōr-, or -ter-iōr-: as, sup-er-ior, upper, īnferior, lower. ci-ter-ior, hither, dēterior (lower), worse, exterior, outer, interior, inner, posterior, hinder, after, ulterior, further, dexterior, more to the right, -is-tro- is used in two words which have become substantives: min-is-ter (inferior), servant, and magister (superior), master.

THE SUPERLATIVE SUFFIX.

349. The common superlative suffix is -issimo-, nominative -issimus, with older -issumo-, nominative -issumus (28).

350. Stems which end in -ro-, -ri-, or -li- (344, 345) take the suffix -issimo- (cf. -simo-, 351) with syncope of its initial i (111) and assimilation of the final l or r (166, 8).

351. The suffix -timo- is further used in a few root superlatives: ci-timus, dextimus, extimus, intimus, optimus, postumus, and ultimus; and -simo- in maximus, pessimus, and proximus.

352. The suffix -mo- or -imo- is used in sum-mo-, N. summus, highest (sub); min-imo-, N. minimus, least; prīmus, first, septimus, seventh, decimus, tenth. -mo- or -imo- is attached to -is- (135, 2) in plūrimus for *plō-is-imo-s (fullest), most (99); and to -rē- or -trē-, possibly an adverbial form (705), in suprēmus, extrēmus, and postrēmus.

PECULIARITIES OF COMPARISON.

353. Some positives have a comparative or superlative, or both, from a different form of the stem: such are,

frūgī

,

thrifty

,

frūgālior

,

frūgālissimus

.

nēquam

,

naughty

,

nēquior

,

nēquissimus

.

iuvenis

,

young

,

iūnior

,

(

nātū minimus

).

senex

,

old

,

senior

,

(

nātū maximus

).

magnus

,

great

,

maior

,

maximus

(

351

).

beneficus

,

kindly

,

beneficentior

,

beneficentissimus

.

honōrificus

,

complimentary

,

honōrificentior

,

honōrificentissimus

.

magnificus

,

grand

,

magnificentior

,

magnificentissimus

.

354. iuvenior, younger, is late (Sen., Plin., Tac.). benevolēns, kindly, benevolentior, benevolentissimus, and maledīcēns, abusive, maledīcentior (once each, Plaut.), maledīcentissimus, have usually as positive benevolus and maledicus respectively.

355. Some positives have a comparative or superlative, or both, from a wholly different stem: such are,

bonus

,

good

,

melior

,

optimus

(

351

).

malus

,

bad

,

peior

,

pessimus

(

351

).

multus

,

much

,

plūs

(sing. Ne. only),

plūrimus

(

352

).

parvus

,

little

,

minor

,

minimus

(

352

).

parvus has rarely parvissimus.

356. Four comparatives in -erior or -terior, denoting place (348), have two forms of the superlative; the nominative masculine singular of the positive is not in common use:

exterior

,

extimus

(

351

), or

extrēmus

(

352

),

outermost

.

īnferior

,

īnfimus

, or

īmus

,

lowest

.

posterior

,

postumus

(

351

),

lastborn

, or

postrēmus

(

352

),

last

.

superior

,

summus

(

352

), or

suprēmus

(

352

),

highest

.

357. Six, denoting place, have the positive only as an adverb or preposition:

cis

,

this side

,

citerior

(

348

),

citimus

(

351

),

hitherest

.

,

down

,

dēterior

(

348

),

dēterrimus

,

lowest

,

worst

.

in

,

in

,

interior

(

348

),

intimus

,

inmost

.

prae

,

before

,

prior

,

prīmus

(

352

),

first

.

prope

,

near

,

propior

,

proximus

(

351

),

nearest

.

uls

,

beyond

,

ulterior

(

348

),

ultimus

(

351

),

furthest

.

ōcior, swifter, ōcissimus, has no positive.

358. These have a superlative, but no comparative: bellus, pretty, falsus, false, inclutus, famed, invictus, unconquered, invītus, unwilling, meritus, deserving, novus, new; vetus, veterrimus, old, sacer, sacerrimus, sacred, vafer, vaferrimus, sly; malevolus, malevolentissimus (twice, Cic.), spiteful; maleficus, maleficentissimus (once, Suet.), wicked, mūnificus, mūnificentissimus (inscrr.; Cic. once),

generous,

mīrificus, mīrificissimus (twice, Acc., Ter.), strange. Plautus has ipsissumus, his very self.

359. Most primitives in -ilis and -bilis (292, 294), have a comparative, but no superlative; but these have a superlative: facilis and difficilis (345), easy and hard, ūtilis, useful; also fertilis, productive, amābilis, lovable, mōbilis, movable, nōbilis, well known.

360. Many adjectives have no suffixes of comparison, and supply the place of these by magis, more, and maximē, most: as, mīrus, strange, magis mīrus, maximē mīrus. Many adjectives, from their meaning, do not admit of comparison.

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE ADVERBS.

361. Adverbs derived from adjectives have as their comparative the accusative singular neuter of the comparative adjective; the superlative is formed like that of the adjective, but ends in : as,

altē

,

on high

,

altius

,

altissimē

.

ācriter

,

sharply

,

ācrius

,

ācerrimē

.

facile

,

easily

,

facilius

,

facillimē

.

362. An older superlative ending, -ēd for , occurs in an inscription of 186 B.C.: FACILVMED, i.e. facillimē. A few adverbs have superlatives in or -um: as, meritissimō, most deservedly; prīmō, at first, prīmum, first; postrēmō, at last, postrēmum, for the last time.

363. If the comparison of the adjective has peculiarities, they are retained in the adverb likewise: as, bene, well, melius, optimē; male, ill, peius, pessimē; multum, much, plūs, plūrimum; mātūrē, betimes, mātūrius, mātūrissimē (Cic., Plin.), or mātūrrimē (Cic., Caes., Sall., Tac.). ōcius, swifter, no

positive,

ōcissimē. minus, less, is formed by the nominal suffix -es- (236), from √min- (minuō); for magis, more, see 135, 2. In poetry magis sometimes becomes mage, as if neuter of an adjective in -i-.

364. A few adverbs not derived from adjectives are compared: as, diū, long, diūtius, diūtissimē; saepe, often, saepius, saepissimē; nūper, lately, no comparative, nūperrimē; secus, otherwise, sētius, the less; temperī, betimes, temperius, earlier, no superlative.

(B.) FORMATION OF DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

365. Denominative verb stems have present infinitives in -āre, -ēre, or -īre (-ārī, -ērī, or -īrī), and are formed from noun stems of all endings: as,

Verb.

From Noun.

fugā-re

,

rout fugā-

, N.

fuga locā-re

,

place loco-

, N.

locus nōminā-re

,

name nōmin-

, N.

nōmen levā-re

,

lighten levi-

, N.

levis sinuā-re

,

bend sinu-

, N.

sinus albē-re

,

be white albo-

,

N.

albus miserē-rī

,

pity misero-

, N.

miser flōrē-re

,

blossom flōr-

, N.

flōs sordē-re

,

be dirty sordi-

, N.

sordēs pūnī-re

,

punish poenā-

, N.

poena condī-re

,

season condo-

, N.

condus custōdī-re

,

guard custōd-

, N.

custōs vestī-re

,

dress vesti-

, N.

vestis gestī-re

,

flutter gestu-

, N.

gestus

366. These present verb stems are formed by adding the suffix -i̭o-, -i̭e- to the noun stem: as *fugā-i̭ō, I flee; the between two vowels was dropped (153, 2) and the final vowel of noun stem was often contracted with the ending (118, 3). The noun stem ending is often slightly modified.

367. In a half a dozen denominatives from stems in -u- the u of the noun stem remains without modification, and is not contracted with the variable vowel (116, c): these are, acuere, sharpen (acu-), metuere, fear, statuere, set, tribuere, assign; arguere, make clear, bātuere, beat.

368. Verbs in -āre are by far the most numerous class of denominatives; they are usually transitive; but deponents often express condition, sometimes occupation: as, dominārī, lord it, play the lord; aquārī, get oneself water. Most verbs in -īre also are transitive; those in -ēre usually denote a state: as, calēre, be warm; but some are causative: as, monēre, remind.

369. Many denominative verbs in -āre contain a noun suffix which is not actually found in the noun itself; such suffixes are: -co-, -cin-, -lo-, -er-, -ro-, -to-, &c.: as,

-co-: albi-cāre, be white (*albi-co-); velli-cāre, pluck (*velli-co-, plucker). -cin-: latrō-cinārī, be a robber (latrōn-); sermō-cinārī, discourse (sermōn-). -lo-: grātu-lārī, give one joy (*grātu-lo-); vi-olāre, harm (*vi-olo-); heiu-lāri, cryheia’ (*heiu-lo-). -er-: mod-erārī, check (*mod-es-, 236). -ro-: tole-rāre, endure (*tole-ro-); flag-rāre, blaze (*flag-ro-). -to-: dēbili-tāre, lame (*dēbili-to-); dubi-tāre, doubt (*dubi-to-).

370. Many denominatives in -āre are indirect compounds (377), often from compound noun stems which are not actually found. So, particularly, when the first part is a preposition, or the second is from the root fac-, make, ag-, drive, do, or cap-, take: as,

opi-tul-ārī, bear help (opitulo-); suf-fōc-āre, suffocate (*suf-fōc-o-, fauci-); aedi-fic-āre (housebuild), build (*aedific- or *aedifico-, housebuilder); sīgni-fic-āre, give token (*sīgnifico-); fūm-ig-āre, make smoke (*fūmigo-, smoker, fūmo-, √ag-); nāv-ig-āre, sail, and rēm-ig-āre, row (nāvi-, ship, and rēmo-, oar); mīt-ig-āre, make mild (mīti-); iūr-ig-āre, commonly iūr-g-āre, quarrel (iūr-); pūr-ig-āre, commonly pūr-g-āre, clean (pūro-); gnār-ig-āre, tell (gnāro-, narrāre, 169, 2; 133, 1); anti-cip-āre, take beforehand (*anticipo-, ante, √cap-); oc-cup-āre, seize (*occupo-); re-cup-er-āre, get back (*recupero-).

371. Many verbs in -tāre (-sāre), or -tārī (-sārī), express frequent, intense, or sometimes attempted action. These are called Frequentatives or Intensives; they are formed from perfect participle stems; but stems in -ā-to- become -i-to-: as,

cant-āre, sing (canto-); cess-āre, loiter (cesso-); amplex-ārī, embrace (amplexo-); habit-āre, live (habito-); pollicit-āri, make overtures (pollicito-); dormīt-āre, be sleepy (dormīto-); neg-itāre, keep denying (for *negā-tāre, with suffix -i-tāre, 910).

372. Some frequentatives in -tāre are formed from the present stem of a verb in -ere; the formative vowel before -tāre becomes i: as,

agi-tāre, shake (age-re); flui-tāre, float (flue-re); nōsci-tāre, recognize (nōsce-re); quaeri-tāre, keep seeking (quaere-re); scīsci-tārī, enquire (scīsce-re); vēndi-tāre, try to sell (vēnde-re).

373. A few frequentatives add -tā- to the perfect participle stem: as,

ācti-tāre, act often (ācto-); facti-tāre, do repeatedly (facto-); lēcti-tāre, read again and again (lēcto-); ūncti-tāre, anoint often (ūncto-). From a frequentative another frequentative is sometimes derived: as, dict-āre, dictate, dicti-tāre, keep asserting (dicto-).

374. Some verbs are found only as frequentatives: as, gust-āre, taste (*gusto-, √gus-, taste); put-āre, think (puto-, √pu-, clean); aegrōt-āre, be ill (aegrōto-).

375. A few verbs in -uriō, -urīre, express desire; such are called Desideratives: as, ēss-urīre or ēs-urīre, want to eat (edere, ēsse). A few in -ssō, -ssere, express earnest action; such are called Meditatives: as, lacē-ssō, lacē-ssere, provoke.

COMPOSITION.

376. In compounds, the fundamental word is usually the second, which has its meaning qualified by the first.

377. A Direct Compound is one formed directly from two parts: as, con-iug-, N. coniūnx, yoke-fellow (com-, together, √iug-, yoke); con-iungere, join together (com-, iungere); an Indirect Compound is one formed by the addition of a suffix to a direct compound: as, iūdic-io-, N. iūudicium, trial (iūdic-): iūdicā-re, judge (iūdic-).

378. A Real Compound is a word whose stem is formed from two stems, or an inseparable prefix and a stem, fused into one stem; an Apparent Compound is formed by the juxtaposition of an inflected word with another inflected word, a preposition, or an adverb.

I. COMPOSITION OF NOUNS.

(A.) REAL COMPOUNDS.

FORM OF COMPOUNDS.

379. If the first part is a noun, its stem is taken: as, Ahēno-barbus, Redbeard, Barbarossa; usually with weakening of a stem vowel (103-105): as, aurifex, jeweller (auro-). On other changes of the final vowel in the first member of compounds, see 174. Sometimes with disappearance of a syllable (179); as, *venēni-ficus, venē-ficus, poisoner (venēno-); or of a vowel (111): as, man-ceps, contractor (manu-); particularly before a vowel (119): as, magn-animus, great-souled (magno-). Consonant stems are often extended by i before a consonant: as, mōri-gerus, complaisant (mōr-).

380. Stems in -s-, including those in -er-, -or- and -ōr- (236), are sometimes compounded as above (379): as, nemori-vagus, woodranger; honōri-ficus, complimentary; but usually they drop the suffix and take i: as, opi-fex, work-man (oper-); foedi-fragus, truce-breaker (foeder-); volni-ficus, wounding (volner-); mūni-ficus, generous (mūner-); terri-ficus, awe-inspiring (terrōr-); horri-fer, dreadful, horri-sonus, awful-sounding (horrōr-).

381. The second part, which often has weakening of the vowel (102), is sometimes a bare root used as a stem (199), oftener a root with a formative suffix; or a noun stem, sometimes with its stem ending modified: as, iū-dic-, N. iūdex, juror (√dic-, declare); causi-dic-o-, N. causidicus, pleader (209); in-gen-io-, N. ingenium, disposition (√gen-, beget, 219); con-tāg-iōn-, N. contāgiō, touching together (√tag-, touch, 227); im-berb-i-, N. imberbis, beardless (barbā-).

MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.

382. Determinatives are compounds in which the second part keeps its original meaning, though determined or modified by the first part. The meaning of a determinative may often be best expressed by two words.

383. (1.) The first part of a determinative may be an adjective, an adverb, a preposition, or an inseparable prefix; the second part is a noun: as,

lāti-fundium, i.e. lātī fundī, broad acres; prīvi-lēgium, i.e. prīva lēx, special act; alti-sonāns, i.e. altē sonāns, high-sounding; con-discipulus, i.e. cum alterō discipulus, fellow-pupil; per-magnus, i.e. valdē magnus, very great; in-dignus, i.e. nōn dignus, unworthy.

384. (2.) The first part of a determinative may represent the oblique case of a noun, generally a substantive; the second part is a noun or verb stem. These compounds are called Objectives: as,

Accusative of direct object (1132), armi-ger, i.e. quī arma gerit, armour-bearer; dative of indirect object (1208), man-tēle, i.e. manibus tēla, handkerchief, napkin; genitive (1227), sōl-stitium, i.e. sōlis statiō, solstice; ablative instrumental (1300), tubi-cen, i.e. quī tubā canit, trumpeter; locative (1331), Troiu-gena, i.e. Troiae nātus, Troy-born; ablative locative (1350), nocti-vagus, night-wandering; monti-vagus, mountain-ranging.

385. Possessives are adjective compounds in which the meaning of the second part is changed. The second part of a possessive is always formed from a substantive, qualified by the noun, adverb, or inseparable prefix of the first part, and the whole expresses an attribute which something has: as,

longi-manus, longarms, long-armed; miseri-cors, tender-hearted; bi-linguis, two-tongued; magn-animus, greatheart, great-hearted; im-berbis, beardless.

(B.) APPARENT COMPOUNDS.

386. Apparent Compounds are formed:

387. (1.) By two nouns combined, one with an unchanging case ending, the other with full inflections: as, aquae-ductus, aqueduct; senātūs-cōnsultum, decree of the senate; pater-familiās, father of a family; vērī-similis, like the truth; in these words, aquae, senātūs, familiās, and vērī are genitives, and remain genitives, while the other part of the compound is declinable.

388. (2.) By a substantive with an adjective habitually agreeing with it, both parts being declined: as, rēs pūblica, the common-weal; rēs gestae, exploits; iūs iūrandum, oath; pecūniae repetundae, money claim.

389. (3.) By nouns, chiefly substantives, in the same case placed loosely side by side and making one idea. The two words may be used: (a.) Copulatively: as, ūsus-frūctus, use and enjoyment; pactum-conventum, bargain and covenant; duo-decim, two and ten, twelve; or (b.) Appositively: one word explaining the other (1045): as, Iuppiter, Jove the Father (94; 133); Mārspiter, Mars the Father, for Mārs pater.

390. (4.) From an original combination of an oblique case with a preposition: as, prōcōnsul, proconsul, from prō cōnsule, for a consul; ēgregius, select, from ē grege, out of the herd; dēlīrus, astray, mad, from dē līrā, out of the furrow.

II. COMPOSITION OF VERBS.

(A.) REAL COMPOUNDS.

391. Real Compounds are direct compounds of a verb with a preposition; the root vowel or diphthong of the verb is often weakened (102): as,

per-agere, put through, accomplish; ab-igere, drive away; ex-quīrere, seek out. The prefix, which was originally a separate adverb modifying the verb, is in poetry sometimes separated from the verb by another word; the disyllabic prepositions in particular often remain as juxtaposed adverbs (396).

392. Some prepositions are inseparable, that is, used only in composition: ambi-, round, an-, up, dis-, in two, apart, por-, towards, red-, re-, back, sēd-, sē-, by oneself, away: as, amb-īre, go round to; an-hēlāre, breathe up; dis-pellere, drive apart; por-rigere, stretch forth; red-dere, give back; sē-iungere, separate.

(B.) APPARENT COMPOUNDS.

393. Apparent Compounds are formed by the juxtaposition of:

394. (1.) A verb with a verb: faciō and fīō are added to present stems, mostly of intransitive verbs in -ēre; the -e- of the first verb is sometimes long, and sometimes short (130, 5): as, calē̆-facere, make warm (calēre); excandē̆-facere, make blaze (candēre); madē̆-facere, make wet (madēre). In these apparent compounds, the accent of faciō remains the same as in the simple verb: as, calē̆fácis.

395. (2.) A substantive with a verb: as, anim-advertere, pay heed to, animum advertere; vēnum-dare, or vēndere, sell, vēnum dare; vēn-īre, be sold, vēnum īre; lucrī-facere, make gain, lucrī facere; manū-mittere, set free.

396. (

3.

) An adverb with a verb: as, circum-dare, put round; satis-facere, satis-dare, give satisfaction; intro-īre, go inside; mālle, prefer, for magis velle (170, 2); nōlō, be unwilling, for ne volō; ne-scīre, hau-scīre, not know.

C. INFLECTION.

397. Inflection is the change which nouns, pronouns, and verbs undergo, to indicate their relation in a sentence.

The inflection of a noun or pronoun is often called Declension, and that of a verb, Conjugation.

(A.) INFLECTION OF THE NOUN.

398. The noun or pronoun is inflected by attaching case endings to the stem.

The endings, which are called case endings for brevity, indicate number as well as case, and serve also to distinguish gender words from neuters in the nominative and accusative singular of some stems, and of all plurals. These endings are nearly the same for stems of all kinds.

THE STEM.

399. The stem contains the meaning of the noun. Noun stems are arranged in the following order: (1.) stems in -ā-, in -o-, in a consonant, or in -i-; these are substantive, including proper names, or adjective; (2.) stems in -u- or -ē-; these are substantive only, and include no proper names.

400. In some instances, a final stem vowel is retained before a case ending which begins with a vowel: as, urbi-um, ācri-a, cornu-a, portu-ī, portu-um (116, c); in others the stem vowel blends inseparably with the vowel of the case ending: as, mēnsīs, dominīs (108, a).

401. Some nouns have more than one form of the stem: as,

sēdēs (476); femur, iecur (489); vās, mēnsis (492); vīrus, volgus (493); iter, nix, senex, &c. (500); vīs (518); caedēs (523); famēs, plēbēs (524); domus (594); angiportus, &c. (595). Many nouns have a consonant stem in the singular, and an -i- stem in the plural: see 516; most substantives in -iē- or -tiē- have a collateral form in -iā- or -tiā- (604). Some adjectives have two different stems: as, hilarus, hilara, hilarum, and hilaris, hilare; exanimus and exanimis.

GENDER.

402. There are two genders, Masculine and Feminine. Masculine and feminine nouns are called Gender nouns. Nouns without gender are called Neuter.

403. Gender is, properly speaking, the distinction of sex. In Latin, a great many things without life have gender in grammar, and are masculine or feminine.

404. Some classes of substantives may be brought under general heads of signification, as below, like the names of rivers and winds (405), which are usually of the masculine gender, or of plants (407), which are usually of the feminine. When the gender cannot be determined thus, it must be learned from the special rules for the several stems and their nominatives.

GENDER OF SOME CLASSES OF SUBSTANTIVES.

MASCULINES.

405. Names of male beings, rivers, winds, and mountains, are masculine: as,

Caesar, Gāius, Sūlla, men’s names; pater, father; erus, master; scrība, scrivener; Tiberis, the Tiber; Aquilō, a Norther; Lūcrētilis, Mt. Lucretilis.

406. The river names: Allia, Dūria, Sagra, Lēthē, and Styx are feminine. Also the mountain names Alpēs, plural, the Alps, and some Greek names of mountains in -a or : as, Aetna, Mt. Etna; Rhodopē, a Thracian range. A few are neuter, as Sōracte.

FEMININES.

407. Names of female beings, plants, flowers, shrubs, and trees, are feminine: as,

Gāia, Glycerium, women’s names; mālus, apple-tree; quercus, oak; īlex, holm-oak; abiēs, fir.

408. Masculine are: bōlētus, mushroom, carduus, thistle, dūmī, plural, brambles, intibus, endive, iuncus, rush, oleaster, bastard olive, rubus, bramble, rumex, sorrel, scirpus, bulrush, and rarely fīcus, fig. Also some of Greek origin: as, acanthus, amāracus, asparagus, and crocus. Neuter are: apium, parsley, balsamum, balsam-tree, rōbur, heart of oak, and some names with stems in -er- (573).

MOBILE, COMMON, AND EPICENE NOUNS.

409. Mobile Nouns have different forms to distinguish sex: as, Iūlius, a man, Julius, Iūlia, a woman, Julia; cervus, stag, cerva, hind; socer, father-in-law, socrus, mother-in-law; victor, conqueror, victrīx, conqueress. Adjectives ‘of three endings’ (611), belong to this class.

410. Some nouns have one ending, but are applicable to either sex. Such are said, to be of Common Gender: as, adulēscēns, young man or young woman; dux, leader; īnfāns, baby, child; and many other consonant stems or stems in -i-, denoting persons. Adjectives ‘of two endings’ or ‘of one ending’ (611), belong to this class.

411. Epicenes have one ending and one grammatical gender, though applicable to animals of either sex. Thus, aquila, eagle, is feminine, though it may denote a he-eagle as well as a

she-eagle;

anatēs, ducks, feminine, includes drakes.

NEUTERS.

412. Infinitives, words and expressions quoted or explained, and letters of the alphabet, are neuter: as,

vīvere ipsum, mere living; istūc ‘taceō,’ your ‘I won’t mention;’ longum vale, a long goodbye; o Graecum, Greek O. But the letters have sometimes a feminine adjective, agreeing with littera understood.

VARIABLE GENDER.

413. Some substantives have different genders in the two numbers; the different gender is sometimes indicated by a difference of stem: as, epulum, neuter, epulae, feminine, feast. See balneum, frēnum, jocus, locus, margarīta, ostrea, rāstrum, in the dictionary.

NUMBER.

414. There are two numbers, the Singular used of one, the Plural of more than one.

415. ambō, both, and duo, two, nominative and accusative masculine and neuter, are the only remnants of an old Dual number, denoting two.

416. Some substantives, from their meaning, have no plural.

Such are: proper names: as, Cicerō, Cicero; Rōma, Rome; material and abstract substantives: as, oleum, oil, vīnum, wine, iūstitia, justice; and gerunds: as, regendī, of guiding. For the occasional use of the plural, 1105-1110.

417. Some substantives, from their meaning, have no singular.

Such are: names of persons of a class: as, maiōrēs, ancestors; superī, the beings above; mānēs, ghosts; of feasts, sacrifices, days: as, Sāturnālia, festival of Saturn; kalendae, first of the month; of things made of parts or consisting of a series of acts: as, arma, arms; artūs, joints; quadrīgae, four-in-hand; exsequiae, funeral rites; of some places: as, Faleriī; Vēī; Pompēī; Athēnae, Athens; Alpēs, the Alps.

418. Some substantives have different meanings in the two numbers: as,

aedis, temple, aedēs, house; auxilium, aid, auxilia, auxiliaries; carcer, jail, carcerēs, race-barriers; Castrum, Castle, castra, camp; comitium, meeting-place, comitia, election; cōpia, abundance, cōpiae, troops; facultās, ability, facultātēs, wealth; fīnis, end, fīnēs, boundaries; grātia, favour, grātiae, thanks; impedīmentum, hindrance, impedīmenta, baggage; littera, letter (of the alphabet), litterae, epistle; rōstrum, beak, rōstra, speakers stand. See also aqua, bonum, fortūna, lūdus, opera, pars, in the dictionary.

CASE.

419. Nouns have five cases, the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative.

The nominative represents a noun as subject, the accusative as object; the genitive denotes the relation of of, the dative of to or for, and the ablative of from, with, in, or by. But the meanings of the cases are best learnt from reading. All cases but the nominative and vocative (420) are called Oblique Cases.

420. Town names and a few appellatives have also a case denoting the place where, called the Locative. Masculine stems in -o- and some Greek stems with other endings have still another form used in addressing a person or thing, called the Vocative.

421. The stem of a noun is best seen in the genitive; in the genitive plural it is preserved without change, except that o of -o- stems is lengthened (123). In dictionaries the stem ending is indicated by the genitive singular, thus: -ae, , -is, -ūs (-ĕī), indicate respectively stems in -ā-, -o-, a consonant or -i-, -u-, and -ē-, as follows:

Genitive Singular.

Genitive Plural.

Stems in.

-ae

,

mēnsae

,

table -ārum

,

mēnsā-rum -ā-

,

mēnsā-

, N.

mēnsa

,

dominī

,

master -ōrum

,

dominō-rum -o-

,

domino-

, N.

dominus -is

,

rēgis

,

king

-cons.

um

,

rēg-um

-consonant,

rēg-

, N.

rēx -is

,

cīvis

,

citizen -ium

,

cīvi-um -i-

,

cīvi-

, N.

cīvis -ūs

,

portus

,

port -uum

,

portu-um -u-

,

portu-

, N.

portus

(

ĕ̄ī

,

rĕ̄ī

),

thing

(

-ērum

,

rē-rum

)

,

rē-

, N.

rēs

422. Gender nominatives usually add -s to the stem: as, servo-s or servu-s, slave, rēx (164, 1), cīvi-s, portu-s, rē-s. But stems in -ā- or in a continuous consonant (-l-, -n-, -r-, or -s-) have no -s: as, mēnsa, cōnsul, consul, flāmen, special priest, pater, father, flōs, flower.

350. Stems which end in -ro-, -ri-, or -li- (344, 345) take the suffix -issimo- (cf. -simo-, 351) with syncope of its initial i (111) and assimilation of the final l or r (166, 8).

V. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

351. The suffix -timo- is further used in a few root superlatives: ci-timus, dextimus, extimus, intimus, optimus, postumus, and ultimus; and -simo- in maximus, pessimus, and proximus.

705. Instead of , neuter ablatives commonly have : as, longē, far, doctē, wisely. So also superlatives: facillimē, most easily, anciently FACILVMED (362). Consonant stems have -e: as, repente, suddenly.

(B.) FORMATION OF DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

377. A Direct Compound is one formed directly from two parts: as, con-iug-, N. coniūnx, yoke-fellow (com-, together, √iug-, yoke); con-iungere, join together (com-, iungere); an Indirect Compound is one formed by the addition of a suffix to a direct compound: as, iūdic-io-, N. iūudicium, trial (iūdic-): iūdicā-re, judge (iūdic-).

910. In some consonant root participles of verbs in -ere, -āre, or -ēre, which have the suffix -u- in the perfect stem (873), the -to- is preceded by a short i: as, genitus, born (971-976); domitus, tamed (993); monitus, warned (1003, 1004, 1009). In old Latin, e occurs: as, MERETA (41); e is retained in vegetus, sprightly. One participle has -tuo-: mortuus, dead.

COMPOSITION.

(A.) REAL COMPOUNDS.

119. Elision. Only rarely the first of two successive vowels is dropped: as, nūllus, no, for *ne-ūllus; likewise the final vowel of the first member of nominal compounds: as, multangulus, with many corners, for *multi-angulus (cf. multi-cavus, with many holes); flexanimus, heart-rending, for *flexi-animus (cf. flexi-pēs, with bent feet).

1132. The object of a verb is put in the accusative: as,

1208. This dative is sometimes detached from the verb, and used immediately with a substantive, instead of the genitive: as, Philocōmasiō custōs, Pl. MG. 271, the keeper for Philocomasium. rēctor iuvenī, Ta. 1, 24, a mentor for the young man. So particularly with a gerundive in official expressions: as, cūrātor mūrīs reficiendīs, OG. 19, commissioner for rebuilding the walls.

1227. A substantive is often limited by another substantive in the genitive.

1300. III. The Instrumental case denotes that by which or with which a main person or thing is attended (1356).

1331. (1.) Singular proper names of towns and of little islands are put in the locative to denote the place in or at which action occurs: as,

1350. (1.) The locative ablative is used to denote the point of time at which action occurs.

(B.) APPARENT COMPOUNDS.

1045. (2.) An Appositive is a separate substantive added as an explanation to another substantive, and in the same case, but not like the attribute uniting with it as one idea: as,

(A.) REAL COMPOUNDS.

396. (

3.

) An adverb with a verb: as, circum-dare, put round; satis-facere, satis-dare, give satisfaction; intro-īre, go inside; mālle, prefer, for magis velle (170, 2); nōlō, be unwilling, for ne volō; ne-scīre, hau-scīre, not know.

(B.) APPARENT COMPOUNDS.

C. INFLECTION.

(A.) INFLECTION OF THE NOUN.

THE STEM.

476. sēdēs, F., seat, has an -s- stem, namely -ēs (236), in the nominative, and sēd- in the other cases (401); G. Pl. sēdum, once sēdium (Vell. Pat.). The only example of a neuter stem in -d-, with nominative -r, genitive -dis, is cor (171, 2), heart, cordis, no G. Pl. (430).

489. (a.) Examples of stems in -r-, with nominative -r, genitive -ris, are:

492. vās, Ne., vessel, utensil, retains the s between two vowels: G. vāsis, D. vāsī, Ab. vāse, plural N. and Ac. vāsa; the G. vāsōrum, and D. and Ab. vāsis, are formed from an -o- stem, vāso- (401). mēnsis, M., month, mēnsis, has its nominative formed like that of -i- stems; G. Pl. mēnsum, sometimes mēnsuum or mēnsium. os (171, 1) Ne., bone, ossis, has no G. Pl. in good writers (430): ossium late.

493. The two neuters vīrus, gall, poison, and volgus or vulgus, the crowd, have -o- stems, except in the nominative and accusative (401), and no plural: thus, N. and Ac. volgus, G. volgī, D. and Ab. volgō. A masculine accusative volgum is sometimes found. The Greek neuter pelagus, the deep, has also G. pelagī, D. and Ab. pelagō, Pl. N. and Ac. pelagē (508).

500. The following have the nominative singular formed from a different stem from that of the other cases (401):

518. (a.) Like the singular of tussis are declined parisyllabic names of rivers and places, like Tiberis, Hispalis. Also cucumis, M., cucumber (but see 491), and the defectives sitis, F., thirst, Ac. sitim, Ab. sitī, no plural; and vīs, F., power, Ac. vim, Ab. . Plural (401): N. vīrēs, G. vīrium, D. and Ab. vīribus, Ac. vīrīs or vīrēs. (The D. is only found twice; a N. and Ac. Pl. vīs is very rare.)

523. (2.) Parisyllables in -i- with the nominative in -ēs have their other cases like those of hostis: such are:

524. famēs, hunger, has G. twice famī (Cato, Lucil.), Ab. always famē (603), no Pl.; plēbēs, commons, N. also plēbs or plēps, has G. plēbe͡i (603), plēbī or plēbis, no Pl.

594. domus, house, F., has stems of two forms, domu- and domo- (401); it is declined as follows: N. domus, G. domūs, rarely domī, D. domuī or domō, Ac. domum, Ab. domō or domū, Locative domī, rarely domuī. Plural: N. domūs, G. domuum, later domōrum, D. and Ab. domibus, Ac. domōs, less commonly domūs.

595. Some other substantives have an -u- stem in some of their cases, and an -o- stem in others: see angiportus, arcus, caestus, colus, cornū, cornus, cupressus, fīcus, fretus, gelus, laurus, murtus, penus, pīnus, quercus, rīctus, tonitrus, in the dictionary.

516. Stems in -i- are declined in the main like consonant stems, but have -im in the accusative of some substantives, and in the ablative of adjectives, of some gender substantives, and of neuters; in the plural they have -ium in the genitive, -īs often in the accusative of gender words, and -ia in the nominative and accusative neuter.

604. (2.) Stems of the second class are formed by the suffix -iē- or -tiē-, and have three or more syllables.

GENDER.

405. Names of male beings, rivers, winds, and mountains, are masculine: as,

407. Names of female beings, plants, flowers, shrubs, and trees, are feminine: as,

GENDER OF SOME CLASSES OF SUBSTANTIVES.

573. These substantives in -er are neuter: cadāver, corpse, iter, way, tūber, swelling, truffle, ūber, udder, verberis, lash, genitive, no nominative; also names of plants in -er: as, acer, maple, cicer, chickpea, papāver, poppy, piper, pepper, siler, osier, siser, skirret, sūber, corktree. linter, tub, boat, is feminine, once masculine. vēr, spring, is neuter.

611. Adjectives are often conveniently said to be ‘of three endings,’ ‘of two endings,’ or ‘of one ending.’

NUMBER.

CASE.

420. Town names and a few appellatives have also a case denoting the place where, called the Locative. Masculine stems in -o- and some Greek stems with other endings have still another form used in addressing a person or thing, called the Vocative.